pio ak £ Sime 5 Sesh es PLP ore erg % % f Cre es ne LEE Ce at Ss o dk, nance me Pets”, oe ma a als Shae bk oO 3 a x had ee fe ae SS Works of General Interest PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR, WALTON & MABERLY, UPPER GOWER STREET, AND IVY LANE. Descriptive Catalogues of Works for the Use of Schools and Colleges, and of Chemical, Literary and Scientific Works, published by Taylor, Walton & Maberly. t- »% A nt §Srom fhe Librarp of nad (Professor Wiffiam BHenrp Green — Bequeatfbed fp Bim fo Be LiBrarp of sa ; OS in 10rt are vay Princeton Theofoaica? Seminarp flu- Airy f\ | fj ae (© ods » d r be ¢ ida the > in which a record should be Kept OF the perlorivaiice or vie tycuiiveurye oer, wlus- trated by examples, drawn from several foreign railroads. The average daily work of locomotives in England and on the Continent, their average consumption of fuel, the fabrication and cost of coke, and other expenses attending the locomotive stock, are explained. In the chapter on the carrying-stock, the average work obtained from the various classes of vehicles on the railways of England and the Continent are examined, and the average distances which they severally run, the amount of stock necessary to work a given traffic, etc., are investigated. The questions of the maintenance and reproduction of the rolling stock is discussed at length in a separate chapter. These chapters are succeeded by two on the stations, and on the clearing-house, in which the details of the business comprehended under these important heads are discussed. A detailed analysis of the passengers’ and goods’ traffic is given in the next chapter. WERTHEIMER AND CO, TYPP. : | Se = <- a : — = —-—— — a - RG OD ®) WORKS PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR, WALTON, AND MABERLY. S77 ») Guesses at Truth, by Two Brothers. Third Edition. First Series, 6s.; Second Series, 7s. Reader, if you weigh me at all, weigh me patiently; judge me candidly; and may you find half the satisfaction in examining my Guesses, that I have myself had in making them.— To the Reader. Dr. Schmitz’s History of Rome, From the Earliest Times to the Death of Commopvs, A.D. DOD: One thick volume 12mo. Second Edition. 7s. 6d. cloth, or 8s. 6d. strongly bound in leather. THE immense progress made in investigating Roman history and antiquities within the last thirty or forty years, having materially altered the whole com- plexion of that study, has rendered indispensable a new manual, for the use of schools, removing the old errors and misconceptions which have long since been exposed and exploded by scholars. This compendium is designed to supply the want, by condensing and selecting out of a voluminous mass of detail, that which is necessary to give rather a vivid picture of the leading epochs of the history, than a minute narrative of the particulars recorded in the authorities. The author has availed himself of all the important works on the whole Roman history, or portions of it, which have appeared since Niebuhr gave a new life and new impulse to the subject. A copious table of chronology and indexes are added, Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, By various Writers. Edited by Dr. Witi1am Situ. Second Edition. One thick vol. 8vo. with several hundred Engravings One W-00ds 4 2025: Tus work, written by the editor in conjunction with seventeen other gentlemen, embodies the results of the latest investigations of the distinguished German scholars whose labours, within the last half century, have shed an entirely different light on the history, the private life, and the political relations of the Greeks and Romans. It comprehends all the topics of antiquities properly so called, including the laws, institutions, and domestic usages of the Greeks and Romans; painting, sculpture, music, the drama, and other subjects on which correct information can be obtained elsewhere only by consulting a large number of costly or untranslated works. The dictionary is illustrated by numerous wood-cuts, made under the superin- tendence of the writers of the several articles. They are chiefly representations of costumes, Weapons, ornaments, machines, implements, utensils, money, plans of buildings, and architectural embellishments. Subjoined are tables of Greek and Roman measures, weights, and money : with full indexes, Greek, Latin, and English. Dictionary of Greek & Roman Biography & Mythology. Edited by Witt1am Situ, LL.D. Medium 8vo. Illustrated by numerous Engravings on Wood. Complete in Three Volumes 5]. 15s. 6d. Each volume may be had separately. Tue period comprehended in this history of remarkable individuals, real or ideal, is from the earliest times to the fall of the Eastern Empire, in 1453. The work is the result of the joint labours of twenty-nine writers, whose names are attached to their respective articles,—the divisions of subjects having been severally allot- ted to such of the contributors as had made them more or less their peculiar study. Copious accounts are given of the writings of mathematicians, jurists, physicians, historians, poets, philosophers, and orators. The Latin and Greek Christian fathers also occupy considerable space; and the lives of painters, sculptors, and architects, contain details, useful to the artist, of all their works still extant, or of which there is any record in ancient writers. In fact, the work exhibits a view of the whole circle of ancient history and literature for upwards | of two thousand years. It is embellished, whenever possible, by wood-cuts, taken from ancient coins. Extensive chronological tables of Greek and Roman history D are added; and a table exhibiting at a glance the years B.c. or A.D. corresponding MG (A to any given A.U.c. or olympiad. -) — (4) (XK 622) ae AEGEAN RELVES oe 562A NX NOSSO Pauls ¥ YOO ] : [ je A Ve LEA Ore WA 0 / ihcomee Cae he} Vets (97. (538 ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX THE (IN CONTINUATION OF THE ELEMENTS) THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. BY HYMAN HURWITZ, LATE PROFESSOR OF HEBREW IN UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, LONDON, AUTHOR OF VINDICIZ HEBRAICA, HEBREW TALES, ETC. Fourth Hovition. LONDON: PRINTED FOR TAYLOR, WALTON & MABERLY, BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, UPPER GOWER STREET, & IVY LANE, PATERNOSTER ROW. M.DCCC.L. LONDON; PRINTED BY JOIN WERTHEIMER AND CO,, CIRCUS PLACE, FINSBURY CIRCUS. PREFACE. To enable the learner to read and write the Hebrew Language with comparative ease was the chief ob- ject of the First Part of this work. The road to the venerable structure having thus been cleared, the student may now imagine himself standing at its portal, waiting for an introduction to the interior, and a right of admission to the sacred treasures which it contains. To afford him this passport, and, if we may vary the metaphor, to place in his possession the keys by which the several caskets are to be opened, is the aim of the following pages. They unfold the Erymotocy. and Syntax of the Language. A mere catalogue of the names of Authors who have written on Hebrew Grammar, with the titles of their works, would occupy no scanty chapter in a Bibliographic Dictionary. ‘To promise therefore any novelty, in respect of the usual forms common to all Grammars, would be both idle and presumptuous. Let it suffice to say, that after a careful perusal of the standard works, the Author ventures to affirm, 1V PREFACE. that nothing of the least apparent practical importance or utility in the volumes of Ben Gannach, Jarchi, Aben Ezra, M. and D. Kimchi, Abraham de Balmes, Elias Levita, Ben Zeeb, §c., Buxtorf, Glassius, Schultens, Michaelis, Vater, Gesenius, Sc., has been overlooked. Neither have any of their decisions been neglected, but after due thought, and from a conviction that they were either erroneous, or foreign from the purpose of the present work. If I might advance any pretension to novelty, it would be in reference to a higher object, to a more permanent interest; namely, that of making a knowledge of the Hebrew Language conducive to a philosophic insight into the structure and essential principles of language universally. Deeply convinced that words are the signs of men’s thoughts, and not, as eranamarians one after the other have agreed to assert, the representatives of things, I have omitted no oppor- tunity of impressing this truth on the student’s atten- tion; and instead of contenting myself with that artificial classification or arrangement which assists indeed the passive memory, but, when exclusively relied on, tends to repress the higher powers, I have endeavoured to re-infuse into the words the living spirit by which they were once animated; opening out the rich and productive, though comparatively few, sources, from which they are derived, still split- ting and ramifying, under the various modifying causes and influences. With this view, I have sought to fix the attention, first, on the primary image, and PREFACE. y then on the derivative signification; and to exhibit the influence of the former on the latter, which is too often overlooked by the Translators, and lost in the idiom of a different language. ‘‘Accustom yourself,” observes the well-known author of the Aids to Re- flection, “to reflect on the words you use, hear, or read, their birth, derivation and history. For if words are not THINGS, they are LIVING PowERs, by which the things of most importance to mankind are actuated, combined and humanized.”* ‘“ Horne Tooke entitled his celebrated work, Ewea mtepoevra Winged Words: or language not only the vehicle of thought, but its wheels. The wheels of the intellect I admit them to be; but such as Ezekiel beheld in ‘the visions of God,’ as he sat amongst the captives by the river of Chebar. ‘Whithersoever the spirit was to go, the wheels went, and thither was their spirit to go; for the spirit of the living creatures was in the wheels also.’ ” F | In short throughout the whole work I have de- signedly addressed myself to the active faculties of the intellect, rather than to the mere memory ; yet not on this account neglecting, or less solicitous, to fur- nish the student with whatever aids may abridge his labour or tend to facilitate his progress. The Hebrew is generally considered the most simple of all languages. If by simplicity is meant * Preface p. xi. + Ibid. pp. vil. viii. Vi PREFACE. the simplicity of sentiment or of style, nothing can be more just. In the Sacred Records, you find none of those swelling epithets thick laid As varnish on a harlot’s cheek, the rest Thin sown with aught of profit or delight.— In them is plaznest taught and easiest learnt, What makes a nation happy and keeps it so. Paradise Regained. But when the term simplicity is applied, as it often is, to the words of the language, and when szmple is opposed to compound, nothing can be more erroneous. In point of fact, scarcely can a single sentence be shown, in which the greater part of the words are not compounds, that is, composed of the principal word and of one or more modificatory letters, the relics or abbreviations of other words; and as the latter, though not numerous, are susceptible of various com- binations, the same word will often appear under a variety of aspects, to the perplexity of the young student, and, not rarely, even of the advanced scholar, These difficulties | have endeavoured to remove— Ist. By explaining the modificatory letters, shew- ing their derivations, distinct signification, and the manner in which they are either prefixed or affixed to the principal words. 2nd. By presenting, throughout the etymological part, the modificatory letters, in a type differing from PREFACE. ioe that of the principal words, by which means the learner may easily find out the root of each. drd. By various tables, exhibiting at one view the principal modifications of which each of the essential parts of speech is susceptible. Ath. By short and appropriate exercises.—These, whilst they will in some measure break the tedium more or less inseparable from grammatical studies, may at the same time serve as a criterion by which the student may ascertain his own progress. In treating of the different parts of speech, Orien- talists generally begin with the verb. I have, how- ever, preferred the method adopted in teaching the European languages, as that to which the student may be supposed to be already accustomed. The same consideration has influenced me in the arrange- ment of the different parts of the verb. Those who are in the habit of teaching the Hebrew language, know how embarrassing it is to the learner to begin to conjugate a verb from what appears to him the wrong end, namely the third person instead of the first. In this work, therefore, the verb has been placed in the order which it occupies in the grammars of modern languages. No inconvenience can possibly arise from these alterations, as the general structure of the laneuage is so fully explained in the introductory chapter to the Etymology. In what regards the Syntax, the Author hopes that it will be found as plain and as comprehensive as the vill PREFACE. nature of the subject would admit. The introductory chapter to this part of the work should be read with particular attention, as it contains the principles on which most of the rules are founded. Though it is highly advisable that the learner should at first confine his reading to the Sacred Re- cords, yet it is desirable that he should, after having made sufficient progress, become acquainted with the uninspired writings of the Hebrews. With this view, several extracts from scarce books are given in the Appendix. A few specimens of translations from various languages have been inserted, to show the capabilities of the language. Lastly, an Index, containing most of the words explained in this work, has been added; forming an extensive Vocabulary of the language, and supplying in some measure the want of a Dictionary. On the whole, the Author hopes he may be allowed to say, that by availing himself of the labours of those who have preceded him in the same career, and by the unwearied attention which he has himself be- stowed on the subject, he has been able to condense in this volume more useful and interesting informa- tion on the Hebrew Language than is to be found in any similar work of equal extent. CONTENTS. Nature of Words and their Classification eS AONMM TOR OP co ecat eet of neat ce voce ys ri tiaks oo eral eM er ole Saree ca cic ce FOE oelee ed chee wok hth Meee Re per LLOMON. ac hose MN s.r ys a sc kL PPO, ot eee 22 oA be METRO MENVOTUS ein tin ae oi Ys hooey hoes casey anh Manner of Forming Substantives from Verbs............ Inflection and Modification of Words ................. Wouns and their Modifications. .............2....0fs.-. Prefixes JEL Miag 258 ih eat A a Og ONCE 01) CO ek an AE BUS a gl St a dat ORT OR OI ae Number ge are oe ha ee fae ERIE ae tn Absolute and Constructive State of Words... ....... me planation of. lables, (IT. WI lVir 2... hkl... Change of Vowels in the Process of Declension mumutapie and Mutable Vowels’ ......4000 023/425, Classification of Nouns.....0....0600.00 ik Pe ene Mciectives and their Variations A. ....i.5.s.0cseecee cavers Me alison Of; CJCCHVES oa/ su tela cien'e crip esietete viz taseietaes PTO ETA P EEG oe, (en Wea aan s Cle Pes hides eae chs eT S ee 8 hs hs Reeds aa PAGE. 1 to 6 ” 14 ,, 17 2) 18 ” 20», 28; 33; 35; 4 Lass 44 ” comeD 53 o4 08 60 ” 62 ,, 63 ,, Sour. 87 ”? 89 ” 95 x CONTENTS. Personal Pronouns, Table IX. ............... Demonstrative Pronouns Meative Pronoans 5.) .0.....ske Interrogative Pronouns ...... Primitive and Derivative Verbs Character and Signification of the Several Forms or \ Branches of the Verb, as Kal, Niphal, gc....... J Moods and Tenses .............4@... eR C UGE fc aicle «2s win vv ci ois spice 2atir coke aCe De eee Paradigm of a perfect Verb, 1st Conjugation, Table X. Remarks and Observations on the same.................. Verbs whose roots contain one of the letters YNAS 2nd Conjugation ............ 3rd__—_ ditto aL Vigee TECLILGO vu ste elesa ey ws a veew rh nee ech a oO ee a Piste MECLItlO. <0 p20. 6th ditto 2@ (0 Oe. 6 4.6 © 186 0.6 6 6's 6.6 06 b ote 6:46.40 wh Oe O ae Awe Foe, t 6.6 ee ae ae i ee Bea VO I OPALLON 545 esscos yak cmt uae suka eee eee eee Paples, sts SL. ATRL tees, year epe Doubly Imperfect Verbs Irregular Verbs CCC RCHC COE AOD CHE EME CEH TOE CHR SAMO es EEG CUP OCAM SUP Swe P eee ow 6 846 O.8s Cet Ow + COs Kes Sale a8 S Quadriliteral and Pluriliteral Verbs Objéctive’Pronominal Afiixes:.. (05. castania vies see abies A VEL Ls oct ack, erase ge nero ee Separable and Inseparable Particles COD oe Ce 2B 666 @ Ce 66 4 Oe ee Introductory Observations on the Syntax, Nature of Prepositions and their Constituent Parts..... j On the Several Kinds of Propositions................0.:0 Supordimate Members of ditto 2...2, aiasereeie voces HASOU BRT Bb 5 ha cai 1 ss ts ss cub aa Bee BRO. © Boo. ss ving uate boa ven cee eee Syntax of the Noun and the Article ee CONTENTS. Cases ...... Number O00 0 Dw Sd 0. 6 6 0 6.0 OW © 6 00,8) © we 00 6 6 6G ae HS 6 6 6 O08 OF 8 HO two 6/4 Be 0 8 Repetition of Nouns Syntax of Adjectives Tenses Application of the Genes es of Numerals of Pronouns CUMIN aa St ys EEF CLICE MEL DAT Retr i e eeeene Moods .. ae Meserative Mood. A Pubete Subjunctive and Potential Mosds PRE ST: marticrples |.) 4+. Per eee iar Concord of the Verb Dee aa Roane RE PeEe Government of the Verb Particles .. Arrangement ae Words Re TANMe ALCS ny Vetere. crete trl. bese tetas (als Welton ANCCUOLCE Um at arr OMen en Garo ad ce stung ie ere levee Noralt Maxim sah .tee tae eee seee cs dae X. A Metrical Paraphase of the 8th Psalm Xie Vrathoe RE CE Ane TAR pees BOT Ofc And HCAr Uh dee i Ree a trate ener es a XII. The Contented Shepherd ... APPENDIX. . Folly of Idolatry...... . Origin of Ditto .. SPN ER react MUAY CLOUD aire, ok ed esc yaren erence . Copy of a letter from the Roman Senate to the Jews . Ditto from Jonathan shiek High ote to the Spartans... . Tales from the eis 68 of Wie eo ewe) a oe wn 6 6 0/4) © ONE Cres os 0 08 6 88 6 ace on ie 8 e100) Selene © 6 le 66 e tye (OO U6 oe 4 av FO So hh ne Cr a Ce PAGE. 193 to 199 hoe 201 202 203 208 212 215 9? ? 201 202 203 208 212 214 220 227 231 233 234 256 239 241 249 256 xii XXI. AXIHL. CONTENTS. . Rules of Life .. i . The Tete Maes cgl Physic sician .. . Philanthropy .. Pte on . De Chemicon Philbsophie., et . God Save the King Pract ourtercia, (6.05 v5 aes oe . Morgen-Gedanken ......... . La Partenza erty Sonetto del Marini (0.8.5. 7-3.eae -Non Ebur, neque Aureum... Register of Words eee reer ee eee eet eee ree eee een eoeretereee PAGE 278 279 280 to 281 282 ,, 283 284 ,, 287 287 288 ,, 292 292 jy ae 298: apeee 300 ,, 301 803 ,, 313 ETYMOLOGY. CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 1. Erymonocy is that part of grammar which treats of the derivation of words, and of their classi- fication and modifications in connection with their derivation. Nature of Words and their Classification. 2. Words are articulate sounds which mankind use as signs of mental conceptions and thoughts; and language™ is the denomination given to the collective number of words by which human thoughts are conveyed. 3. As the representative of thoughts, language must contain signs corresponding with the various 0 sa ase Se i eS la poe * In Hebrew re tongue, or NAY Lip, these being the chief organs employed in the production of articulate sounds. B 4. THE ETYMOLOGY OF species of conceptions which the mind is capable of forming; and since all human beings are similarly organised, and consequently subject to similar im- pressions,—since they are all endowed with similar intellectual faculties, by which they are enabled not only to notice those impressions and consequent feelings, but likewise to trace them to their correspon- dents in nature, and thus to become acquainted at once with the phenomena of nature and of their own minds,—in short, since human thoughts differ only in degree, but not in kind, and all languages are only so many different copies taken from the same original, it follows that the words or signs of which languages are constituted must all admit of the same classification; and, consequently, that the Hebrew can have neither fewer nor more essential parts of speech than the English or any other lan- guage. 4. The most philosophical classification of words is perhaps the following :— [a]—Such as indicate the objects of thoughts, or the subjects of discourse. This class comprehends the names of beings with which the mind becomes acquainted through the senses; as NN light, M7 wind, UN fire, YY a tree, &c., or by its own intellectual faculties, as 2% God, 0 a spirit, MAWMD thought, reflections. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 5 [b]—Such as serve to express whatever is affirmed respecting the objects of contemplation. This class comprehends verbs, or words denoting action, pas- sion, being, or modes of existence, whether physical or intellectual: as, 417 to pursue, 4173 he or it was pursued, AWM to reflect, think, &c.1) to be, to exist, DAN to be red, DIM he was wise, 773 to be great. [¢]—Such as serve to qualify or to particularise either the subject or the predicate when they happen to be general terms. This class comprehends Ad- jectives, Adverbs and Definitives.* [d]—Such as serve to indicate the relations of things; or words, in which the expression of general relations has superseded or diverted the attention of the mind from their primary particular meaning— viz., the relation of origin, dependency, cause, pur- pose, medium, instrumentality, similitude, junction, &c. This class comprehends Prepositions and Con- junctions. [e]—Such as indicate particular affections or emo- tions; as, joy, sorrow, exultation, surprise, &c. f * Tt will be shewn in the progress of the work, that the words included in this and in the following class are, in reality, Nouns, or Verbs, used for the particular purposes described ; so that, strictly speaking, these two alone are the most essential parts of speech. + Many grammarians will not allow Interjections to be called a part of speech, considering them as mere instinctive or mechanical ejaculations. That they are so, when uttered under the immediate impulse of passion, cannot be denied ; but as they are frequently B 2 6 THE ETYMOLOGY OF As the student is, however, supposed to be already familiar with the usual grammatical classification, we shall retain it, and distribute the words of the Hebrew language into Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns, Verbs, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections.* The introductory notices prefixed, will sufficiently enable the student to distinguish between those which are primitive and essential distinctions, and those which are secondary, and in part technical—z. e. belonging to the art rather than to the philosophy ot erammar. Derivation. 5. In all languages we find clusters of words allied both in sound and in signification; such, for instance, are the following English words :—love, lover, lovely, loving, loved, beloved, loveliness, Sc. ; just, justly, justify, justifier, justifiable, justification, Je. ; but, in Hebrew, this has an especial claim on the student’s attention : thus— used in representing our own past emotions, or those of other per- sons, and as, in all such cases, they are uttered as deliberately as any other word, I think they are sufficiently entitled to be num- bered amongst the parts of speech. * The early Hebrew Grammarians reckoned only three parts of speech : 1—DY the name, in which they included nouns and ad- jectives : 2—2YB the verb: 3—nPD the particle, in which they included the other classes. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 7 WN rdsh, the head the chief and principal part of the body. FoYIENg ra-shith, chiefness, principalness, beginning. FW ri-shon, first, in order or dignity. pe md-loch, to reign. Jop me-lech, a king. vin md-ldch, one that reigns. ay mal-cah, a queen. Jon md-lach, he reigned. ny ab mal-chuath, a kingdom. aby d-loh, to ascend. spby él-yon, most high. aby oleh, one that ascends. nby ma-aleh, an ascent, step.* aby 0-lah, a burnt offering.t nbyr ma-alah, upwards. mby a-lah, he ascended. nbys na-ildh, exalted, raised. my a-leh, a leaf. iby el, a pestle. by al, wpon, above.t nbyinsen-d-lah, a conduit or aqueduct. Now it is evident, that in these and similar col- lections of words, there can be but one primitive, from which the rest are derived. Equally evident is it, that by knowing the sense attached to the primitive, and the manner in which it is varied, * Lit. The place where, or the instruments by which, one ascends; also one that causes to ascend. + 7. e. What ascends upon the altar. t The words biy dl, a yoke; bbiy o-lal, a child ; by na-al, a shoe, sandal ; Sayan man-il, a lock, bar; asia) mil, an upper gar- ment, &c., owe probably their origin to the same primitive, although they are placed by lexicographers under different roots. § 7. e. Through which water is made to ascend. 8 THE ETYMOLOGY OF in order to express different objects, or different shades of meaning, together with the various modi- fications of which each part of speech is susceptible, the labour of learning a language is greatly abridged. Hence the importance of attaining a thorough know- ledge of the primitives. 6. As the only purpose of language is to commu- nicate thoughts and judgments (which when clothed in words are called propositions), and as every judg- ment must contain at least a subject and a predicate, and every proposition, a noun and an attribute”, it follows that these two species of words must have formed the very rudiments of language. But, as if both could not have been invented at the same time, it has been made a question which of the two has a right to claim the priority. Most of the Oriental grammarians have decided in favour of the Verb. Many eminent philologists, however, maintain that the first invented terms were Nouns, because the objects by which men found themselves surrounded, and on many of which their very existence depended, would naturally claim their attention first. This is indeed, in some respect true ; but it proceeds on a mistake, which we have sought to preclude in our * Substantives are often used as predicates ; but then they are always accompanied by the verb To BE, which is, however, seldom expressed in Hebrew, except when past or future time is indicated. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 4) definition of language. Assuming that words primarily correspond to things, these writers have not perceived that though the things must have existed, and in most instances have been seen, prior to their modes of ap- pearance, as moving, acting, or being acted on, yet by means of the latter only are they first brought into notice, so as to become the distinct objects of human consciousness ~- that is, thoughts; and that words ummediately refer to our thoughts of the things, as images or generalised conceptions, and only by a second reflection to the things themselves. The following consideration will shew this truth in a still clearer point of view: — It will readily be granted that before names could have been assigned to objects, the objects themselves must have been known. Now, as all the knowledge we possibly can have of objects, consists in an acquaintance with their qualities, properties, or modes of existence, which indeed are so many signs by which things are mani- fested to the mind through the senses (for the sub- stratum which supports the properties, as it is not an object of sensation, can only be inferred by the mind*) ; and as all these are attributes and not sub- stances, it follows that the mind must have a notion of the attribute, before it can form a distinct concep- tion of the object. It follows further, that in every * See Maimonides’ ANA ND) NyDe0. + See Mr. Coleridge’s definition of the word substance, in his “ Aids to Reflection,” Aphorism xu. p. 6. 10 THE ETYMOLOGY OF such conception, the attribute by which the object is distinguished from every other being, must form a part ; and, consequently, that the class of words which grammarians denominate nouns, must origi- nally have been verbal (somewhat like the words called participles), expressive of some property or circumstances by which the named object was charac- terised. And, indeed, such is still the character of the far greater portion of Hebrew nouns, even of those which designate natural objects: thus— YP rake-a, the firmament, lit. the expanse, or that which is expanded. MON ham-mdh, the sun*, lit. the hot one, as being the source of heat. DIM he-res, another name of the sun, from its dry- ing and burning power. nad VPba-nah, the moonf, lit. the white one, from its pale light ; and from this circumstance several other substances appear to have derived their names : as — nine * Another name of the sun is YQY shemesh, which is probably a compound; viz. YS OY sham Ash, the distant fire; and pnw sha-ma-yim ; 0% DY sham mayim, the distant water. (See Jarchi’s Comment. on Gen. i, 7.) + The moon is also called M9) ya-ra-ah. from its dilating and increasing light: hence 1? a month ;—from which it appears that the Hebrew months were orignally lunar. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 11 mad lib’neh (even), the white, amongst trees (po- pulus alba, the white poplar). mad Pbo-ndh (AiBavos), the white, amongst odori- ferous gums ; frankincense. s95 Pbanon (Lebanon), the white mountain; from its whiteness, being constantly covered with snow. ay, lbd-nah, a brick, from the white clay of which it is formed. Mija2M hel-b’nadh,* galbanum, a fragrant gum; from its cream-like colour. 1 hayt, f. 4 ha-yah, an animal, a living being ; lit. a breather, or a being that breathes ; breath- ing being the characteristic of animated beings. WY of f, a bord, a fowl ; lit. the flyer, or that which flies. YY sa-ir, the goat; lit. the hairy, the shaggy: and from the same circumstance— ANYY s’o-rah (hordeum), barley, from the roughness of its awn. TIWYY or WIYD s’o-rah, a tempest ; & WYY sa-dr, horror. * Most lexicographers place this word under the root 35 a1t is, however, probable that abn itself received its denomination from its colour. Hence also the Rabbinical aon hélbén (albumen), the white of an egg. + These are real Onomatopoeia,—’* hay, imitative of the sound heard in forcibly emitting the breath ; "¥ of, that heard in the starting of a bird. Of the same character are the words US ésh, fire; WS or, light, fire ; ru-ah, wind ; and many others. 12 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 7. This being the case, we can easily comprehend how the same word would be frequently used both as a noun and as a verb: as a noun, when it was used as the subject of discourse; and as a verb, when it was used as the predicate. Thus, the word TiS in the following sentence is used as a substantive: as, TIN 7). There shall be light or light shall be (Gen.1i. 38); but in the following phrases it is used as a verb: thus, NS INIA The morning (was) light (Gen. xliv. 3.) nab NN And it will be light unto you (1 Sam. xxu. 10); (SY NS My eyes have become light (1 Sam. xiv. 29); i.e. capable of perceiving by means of light. Thus also the before-mentioned word ‘MT hay, a living being, or a being that breathes, is used in the follow- ing phrases as a verb*: as, °T noe And Salah lived (Gen. xi. 14); MD ADY WY My son JSoseph liveth still (Gen. xlv. 21);— and 723 cd-bdd, the liver (lit. the heavy, the weighty, being the heaviest part of the body in proportion to its bulk) signifies also zt zs heavyt (Gen. xlvii. 4); and it was heavy (Gen. xlvii. 13). * It is likewise frequently used as an adjective: as, 0 WW a living ow; %D 293 a living dog; 1 W2 raw flesh; (t7.e. in the same state as when living). + Hence also 725 kobed, weight, heaviness; T4723 k’bd-dath, difficulty ; VAD kd-béd, honour, glory, literally, weigh, (gravitas) ; and 133 kab-bdd, to honour; 1332 m’chab-bdd, one that honours ; 723) nich-bdd, honourable, one that has become honourable ; 723! m’chu-bdd, one that is honoured ; V33> mach-bid, one that causes heaviness, an oppressor; 220) mith-cab-bad, one that THE HEBREW LANGUAGE 13 It is moreover frequently used as an adjective : as, TAD NWI a heavy burden. 8 In all these examples, it is evident that there is no distinction whatever between the noun and the verb ; ‘but even in those where a distinction exists, it is so slight, as clearly to show the common origin of the words: thus— 725 da-bor, to speak. 2p ka-rab, he or a came “a dobar, one that near. speaks, a speaker. 4p ka-rob, one that is 927 da-bar, he spake, ae nigh, related, a re- 127 da-bar, a word, or |; | lative, kinsman. thing. 2 ke-reb, the inner part “DN a-mor, to say. of the body, the ites- VON a-mar, he said. tines, bowels. “oS O-mer, a saying. J2P kor-ban, an offering. 3qP k’rab, conflict, battle. 3 ka-rob, to be nagh, Nap kir-bah, relationshop, to approach. approachment. 9. There are, indeed, many verbs which owe their derivation to nouns: as, for instance, IBY* to throw dust; WY to smoke, from }WY{ smoke ; non to salt, from M2 salt; there are likewise many nouns which honours himself, pretends to be honourable; with their numerous modifications, * From SY dust. + This word is probably derived from YN fire; smoke being the sign of fire. n2n salt, is probably compounded of 1) what, n? 1 THE ETYMOLOGY OF cannot be referred to verbs, as WN the head; bn the foot, leg ; on a standard, flag, banner, Se. ; but this does not at all invalidate the preceding arguments ; as these words, though now considered as primitives, may owe their origin to verbs which had fallen into disuse*, or to such as have not reached us; for it is not to be supposed that the Hebrews had no other words than those contained in the Sacred Records. Both theory and fact lead me, therefore, to conclude that the Hebrew nouns were originally verbalia; and the verbs ought to be considered as the elements of speech, not on account of their priority of invention, but because they generally contain the primary sig- nification of words. Roots. 10. The part of the verb containing the primary signification which runs through all its branches and derivatives, is the infinitive moodf, or the name of the moist, 1.e. that which contracts moisture, and on and bn are probably derived from one of the several roots which signify to explore, remove, reveal, &c. This is, however, mere conjecture ; and indeed we are too far removed from the infancy of language to speak decisively on the origin of words. * See 8. de Sacy’s remarks (Grammaire Arabe, § 231), on the word RCONP whose root 195 does not occur in Arabic, though it is very frequently used in Hebrw. + Many Grammarians consider the third person masculine past tense, as the root; thus, 30 he went, YY he kept. But as the T THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 15 action. It is called by some Hebrew grammarians pd ma-kor, the fountain; by others, YW sho-resh, the root, radix. It consists generally of the three notion expressed by this form of the verb is too complex to be considered as the primitive, I have preferred the opinion of those grammarians who regard the infinitive as the root. Thus the 927 MND (a grammatical work, generally attributed to D. Kimchi) x5 pp ssp oponn nbs 535 ww einy sms at ow pmirsnn mbiyan $5 missy opr ann wes aon ndnnn sin past TNS mad avin oon DIN TDNwD miwyd NAVA NI spp samp oar Sy, niwyd naynon mx mwyon oop “There is one word which is the root to all these parts (7. ¢. the past, present, and future tenses, &c.) ; it is called mdakor, the fountain, because it is the principle of speech, and the root of contemplation. From it proceed all the before-mentioned parts of the verb. It is the thought to do a thing. Thus, when a man says, ‘Behold, I intend to build this house,’ — the thought to build must precede the deed ; and on this acconnt it is called 11p'd the fountain.” Thus, likewise, Abraham de Balmis, in DII8 FIP) (Peculium Abre.) vw mbps myay oo Toxe wea yo by) aay nde 55 ww oippn : dina Syan py tid ox 19 109 qoxn xd ond ‘¢ The infinitive mood is the root of every action, &c. And there- fore, should any one ask yon what is the root of nn la-mad-ti (I did learn), do not answer 92 la-mad (he did learn), but sb? la-moéd (to learn).” The infinitive must not be confounded with the abstract noun, which is likewise the name of the action : as, 24% to love, N28 love ; NY to hate, nN’ hatred. They are nearly allied in their signi- fication, and are, therefore, often substituted for one another. The difference between them will be explained in the Syntax. 16 THE ETYMOLOGY OF consonants, forming either monosyllables (when the middle letter happens to be } or *): as, 813 bi, to come to enter ; }'2 bin, to understand, perceive ; V3" gur, to sojourn: or dissyllables, as 7 Mha-loch, to walk ; Ww sha-mor, to keep, to guard ; Yat to swallow. 11. The three consonants of which the primitive is composed, are called radicals ; whereas those which are added for the purpose of diversification, are termed serviles.~ To distinguish the radicals from each other, we shall call them the 1st, 2nd, and 8rd * Many of the ancient grammarians very justly considered these _and similar roots as O42 di-literals, because the middle letter has more the character of a vowel than a consonant, being always quiescent, and often omitted: as 4 to sojourn, 14 he sojourned, 14 a sojourner, &c. See Aben Ezra in MN¥ and O%tND; and Abraham de Balmis in Peculium Abre,—De Partitione Verborum. + Roots consisting of four or more letters are, comparatively speaking, few in number. They are mostly either of foreign origin, as D3NB an order, edict; or compounded, as ?¥%22 wicked worth- less, from ba without, and by merit, utility; O°OIY thick mud, from 2¥ thick, and 8°) mud or clay. That many of the tri-literals are, most probably, likewise com- pounds, appears from several words cited in the preceding notes ; numerous other examples of the same kind may be seen in “ Vindi- cie Hebraice,” pp.42—46. { The serviles consist of the following exclusively: —*17 18 nw 5 5 while no letter of the alphabet is excluded from the formation of the radicals. We shall distinguish the serviles in most cases by open letter, thus, 3 &, &c. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 17 letters of the root. Thus, 5 is the first, ¥ is the second, and 4 the third letter of the root yp paol, to act; & the first, 2 the second, and 1 the third letter of the root 2% sha-bor, to break. Conjugations. 12. Primitives may consist of any three letters of the alphabet, but they receive different names, ac- cording to the particular consonants of which they are constituted, and form different conjugations. 13. Suchas have neither of the following letters— ’, 3, 8, for their first radical, nor } or * for the second, nor & or for the third radical, and in which the second and third are not the same letter, are called pnw perfect, because in the various changes which the primitive undergoes, the three consonants remain unaltered: as, 151 to remember ; °H731 I remembered; JID a remembrance. These verbs form the first conjugation. 14. Such as have 3 for their first radical, are deno- minated BMDM defectives ; because the J is dropped in many of the derivatives; as, (TJ to give; IAS (instead of JAIN) L will give ; WIM (instead of MID) a gift. These form the second conjugation. 18 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 15. Such as have Nor’ for the first radical : as, box to eat, YT to know* ; ®& for the third, as N¥S to find; 7 for the third, as MB to redeem; 1 or * for the second letter, as DIP to rise, 2 to understand, are called DTI guzescents, because these letters are either mute or changed into other letters. These form the third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh Conjugation. 16. Such as have their second and third radicals the same, as 9 to measure, are called pois double ; the middle letter being frequently dropped in the derivatives: as, TS (instead of F498) T will measure, sind (instead of 39?) in order to measure; AW (instead of MT) a measure. These form the eighth Conjugation. Form or Worps. 17. The consonants, together with their appro- priate vowel-points, constitute what is denominated the form of the primitive ; and any alteration made in it, either by the omission or mutation of any of its letters or vowel-points, or by the addition of one or more letters, will necessarily produce a different form, indicative of a variation in the signification ; as may be seen from the following examples :— * The » is often dropped, as YIN (instead YTS) T will know. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 19 Thus, from the infinitive AY sha-bér, to break, (used both as a noun and as a verb), are derived— 1“. The participle active and passive— Used as nouns and verbs, and forming, with the personal pro- pal sho-bdr, one that breaks. aw shabzr, broken. nouns, the present tense: as sal IN T break: 2" The third person preterite, as— From this, therest of the tense is formed, by post-fixing fragments AY sha-bar, he broke. of the pronouns: as, sANAY fé broke, ANY thow brokest. do" The imperative, as— From which is formed the future tense, by prefixing fragments of say sh’ bor, break thou, m. | the pronouns: as, “AYN LT will reat “WA thou shalt break. 4". Nouns used in this sense only: as, AY she-ber, a break, breach, injury; Ji" shib-ba-rén, a break, calamity, destruction ; V2WiS mish-bar, a breaker, wave, billow. 5 Other infinitives, which in their turn give birth to nouns, participles, and other parts of the derivative verbs. 18. To understand this thoroughly, the student must bear in mind, that every attribute expressive of transitive action may be considered under various points of view :— 20 THE ETYMOLOGY OF a 1** As expressive of simple action :— box to eat, SON he did eat. 2°. As expressive of simple passion :— bow to be eaten, bow he was eaten. 3 As expressive of intense action :— S& to devour, consume, SS he consumed, devoured. 4" As expressive of intense passion :— 8 to be devoured, consumed, DN he was consumed, Ke, 5 As causing another to act :— boNAl to cause to eat, 7. ¢. to feed, bona he fed, &c. 6" As being made to perform an action :— bona to be caused to eat, to be fed bow he was fed. 7 Reflex action, or suchas is performed by the agent on himself :— bosAn to consume, devour one’s self, boNnA he consumed himself. The first of these divisions may be called the primi- tive, the other six, derivative verbs. Their technical names are: 1*, Pa-dl; 2°°, Niphdal; 3°, Piél; 4, Pu-dl; 5", Hiph-il; 6", Hoph-al; 7, Hith-pa-dl. MANNER OF FORMING SUBSTANTIVES FROM VERBS. 19. Substantives are formed from verbs in various ways :— 1* By changing the vowel-points of the root: as Se a king, from 7 > to reign ; boy food, victuals from box to eat. ? * ‘ THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. rai | _ 2"" By dropping one of the radicals: as, ja @ gar- den, from 133 to shelter; A a stranger, from NA to sojourn. 3. By adding one or more of the following letters 1, 3, 2, 8, 1*, to the root: as, SOND food, provision (lit. what is eatable or eaten); OPIN a knife (lit. an instrument used in eating), from bon; Maple catile fF (lit. what is purchased, or the medium of purchasing) ; WSP harvest, or a reaper, from WP to reap, cut down. 4. By the three preceding methods combined: as, IA a gift, from JM) to give; MD a bed, mea a staff, tribe, from MO) to stretch out, incline; mds the end, completion, from <3 to finish, complete. * These letters may be called the Mormative Letters.—They are either prefixed, affixed, or inserted in the middle of words, by which a great variety of forms are produced. + This word, derived from 73? to possess, to purchase, to obtain, favours the supposition that cattle were in the early ages regarded as the chief measure of value, the same as money in our days. This appears to have been the case during the Trojan war, as is evident from the Iliad, B. VI.— “For Diomed’s brass arms, of mean device, For which nine oxen paid (a vulgar price), He gave his own of gold divinely wrought, A hundred beeves the shining purchase bought.” And though silver had already in the time of Abraham become the chief standard of value, yet cattle were equally used as the medium of exchange, even in subsequent times, as appears from Genesis xxxvill. 17, and xxxi. 19: no yp being rendered by most of the ancient translators, lamb. Thus Sept. ayvev Onkelos JB, Vul. aqnis. c 2 oo THE ETYMOLOGY OF bpei (mish-kal), Wricur or Common MEAsuRE or Worps. 20. To be able to refer words to their roots, and to ascertain the difference between them and their derivatives, a model, pattern, or common measure, with which words in general may be compared, is necessary. For this purpose, the ancient grammarians selected the word byp* and borrowed from it and its deriva- tives their grammatical terms. 21. Imagining that the essence of the verb con- sists in action, and the word bys signifying to act, they employed this word to denote the verb in general, whether active, passive, or neuter. 22. Considering the 8" person. sing. m. preterite, * The middle letter of 5yp being one of the gutturals, which are subject to peculiar laws of punctuation, has induced several modern grammarians to substitute the verb 7P2 or dip for it. I have, however, retained it, as it is used by all the ancient grammarians ; and even the moderns have adopted it, as far as relates to the tech- nical terms Niphdl, Piél, Pudl, &c. And, indeed, it matters not what word we take as a common measure, provided the difference between the gutturals and non-gutturals be pointed out; which ought to be done in either case. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. ve as the root of the primitive verb; and the same person of the derivative verbs as the principal words from which their respective tenses, moods, &c. are formed; and these words being, in the verb under considera- tion, as follows— “Ist, YP Pasi, he acted, 2nd, 23 Niph-al, he was acted upon, ord, YA Picl*, he acted with intensity, §c. Ath, Y®2 Pu-dl, he was acted upon with intensity, 5th, Soy ar Hiph-il, he caused another to act, 6th, YS Hoph-al, he was caused by another to act, 7th, SYSMT Hith-pi-Al, he acted upon himself,— they adopted them as technical terms, to indicate the principal branches of the verb in general. And this is indeed the process of the human mind when it begins to reflect. An impressive, single instance is taken, or rather ob- trudes itself on the recollection: it is then discovered that the properties or attributes noticed in this instance, are common cha- racters in a large number of instances: and thus, the individual impression is raised into a general or generic conception; and the word by which it was named, becomes a general term: and general terms applied to the purposes of classification, in the aid or ordon- nance of the memory, are technical terms; without which no art nor science can be taught. * When the second radical is a non-guttural, it receives Dagesh (see Part I. 32: as, WD he sanctified ; ray he was shattered ; VAN he sanctified himself. 24 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Thus they denominated all verbs denoting simple actions, Pa-al or 7) kal (i. e. light, simple), because, the root is here found in its simplest form; whereas, the other branches have either an additional letter, or a dagesh in the second letter of the root. Those that denote simple passion, or the passive voice, they called Gyb) Niphal; those that denote intense action, they termed “yp Pi-el; and so on with the rest. 23. As the conjugations of verbs are regulated by the letters of which the root consists, and as the root byp consists of 5 Pe, y Ain, and 5 Lamed, they de- nominated the first letter of every root, 5 Pe; the second Y Ain; and the third b Lamed. Thus they called the wy of oy Pe; the 3 Ain; and the = Lamed., Thus they likewise denominated all verbs having 5 for the first radical, as— wa) to approach; bb) to fall; (2nd conjugation*)...... 5 Those that have & for the first radical, as— bows to eat; “iON tosay; (8rd conjugation) ...... N’5 Those that have * for the first radical, as— IY" to sit; YI to know; (4th conjugation) ...... >) * The first conjugation, as we have already observed (p.17), they called Deu} and the 8th, p>aD9. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 20 Those having } for the second radical, as— “VW to sojourn; JW to return; (5th conjugation)... y Those having ® for the third radical, as NYP to find ; xp to call; (6th conjugation)..... vb Those having " for the third radical, as— ae to obtain; AN to see; (7th conjugation)...... wa iby And by this means, they readily distinguished the different conjugations from each other, and ascertained the peculiarities belonging to each. 24. By having thus a standard, or common mea- sure, with which to compare words, we may easily ascertain their general meaning. Thus, by knowing that 7Y5 is the 3" person mas- culine preterite of all active transitive verbs, 7Y55 the active participle, and ?iY8 the passive participle, we may be certain that 7P2, W9?, Wav’, are the 3” person Tepret.; that TPB, sani, “3”, are participles active; and Tips, THD, “jat¥, are passive participles. Thus, also, by knowing that the form, which the 3" person m. preterite of intransitive verbs assumes, 1s mostly YD, we may, without hesitation, say that {p1, Wat, &c. are intransitive verbs, and the same will hold good with every other part of the verb. 25. In the same manner the form of nouns and adjectives may be ascertained by comparing them with a similar form deduced from 72; and by know- ing the grammatical changes of which the form is 26 THE ETYMOLOGY OF susceptible, we may at once know the changes which most words, having a similar form must undergo in the process of declension. Thus, all words consisting of three radicals (of the 1* conjugation, p. 17), having (+) for their first and se- cond yowel-points: as, 124 a word, B37 a wise man, at gold, &c. are said to be of Loui (the form) byp: Those that have (+) for the first, and (--) for the se- cond: as, W3 a court, }pt an old man, are of the form Oy: Those that have (+) for the first, and (*.) for the se- cond vowel-points: as, PB an overseer, VSP harvest, are of the form byyp: Those that have (+) for the first, and (1) or (4) for the second vowel-points: as, [TIN a lord, 774 great, 372 blessed, OY meghty, are of the forms bys and Saye: All words of the above forms have their accent on the last syllable. Those that have — for the first, and (--) or (-) for the second vowel-point: as, JIN an ear, TY a bribe, are of the form byb: Those that have (--) or (-) for their first andsecond vowel-points: as, J?) a king, {OS land, W3* a boy, YIN an instant; or () for the first, and (-) for the * The vowel-point (-) in this and similar words, is substituted for (=), on account of the guttural letter. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. Oh second vowel-points: as, 45D a book, &c. are of the form by and bypt. Words of the last-mentioned forms have their accent on the penultimate. DEW judgment, from BBY to judge, is of the form bybn > being the formative letter. nsdn a kingdom, from Se to reign, is of the form mbybi . and 7 being the formative letters. Yard a plant (from YI), YAS knowledge (from Y7 (to know), are of the form 7Y+; being the formative letter, and 3 in the first, and * in the second word being dropped. AIMS a gift (from M3 to give), is of the form byt 3 the first radical being dropped, and and r being the formative letters. 13 a siranger (from a to sojourn), is of the form bp, the second radical being omitted. {2 a son, from 3, is of the form YS, the third radical being dropped. | by a shadow, from Soy, is of the form bp. the first of the double-letters being dropped. nba a roll, volume, from 773, is said to be of the form 1727; and 7 being the formative let- ters, and the second radical omitted. * These forms are, by some grammiarians, called Segolates. + The second radical of this and the following form receive Da- eesh, to show the absence of the first radical. If we take the verb IPB as the common measure, these two forms will be P12 & MP2: 28 THE ETYMOLOGY OF The preceding examples, it is hoped, will be deemed sufficient to give the learner a general conception of the formation of nouns, which is all that is aimed at in this chapter. Further information on this intricate subject will be found in Chapter IIL Inflection and Modification of Words. 26. Whoever considers the rapidity of thoughts, will allow that even the most concise language is but a slow instrument for the purpose of communicating them. Attempts have, therefore, been made in all languages, especially in those of ancient date, to shorten the process, by expressing all such general notions as are applicable to whole classes of words— as, for instance, the gender, number, and case of nouns, the moods, tenses, &c. of verbs—by inflections (probably taken from some already existing word), instead of doing it by entire words. The Hebrew is particularly remarkable in this respect; for it not only expresses the before-mentioned grammatical acci- dents by inflections, but also such words as occur most frequently in discourse; as, for instance, the article, the; the conjunction, and; the relative, who, which, that ; the possessive pronoun, my, thy, his, &e. ; and both the nominative and oljective, when they happen tobe pronouns. By this means, whole phrases love me, JAAN) and he will love thee; PHS T have caused thee to go forth, &c. may be expressed in single words: as, ‘JATIN he will THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 29 27. The manner in which this is effected, is no less ingenious than remarkable, and shows, most clearly, that language is neither the result of acci- dent, nor of capricious compact, but the product of mind—of mind fully aware of the object in view, and endeavouring to effect it in the simplest way possible. But before we proceed, it is necessary for the student to know the personal pronouns. ‘These are— Sing. | Plur. SIS sage Dab Sala 1IN or LIMINS MAS 7 7. ae DEN m. ie BN Ff RN Ff wae ay OU Sin ee he | Manor OF... they, m. SOR: Geen ee she | MEM ome w Re a arelae re * This word is considered as a primitive. It is, however, proba- bly derived from m8, or rather 73Y to exclaim, or to commence a discourse (% and y being mutable letters). See Cant.ii. 10; Job ui. 2. It means, literally, the exclaimer or speaker. + MAN is evidently derived from ‘38. The dagesh in N indicates the absence of 3, which is still preserved in some of the dialects: as, AIS, Aaj, wes}. The nis, perhaps, a contraction of NS (sign of the objective). The same observation is applicable to the words AS, DAS, JAS, instead of HIN OAS, jAIN- t Si is probably derived from the verb mM to be, M1 one that is (written sometimes with &), and means, literally, a beng. It is frequently used instead of the substantive verb. § This appears to be the plural of 238, although written with Nn. 30) THE ETYMOLOGY OF 28. Now, instead of expressing the pronouns by separate words, fragments of the personal pronouns are subjoined to the nouns, and amalgamated with them. Thus, tT! a hand °1* my hand (it. hand I, or be- longing to the speaker); "7! thy hand (lit. hand thou, or, belonging to the person addressed); 77 his hand, BIV+ your hand, 13°79) our hands, 137 t and our hands, &c. Thus also (AI a word, "127 my word, IN thy word, TIAA his word, FA7 her word, 13927 our word, Biv ay &c. See Declension of Nouns, Tab. Il. 29. Obs. 1.— 2, 4, definitely, either 7 is annexed, as TAWA in-the-word, p: 2 38 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Wa as-the-word ; or, which is more usual, the ris omitted, and its vowel-point is placed under those respective letters: thus, (27a in-the-word, A713 as-the-word, 375 to-the word*, 2.—When r occurs before these prefixes, it indicates inter- rogation : thus, rand to-the-son mon if-to-the-son ? * the prefixes = 3, 3,1, are frequently added to other words : as, yO) by great and-small, S17) ‘8 TJ and-he, An DON he-eat and- drank, ninwy SON? to-eat and-to-drink, &c. ‘Their proper points are (:)-—thus, 2, 2,2,) The(:) is, however, frequently changed for other vowels, which causes great embarrassment to the young stu- dent.—To prevent this, he is requested to attend to the following rules :— I. 1is changed into} (pronounced J8) before words beginning with either of the labials 5, 9, 1, 3, ; or before words begin- ning with any letter having Sh’va: as, 743) and-a-garment, WIT) and-honey. II. It is changed into } before words haying a distinctive accent on the first letter: as, ]?,") pnd bread and-wine. III. Before words beginning with Sh’va, the letters ry 2,2, 2e- ceive (~i): as, 7272 in-the-word-of 7213 as-the-word-of, "27? to-the-word-of. Before the gutturals, definitely, or in pause, they follow the same rule as the definite 1. (Art. 40). IV. Before words beginning with %, the letters ot 2, 4, 1, receive (+1, ‘becoming quiescent: as, 7% he-shall-be, 7. and-he- shall-be, "2° days-of, "2°32 in-the-days-of, >°> as-the-days-of. V. Before the semi-vowels (~:) (**:) (™), they receive the corre- ee tee VI. Before DON God, they take (-); ® becoming quiescent: thus, OND, Dd), Ke. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 3908, Dor )*, from {from is used to express the relation of origin, cause: as, “33 from-a-nation, IVI from-a-thing, 129 from-speaking, W*S'd from or out-of-a-man, &c. ; and with the definite article, MD from-the: as, AWN from-the desert. Obs.— After adjectives, it denotes the comparative degree: as, “8! pin stronger-than a-rock.—(See Adjectives, Art. 87.) 41. To the preceding may be added the particle AN or TAS, which, though not a prefix, always pre- cedes nouns in a definite state, and is often joined to them in order to express their objective cases: as, ‘In the beginning God created DWI AS the heaven, PIS AS) and the earth ;’? FOX OS) PAN AS TW. ‘ Honor thy-father and-thy-mother ;’ “AS Ams by ADY ‘ And-Jsrael-loved Joseph.’ VII. Before *27% and its variations, also before 717! they take Clas, ST, FIND, 24m), min, &e. As these changes are chiefly for the sake of euphony, and as they do not affect the signification of words, I deem it unne- cessary to enter into further detail. * 1) before the gutturals. t From this punctuation of the prefixes before the word N°, it is evident that the word was anciently pronounced ‘1%: Had it been pronounced Jehovah, as some learnd men suppose, the points must have been M173, 79793, 737 as the words in No. IV. AO THE ETYMOLOGY OF EHaercise. Translate and analyse the following words :— PRP oP ye TB Te PRP RT a STASI. FINE TS SD PSD. POSE PSB POST-IT TN oe aed oe Sa pe SO Sol We SE eS SISTA STB (pan? . pend. pana . Dan. Den). OIny PIMA.) AIM) NII M_IAy + DIP PAIN! MEN. mAIM? . MAINA Render the following into Hebrew :— A day||, and a day, as a day, in a day, to a day, and to a day ; the day, and the day, as the day, in the day, to the day, from the day, and from the day; from day to day. A woman, to a woman, the woman, to the woman, and to the woman, and a woman, from a woman, from the woman, and from the woman. The slave**, a slave, and the slave, and a slave, a slave? asa slave, as the slave, to a slave, to the slave, froma slave, from the slave, and to the slave. * A way, or road. +Land, earth. +A wise man. § Wisdom, ay q TN Ty 42. ahreane Obs. ~ . lies.) tag ee THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 4 | AFFIXES. The following are the principal Affixes :— . with the accent on the last syllable, is used to denote the feminine gender: as, WS @ man MWS a woman, 823 a prophet, AN'23 a pro- phetess ; “p12 a visitor, APB a female visitor. rt— with the accent onthe penultimate, is sometimes used to express tendency towards a place: as, [WI Haran, ITT NW towards Haran; Ajj the south, Naa, towards the south. Nouns terminating in 1, change thatletter into Di: as, I) Marah, Ad to Marah. ‘}—without the accent, is likewise added, sometimes, by way of euphony: as, nya) for ate night. In such cases MM is said to be Paragogie. . with the accent on the penultimate, is used to denote the feminine participle: as, Bbw one that judges, a judge; f. MOBW: also raw: is used to indicate the plural of masculine nouns: as, B*N'3) prophets, bpp visitors, DY w day, D'S days ; MY a year, OY years. is used to express two of a kind: as, BY two days, BAW two years. is used to express the plural feminine: as NWI a girl, a young woman, AW girls ; nby p. HIN? doors. 42 THE ETYMOLOGY OF The following affixes are used to denote the posses- sive Pronouns :— *—my 7 thy, m. ya thy, f. j his m—her j3 our D2 your yom, f O—their, m. | their YY a song, m. ™'Y my song abs thy —m. We thy —f. yey his. —— rye her — sayy our — “DIY your — 9. “19 VY your— f py their — mm. [VY their — f. IVY a song, f. vag my song Avy thy FOV thy —f. sayw his — m. any her — (Iw our — pIAyYY your — m. JQAYY your—f. Bn Y their — m. JAY their — When the things possessed are plural. my thy, Mm. YP othy f. his r)her 13°—our D2*~your j2’ your, f. Di1’— their, m. (ii, their, f. DY songs, m. ™y my songs yw tye, PY thy — f. yw his — rey her — ahaa hog our — “DT your — m. “IY your— f. “HTT! their — m. FIV songs, f. ny my songs pHivw thy 92: BAMBI erie =e PHINY his — meaty her — FHI our — paniny your —m. JDOIVY your —f. Bane their — m. Cae ett caeah TAIT their — f. * C52, j?, [i3, }], are denominated heavy affixes, because they always have the accent; the rest are denominated light affixes. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 43 41. To the preceding affixes may be added, the termination *~, M’~ and, by which patronymics, or nouns denoting extraction, are formed from Propereiames:. as, “)lV) a flebrew, 7. TV Aay: or May, from “BY Heber; *NBY an Ammonite, f. FY, from Way Ammon. Haercises. Add the possessive pronouns to the following nouns: — MINA a law, 130 a hut, like AYW; DID a horse, N33 a strong man, like Ve Render the following into English :— oop ood odpm pin * orp soba) pmb pea mbm. ape Fen yam ape ype yee tab oe SPeban ypanp Ab yw? WER AN! TPH “ope 1352. yzbe . yape shee 3p . adem probe. osbe . ppybR bap . mabpdy . mgt emisdp . mabem) .2npob . Dasa DS mgt : mizond { t pamabab amsbp: imssopa . smisdp . smiabe * Camels. A king. { A queen. § A kingdom, royal, reign. 44 THE ETYMOLOGY OF “mappen . nggp + mabe :pmebea .onbe Syrdzee nzbep . npbme magma. nppes :mizderpm . misonp . wast GENDER. 42. There are two genders, the masculine and the feminine. Of the masculine are 1* Names of males and their functions: as, DY Shem, AN a father, jI3 a priest. 2°* Names of nations, rivers, and mountains: as, OY a people, tY339 Canaan, VW a river, YIN the Jordan, bys Carmel, 3D Sinai y. * Kingdom. + To consider inanimate objects, or their names, as masculine or as feminine, appears very irrational ; and yet, if we except the English language, the absurdity of thus making a distinction where nature has made none, and where none can be required, prevails in almost all languages. ‘To account for this anomaly, some authors have supposed, that in the infant state of the world, mankind actually imagined that all objects of nature were animated, and consequently attributed to them sexual distinction; considering those objects which manifest themselves by their power and activity— as, for instance, the Wind, the Sun, &c.—as masculine ; and, on the contrary, those that appeared of a passive nature —as, for in- stance, the Earth, the Moon, &c.—as feminine. Others suppose, that the framers of language were guided by some subtle kind of reasoning, which discovers, even in inanimate objects, something THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. Ad 3" Names of seasons and months: as, 2'3N the Spring, an Winter, {D°3 Nisan. 4" Names of metals: as, 39! gold, D3 silver. Except NYT copper, which is used in both genders, and MY lead, which is supposed to be feminine. analogous to sex. These explanations are, however, not at all satisfactory ; for, independent of the absurdity of supposing the framers of language to have been so subjected to the fancy as not to distinguish between a real animal and a block of wood, or that they should have possessed such refined notions as to discover the most distant analogies, there is this objection, — that, on either supposition, the different names belonging to the same object must have retained the same gender: but this is contrary to fact. Thus, for instance, of the two names n339, nn}, given to the Moon ; the first is masculine, and the second, feminine ; and of the three denominations of the Sun, way, Dan, nin, the first is femi- nine, the second, masculine, and the third, of both genders. The real cause of the before-mentioned anomaly, as it regards the Hebrew, appears to me this:—that in the infancy of language, especially amongst a pastoral people, which the Hebrews were, the chief sub- jects of discourse were unavoidably persons and domesticated animals. In these, they observed the natural distinction of sex, which they endeavoured to indicate in their language ; and they did it in a very simple way: viz., by adding N—a mere breathing, and certainly the softest and most delicate of consonantal sounds— to the masculine: thus, 13) a child, boy, m2) a girl; Wa a lad, youth, WWI a lass, maiden ; VYY a he-goat, TIYY a she-goat ; was a lamb, nas a ewe-lamb; &c. &c. Animals which did not often come under view, or in which the distinction of sex was not obvious, were left undistinguished, and their names were used in either gender, just as the fancy of the speaker happened to suggest 46 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 43. Ofthe feminine are— 1* Names of females and their functions: as, me’ Sarah, aby Zillah, BS a mother. 2°* Names of countries and cities: as, IWS Assyria, poy Jerusalem. 3° Names of the double members of the human body*: as, IN ear, bn foot. 4" Names having the following terminations:— Mr, as 72 a blessing; or MM, as, WAY a Hebrew woman. Da,as AIRN a nurse, FOP incense, NSDN glory, DISS truth. prvi ‘~ ‘ee D=, as AMP a burning, a fever, MII queetness, pleasure, = ,as DYN) beginning, IH form, pattern, HY a Hebrew woman. mM, as nab a kingdom; or TM), as FMS as sister. at the moment ; and hence the origin of the epicene. It was the same with the names of inanimate objects. They were used indiscri- minately in either gender; or, as Aben-Hzra has expressed it, in his usual laconic style, 732) 37791 DMN IT 12 PNY 52“ Whatever has no life, male wz or female 7.’’ This promiscuous use of the gender, probably prevailed during the infancy of language and for a long period after it. But when the language became fixed by writing, and especially by authoritative books which served as models to subsequent writers, the gender of nouns became, in some measure, likewise fixed. And thus it is, that what in its origin was a matter of indifference, became, in the course of time, a law, from which we cannot now deviate, without being guilty (in the eyes of the half-learned, at least.) of a grammatical impropriety. * Except TV? a hand, \'¥ an eye, which are used in both genders, THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 47 44, Many nouns are used in both genders, and are therefore said to be of the common gender : as, M9 the wind, US fire, MIMD a camp. Amongst these may be numbered the Hpicene : as, Spi a camel, 33 a bear, 7 a dove, WVOM a stork, male or female. Heaercise. Render the following into Hebrew: — As my songs, m. And from thy f songs, f. Their m. songs m. and her song. My camel and his camels. To her camels. And to her camels. And from the king and queen. To her kings and to the queen. ‘To her king and to the queen. [rom their kings and from the queen. As my king and as your kings. And to the queens. My kingdom and thy kingdom. Her kingdom and his kingdom. From kingdom to kingdom. Our kingdom and the kingdoms. Andinmy law. As their laws. And from thy law. As my hut. And from thy huts. And to the strong man. ForRMATION OF Feminine Novwns. 45. Feminine Nouns, as has already been observed (p.41), are formed by adding M> or N-;; to the mas- culine: as, J? a king, ay) a queen; S713 great, m. “bin f.; JOINS an educator, foster-father, MAPS a foster- mother, a nurse; IPD a visitor, MPD or NW. ee * Some receive Dagesh in the last radical: as, DVIS m. red. Ff. MPS ; NOP m. small, little, f. NIBP: 48 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Obs. 1.—Masculine nouns terminating in 17-,, form their feminine by changing (+) into(+); as MY a@ shepherd, MY a shepherdess*. 2.—Those that terminate in Mor Y, receive N--— instead of Mines; aS, piw a hearer, f. nyoiw or nyniy ; M3 one that runs from danger, f. N73 +. 3.—Many nouns express their gender by different words : as, IN father, O8 mother; ON a he-ass, iN a she-ass; 100 a bride- groom, nba a bride; TAY m. a servant, f. nna a bond-maid ft. 4.—The feminine of FS a brother, is MNS sister; of }2 a son Na daughter ; ON a father-in-law, M20 a mother-in-law. NUMBER. 46. Hebrew nouns admit of three numbers; the Singular, Plural, and Dual. Formation of the Plural Number Masculine. Masculine nouns form their plural mostly by adding D*§ to the singular: as, Ee a king, ob kings. —(Vide Affixes, p. 41.) . “e * In some of the derivative verbs, the 7 is changed into MN’ (See Verbs). + Those that terminate in &, receive only an additional Nn: as, NWI m. a carrier, f. TINY or NNYA. t In these and similar words, it will be found that the masculine nouns express functions and attributes peculiar to males, and the feminine such as are peculiar to females. § The * is often omitted; especially when the singular terminates in ?: as, 13 a nation, O%4 (instead of 0%) nations ; "0 (instead of 19) a Levite, D"? (instead of n>) Levites ; 1is likewise frequently omitted : as, MIN a sign, p. NNN instead of Minis: q Also 22, which is, however, a Chaldaism, and ought, there- fore, to be considered as an exception. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 49 Formation of the Plural Number Feminine. 47. Heminine nouns form their plural, by adding Mi to the singular: as, WW32 a well, NMINA-—( Vide p- 41.) Obs. 1.—Those that terminate in "> or N, change these termin- ations into Ni: as, TW2 a girl, nyvy3 gus ; nina a virgin, nipina virgins; MS a letter, MS letters; MYAYD a ring, MAYRY rings ; nnd a coat, tunick, niin tunicks. Some, however, retain the Nn: as, no3 a door, mindy doors; MW a bow, Min’ bows; MIM lance, MMT lances. 2.—Those which terminate in 4% or M'> change these ter- minations into Mi': as, 1732 a strange woman, MV IDI strange | women; M732 a Hebrew woman. p. NAY: 3.—Those that terminate in 1), change (1) into (*.), and add Mi’: as, mien a kingdom, nv2210 kingdoms. 4.—Many masculine nouns take M) for their plural: as, AN a father, MAN fathers; 8B3 a seat, throne, p. DIND2; and many nouns feminine take O°~ for their plural: as }28 a stone, p. 0°18; my barley, p. Rryy- 5.— Some nouns take indiscriminately either the masculine or feminine plural*: thus, 17 a generation, p. DN7 or NWT; TW a@ year, p. DY or MW ; HPN a window, p. DAN or Minbn + 6.—The names of liquids, seasons, metalst, and some col- + jee silver, }° wine, 4 oil; VAN spring, AN winter, Sin sand, PA® dust * See Note, p. 44. + Also 250, which ought to be considered as an exception. t The names of liquids and metals are sometimes found in the plural: but then the word must be considered as expressive of different sorts. 50 THE ETYMOLOGY OF To the preceding may be added abstract terms and proper names, which, from the nature of their signification, do not admit of the plural: as, 7208 love™, ny hatred, &c. Obs. 7.—Some are used in the plural only: as 0% life, OOM mercy, 0°32 the visage, face, nive3 reins, NNW stables. 8.—The following are rather irregular in the formation of their plural: as, M3 (instead 733 or N32) a daughter, p. naa; mins a sister, p. TAS; We an ox, p. DW ; Pw an open place, a market, p. DPW; WS a man. p. DY, but more frequently DIN ; TWN a woman, p. Ni¥’%, but more frequently Dw3- DUAL. 41. The dual expresses two of a kind ; and is formed by adding ©'~ to the singular, whether it be masculine or feminine: as, DY’ day DY days, DY two days ; HON a thousand, nrpby thousands, DEON two thousands ; bys a shoe, mioy3 or pry shoes poy a paw of shoes; ndy a door or gate, mindy gates, ons double doors. Obs. 1. — Nouns terminating in ‘1-, change this letter into N: as, mY a year, ONY two years ; OND a hundred, DYDN'D two hundred. 2.—Things that are double by nature or art, are used in the * Some of these are found in the plural; but then they must, like the preceding, be understood as expressive of different kinds : thus, NNIN wisdoms, i. e. the sciences; MIA understandings, i. e. dif- Ferent objects or degrees of understanding. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 51 dual instead of the plural: as [Wan eye, DY eyes ; * TV hand, OY) hands ; 219 foot, pyr feet; MEY lip, ONAY Lips; TIN ear, DYN ears. Obs. 3. —DNND a pair of scales, a balance ; pomp pincers, tongs; OM a hand mill (consisting of two stones,) admit not of the singular number.+ 4.—The following, and a few other nouns, form their dual by adding ®%— to the plural: thus, M20 @ wall, niin f. walls, onion double walls; S27 a myriad, nis myriads, ona to myriads. Haercise. Give the signification of the following, and form their feminine gender :— abe paw onyh os Sry ena pee oe bap 12 AY 2 JB TS, Tay, I a Give the signification and form the plural of the following :— ain read ia Spa oe PNB Nw m3 ion ND, DY... M37 -WYaO 77) 83. nine py * Some of these are found in the plural number ; but then they have mostly different significations: thus NYY springs, fountains; ni tenons, portions; Db times ; as p97 vio three times (lit. steps); &e. + To the above may be added, 5%) water, Dow heaven, which occur always in the dual form. 59 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Give the signification and form the dual of the following :— py mae mye pie ean nag Syn py oP N25 main Render the following into English :— Ss capsn comp py 2 ya? a mA 2 “ODOM "YP "pI OND + 7a 7 yA "OND IND yng ga oye eyo ody OS 2 ETT "TNE 122 “THN “MPN DEN MTA my yy #n2by eT AND “PPS “pA "ow “Iw 7 PED One yang A by oey AaND “ ypS mys “Ajaima TW! i Give. 2]32 Son,p. 03, 322 Heart. 4}Y Eye. 5 913 Way. 6 They shall observe. 7Gonot. *Insertof. ® Sinner. 9 Withhold, 10 227 Foot. !Apath. 1%¥For. 1? Evil. 44 They run. > dager 1617 Wealth. 7 First, chief. 389827 Produce. 19 38 Father. 20 DN Mother. 21 Go. 7% Ant. %3Sluggard. %*4See. 25 And be wise. 26 Which not to her, 7. e¢. who has neither. 27 Chief. 28 Overseer. *9 Ruler. 3° She provideth. °! Summer. 51? Bread, provi- sion. % She gathereth. 34 Harvest. 9° Food. *6 The sluge ard says. + There is. 37.A lion. 38 Without, street. 39 An old ee 40 A wide place, a market. 4! I shall be slain. O25) INS «INVA O02 SDE Ad + AA “nig a> mpg BNET : ype ww MYYSTKD THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 53 hinpA asniaa AN amA opMIa soD> ym? Nba WINYA AMA sa °sypIay “sey + DP som may’ mabe b>: “miyyn-n> qd) aI SWS ONT MARAT ADT SY 3 “O$ PAS NIE "AMI PW! 2 wa “Jan RD ON) AN OY ATW PNT Seay “maby “onneyiee 295 mvs > nny ‘M3 a daughter, p. 793: * Are. 2 Cattle,sheep. 3 What shall Ido? * Wewilltake. ° Wewill give. © Yeshall give. 7 Ye shall take. ®7Y3 A boy, youth, p. OWI 9 jpt An old man, p. Dt 10572 Horned cattle. !4 We must go. ' Ye shall not do any work. !373¥ A servant, slave. ‘ON A female slave. 15 7972 or ND73 cattle. 16 A stranger. !7 Who is. '8 WY A gate, p- DY yy. 19Go, 20 IN Land, country. 2! Birth-place. 2? Which I will show thee. ae tion shalt go and take. 24 NIBY A family. *?N!2 A house, 1’2 house a CASE. 49. Most of the relations denoted in Latin, Greek, and other languages, by cases, are expressed in He- brew by the prefixes 2, ry 2, 4, and by the particle DN (Art. 40,41), or by the prepositions N to, {2 from. (See Declension of Nouns, Table I.) 50. The relations denoted by the Genitive are indicated by the mere position of the words, or by some slight alteration in them, as will be shown presently. F 2 54 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Absolute and Constructive state of Words. 51. A word is said to be in an absolute state when it requires no other word to define it: as, TAY a servant, slave, p. OTAY; II a word, p. Os; b9 or by a vessel, p. DY?2° 52. A word is said to be in a state of construction, when it requires another word to define or to limit its signification: such, for instance, are the first words in the following examples :— DIVAN TAY. . servant of Abraham, or Abraham’s servant, DIAN "TY. . servants of Abraham, sben a7 . . the word of the hing. WY W391. . a word of falsehood, i. e. a false word*, HON “A. . words of truth, or true words, Mya °73. . a vessel of iron, or an iron vessel, "DA 2. . vessels of silver, or silver vessels. 53. In all these instances, it is the first word that undergoes the change, ¢f any (just the reverse of what takes place in other languages), and it is therefore said to be in a state of construction. To understand this more clearly, the student is requested to bear in mind the remark made in Art. 86; namely-—that one of the methods by which general terms are made to express particular objects or individuals, is, to place one or more words after the noun whose signification is to be * These examples show clearly the origin of Adjectives. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 55 limited. By way of further illustration, let us take the general term AY in the following sentence :— Tay “Di x5 D732 ‘A servant will not be corrected by words’ (Prov. xxix.) Here TAY is used indefinitely, and means any servant ; but as the sense is complete, the word TA), is said to be in an andependent or in an absolute state* ; but in the phrase DVN TY WS") ‘And [the] servant-of Abraham (or Abraham’s servant) said,’ TaY is used in a restrictive sense; and as it de- pends on the following word O74 which defines and limits it, it is said to be in a state of construction or de- pendence*. Thus, also, in the phrase 2y ba vind ITS ‘To wash [the] feet-of [the] servants-of my lord,’ ‘237 feet of, and “TAY servants of, are in a state of de- pendence or construction : the absolute state of the first, being D*TAY. servants, and of the second, pd feet. 54. ‘The noun which is put in a state of construc- tion, must precede that which defines or qualifies it: thus, aN “DID a father’s instruction (not “DVD AN); shan ms the king’s house (not 2 97/97). 55. The definite 7, when required, is placed be- fore the definite word, but not before the word in * This state of the noun is denominated by Hebrew grammarians, ‘T15) separated; whereas, the constructive or dependent is called OD or F2D3 approached. It would, perhaps, be better to name the first, the independent state, and the second, the dependent state. However, for the sake of convenience, we shall sometimes denomi- nate the first, the Nominative ; and the second, the Genitive. D6 THE ETYMOLOGY OF construction ; because this is already defined by the word which follows it: thus, as in the preceding ex- ample, 77120 va (but not Joan rar, nor 22 abe ie hs 56. As both words present only one precise con- ception, they are, in some respects, considered as a compound word; and for this reason, the first is often joined to the second, by 52, and then loses its prin- cipal accent: as, [4 a garden, jwWz7A [the] garden of Eden, pon king of Sodom. 57. To facilitate still further the pronunciation, the first word is often abridged by rejecting or con- tracting one or more of its vowel-points: as,— m3 a house, n'a house of, nban n’3 house of prayer, oh a hand, 7) hand of, ween 7 the hand of the king. 58. Nouns terminating in ‘1, change this ter- mination into M-: as, WYY a song, NI NYY the song of my beloved, WT a law, mw MVM the law of Moses. Those that terminate in >, retain the 7, but change (-) into (..): as, 3M a camp, Sy nm) Lsrael’s camp, 3P% cattle*, DD AN 73P the cattle of your father. 59. ‘The following have their absolute and construc- tive state singular alikes=— * But the genitive of 137 a purchase, is N3/'>- When the 4 is merely added for the sake of euphony, it is rejected in the genitive: as, npr night, bib night of: THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 57 1* All names whose vowels are immutable (see Ch. III.): as, WY a song, VY a city, MA a covenant, DID a horse, M7 the wind, Lip voice, Va a stranger, so- journer, YDS a prisoner, VI? a disciple, tae) a preest, AIS an enemy, &c. 2° All nouns of the following forms—[a] by as, JIN ear, YIN a month, WY a bribe, &e. [0] Syp as, Se a king, TDA mercy, WY a boy, WW the dawn, rows G| by: as, 12D a book, VS ashes. 3 All feminine nouns having the following ter- minations—N,, Mi, N—-, N-: as, MWY a crown, mand an under-garment, DAWN friendship, nydin a worm, TVW) beginning. 60. The plural and dual terminations, 0°— and B*— are changed into ‘=: as, O24 words, UNA 737 the- words-of the-man ; ah women, wives, Bren Y) the kings wives; DY eyes, DWINT 3) the-eyes-of the men. 61. The plural termination A) remains unchanged, but the preceding vowels suffer a slight alteration : as, MIN fathers, NIN MAS thy fathers’ fathers ; MIDI} dlessings, DW MIDI blessings of heaven. EKaercise. Render the following into Hebrew— The king of Israel. The law of God. The words of my Lord, The house of my fathers. The song of Moses. The way of sin- ners. A word of truth. The eyesofthewoman. The hands of my BR THE ETYMOLOGY OF sister. The vessels of the house. The blessings of thy father. The sons of my friend. The first of all thy produce. Your — father’s cattle. The king’s camp. The annexed Tables will enable the student to see the principal modifications of nouns at one view. EXPLANATION OF THE J ABLES. Taste I.—The Roman letters in the first column are abbre- viations for Nominative, Dative, Objective, Ablative, Comparative, Conjunction. The second and third columns contain the prefixes and their powers, as used indefinitely or definitely. The fourth column contains a noun of the singular number with the prefixes, used indefinitely. The fifth column contains a noun in a state of construction. The sixth column contains a noun plural with the prefixes, used indefinitely. The seventh column contains the same noun with the prefixes, used in a state of construction. The eighth column contains a noun of the singular number with the prefixes, used definitely. The ninth column contains a noun plural with the prefixes, used definitely. TaBLE II].— No. 1, contains the pronominal affixes, and their powers. No. 2. contains a noun masculine, with the pronominal affixes. No. 3. a noun feminine terminating in 1~with the affixes. 62. Obs..—Each of the nouns contained in the tables, may befurther varied by the prefixes: as mayb to my word; objective 2S DECLENSION uh 8. 7. the words. the word. words of B37 WT “17 bay 72372 27 BI AN | IAS | Aarns Ba WWI "19 ba72 2713 13 aa 1213 "TP bya 7377) "t OF A SUBSTANTIVE.—TABLE I. 6. 5. : 3. words. word of, a word Der. aay | 04 3273 77, 1, i the. pad 3275 | 5275 | 9, -) to the. Bma7 | TSTAN D7) AA or AN the. Ba a>) 75 ni, HQ from the, p9273 | W272 | 72s, inthe. B33 273 13 | 3, 2 as the. BT Ty, pana the, | sues ue 2. Inp. a N, ) toa D. F a Ac. *75 froma al with a fae Dasa | Com 4 and Con 7. BAAN Reis (ele t= PON wh i Miare " Not expressed. especially in pause. 7 The ” is sometimes omitted. " Or Be T22- - . | . . - BSAA aH TIA BIPAB | 7--- ‘oo BPD use BAAN | j---- Bypp Teor BT B07» - BIA | 1737 a7 san INFINITIVES AND PARTICIPLES.—TABLE -- BIT | TPIS BI) | 1312 DIIINN | 939308 "paws | NPP us. say) 3°by = * Or 78 to. ° In a a few instances with 77; as, 7 Tos Gen. ix. 21. or with 377; 3 as, 758 for 758 Job xxv. 3. m7 RAN mean FTPID pe | FINN mp her. ri) by ° 72 from. *In poetry 19; as, 2 for DoS", WII) cD ba FODA |) Nn PATINA pH PHN SAMA IIl. "TTA | TTPIB| «TPAD 5 PIP] | WIP) A PIW pip INY | FWA | ADA DANN p2 FIp2 |’ IPB "TPs | PREPOSITIONS.—TABLE IV. thee, m. | Tey} Ay | wy] ay * Sometimes with 3, as NIA for Sn him. TY ie thee f. me. MY | by | ° Or Ip: | a word, 2. | | words. | | alaw. | , laws. | 7) ja visiter. Bpip tk | visiters, SiN | beloved. “p2 2. visiting. with, Dy by upon. 5 Or W727 Or FPP. | } | | | | | THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 59 my word, 3) from my word, AN and my word, &e. nad and to his word; 272 as my words, 1313 as her words, 7327 and thy words f.; DUI and from their words, &c.: ‘NNN? in my lav, “NNN and my laws, YUNA in his laws, WANT and in thy law, &c. Taste UI.—No. |. contains an example of a Participle Active and Passive, with the pronominal affixes. Obs.—Participles being frequently used as nouns, are varied like ‘them: as, WY a keeper, guardian, Da WW the keeper of the vessels, OVW the keepers, M20 Ww the keepers of the house, nA mobi and to the keepers of my law, or to those who keep my law. No. 2. contains an example of an Infinitive mood with the prono- minal affixes: as, 1P2 to visit, “IPB my visiting, VIRB thy visiting, &e. ; TOY to keep, to guard, IY my keeping, or guarding. 63. Obs. 1. — Infinitives, from the nature of their signification, do not admit of all the variation of nouns. They may, however, receive the prefixes 1, 5 3,12; as, NPD in visiting, PHP as visiting, spa? for visiting, or to visit, i.e. for the purpose of visiting ; IPB from visiting ; and also the pronominal affixes "1232 in my visiting, i. e. being engaged in the act; "IP53 as my visiting, Wpae to his visiting, PB from, by, or because of his visiting, VIDA in thy visiting, &e. 2,.—In the latter case, the pronominal affixes have some- times an objective signification : nove to keep him; 12? mv) to cultivate her, and to keep her. (Gen. ii. 15.) TaBLe IV. contains examples of Prepositions (originally nouns) with the pronominal affixes. 64. Obs.—Some Prepositions take the pronominal affixes of the singular number: as, b to me, 7 to thee; others, those of the plural number : as, ON to, by to me, TONS to thee. 60 THE ETYMOLOGY OF The student may, by way of exercise, decline the following words: 8 light, WY a witness, like, WY (p.42). Thus 38, "Ty: nan a prayer like TY (ibid). Thus, NSBA-—229 the heart, like 12%;— TN light, like THA;— WW a keeper, like TPB ;— PB one that is visited, like AN’; — WY to keep, like IPB: 65. From the preceding rules and observations, it is evident that the modification of nouns is principally expressed by prefixes and affixes. As these are common to all nouns, it follows that, strictly speaking, there cannot be more than one declension. However, as several of the vowel-points are subject to a variety of changes in the process of declension, a further classification is ne- cessary in order to ascertain the principles upon which those changes are founded, and the rules by which they are regulated. This will form the subject of the following chapter, to which, such students as are desirous of having some information on this part of grammar, are referred. Those, however, who are contented with a general knowledge of the language, may pass on at once to the 4th chapter. CHAPTER III. On THE CHANGES WHICH SOME OF THE VOWELS UNDERGO IN THE PrROcESS OF DECLENSION. Introductory Remarks. 66. It has already been remarked, (Art. 29—380), that in conse- quence of the removal of the accent — which frequently takes place when nouns are put in a state of construction, and always when. they are augmented by the affixes — such of the vowels as are not characteristic of grammatical distinctions are often changed for others, or entirely omitted; by which means the words THE HEBREW LANGUAGE 61 are abridged, and their pronunciation. facilitated. These changes depend chiefly on the grammatical forms* of the words and their Etymology (though often on usage only +) and cannot well be as- certained without classification. The method which the ancient grammarians adopted was this:—they enumerated all or most of the forms of which the nouns of the language were susceptible, and specified under each form the changes to which its vowel-points were subject, together with such words as deviated from the general rule: and thus they exhibited the Etymology and the change of the vowels at the same time. As the forms of words are, however, so very numerous as almost to overburden the memory, modern gram- marianst have endeavoured to abridge the labour, by distributing * By the grammatical form is meant, that form which a word is said to have according to its Etymology. Thus, the words TY a witness DY a name, and, by shadow, have apparently the same form ; yet, the grammatical form of the first is DB, (Art, 25, p.27,) the (-.)' of which is immutable, and it is therefore inflected thus, TY, "TY, O° 1Y, TY, &e. The second, derived from a verb whose third radical is 7, and which is here omitted, is said to be of the form YB; the (-- ) being mutable, it is inflected thus: DY, "OY, ninw, ni, &e. The third, derived from a verb whose second and third radicals are alike, and one of which is omitted, is said to be of the form S-5. The (+. ) is likewise mutable, and the second letter receives Dagesh on ae augmented: thus, by by PY + Thus, 28} and X88 have the same grammatical form cae yet the first retains (-- ) thus, ’281, ’AN1 ; but the second changes (:), into (-), and(-- ) into (~) in the genitive plural: thus, 88: Thus, likewise, 72 and 214 are both of the form (YB), yet the former is inflected, 127, 127, O27, &e., but the latter, 3, %a, DDI, Ke. Hence the difficulty of giving general rules that shall not be liable to several exceptions. t J. S. Vater was the first who adopted this arrangement, which has been much improved by Gesenius and other grammarians. 62 THE ETYMOLOGY OF the nouns according as their vowels are either immutable, mutable, or of a mixed character. The chief objection against this arrange- ment, is that before the student can know whether a vowel is mutable or not, he must often have recourse to the Etymology of the word; and as this cannot well be ascertained without some knowledge of the grammatical forms, he is left to mere conjecture, and the clas- sification becomes almost useless. This inconvenience we have endeavoured to remove in the following Tables, by adding the grammatical form to each division, and by specifying the chief forms belonging to each class, together with most of their exceptions. The following rules and observations will, it is presumed, facili- tate the acquisition of this difficult and, to beginners, embarrassing part of grammar. Immutable and Mutable Vowels. 67. Immutable are— 1st.—All long vowels followed by either of the quiescent letters, N, 9, 2: as, (8>) in 8A a chamber, WSTK @ poor man; OC), Ana poverty, a between; (>), In BD a purse, bagt; (A), in Vat a whelp ; and (3) or (+) not followed by («) or (-) as DI3§ a cup, 193 a priest, minister. * This word is sometimes written without %: thus, &; but this makes no difference, the vowel being equally immutable. + Except some words of the form (¥8):as, 74 a kid, S a lion, which change (‘;) into (*) or into(:); thus O73, ONS: (YB); as bn sickness, yon: CYB): as, "2 rebellion, DY): | t is sometimes changed into (~); as, YIIY « week, p. nip ; nie kingdom, p. niv3? : § } is sometimes changed into (+) followed by Dagesh: as D)18 red, f. TOI p. ODW OMY naked, forms its plural DDMY. This is an anomaly, having dagesh after a long vowel, which is contrary to rule. 62 THE ETYMOLOGY OF the nouns according as their vowels are either ammutable, mutable, or of a méxed character. The chief objection against this arrange- ment, is that before the student can know whether a vowel is mutable or not, he must often have recourse to the Etymology of the word; and as this cannot well be ascertained without some knowledge of the grammatical forms, he is left to mere conjecture, and the clas- sification becomes almost useless. This inconvenience we have endeavoured to remove in the following Tables, by adding the grammatical form to each division, and by specifying the chief forms belonging to each class, together with most of their exceptions. The following rules and observations will, it is presumed, facili- tate the acquisition of this difficult and, to beginners, embarrassing part of grammar. Immutable and Mutable Vowels. 67. Immutable are— 1st.—AlIl long vowels followed by either of the quiescent letters, N,, 2: as, (NS) in 8A a chamber, UNI ¢ poor man; (*~), in wry poverty, VA between; (0), in DD a purse, bagt; (3), im Vat a whelp ; and (1) or (+) not followed by («) or (-) as DY3§ a cup, 112 a priest, minister. * This word is sometimes written without &: thus, Y; but this makes no difference, the vowel being equally immutable. + Except some words of the form (Y3):as, "14 a kid, WS a lion, which change (‘>) into (7) or into(:); thus O73, DYN: (YB); as bn sickness, yon: CYB): as, WD rebellion, OYV2- ft J is sometimes changed into (~); as, WIY a week, p. MYIW ; mien kingdom, p. niv3? - § } is sometimes changed into (+) followed by Dagesh: as D8 red, f. MDTS p. ODS DW naked, forms its plural DD. This is an anomaly, having dages’ after a long vowel, which is contrary to rule. CLASSIFICATION OF NOUNS.—TABLE V. Absolute state. f. | their, m. your, m. our er his thy, f. thy, m. my: Gen 7 BN BINNS) IN FANS iN Fas 7s oN “8 7 BAN BSN IN FNS VN Ps 4s oN wN iF | DPT] BaP) UE] Ape] pes} gps] ape) pe] pe 1 ops ops | WS ms | Yer ENPMEE Te pays ‘prs DD) paeT) eT] AT) a] PR] HR 27 Dy tf pear] oe] oa] omen] owes] pes] pes] ea] oe I. | Ain yf Boye yy | ob) sb] byw) bye] Syne] gone] oS) Sys y) oom) opbye | om dmet) mde) ode} ne | ome) Snes) yw fii) — BYSp Pays) UHR) YP] TEP] TEND] TTR] PEP] HP | oI yYSp BYP TSP my sp yyYsp TP sp TSP "TSP "TSP Lit \ , 1} by'72)1] apap} ameop| ompop) tp] pee) ape} Se) abe dy} omg e}t] oped} ede} omede) orwede] pede] pede] ode} dn f] Dw) OT nm ma) oe] ome] oon lV. . ary . . . | . . . . LAND . yf DIB, | OR aT} a] mea] at] mea] i] apt papr, pt] apt, Sat] PL) RE) ra Y) iy] paps Dar NEL ML PH] TPL] PRE apt) ap jr} a7] ba, MPA) PT) | PR] ORR) omy) oT ||] ova p27 wT ae vot 727 v2 Par 2711 VL } , . : : ? : r : ix} emis] ppm} oe] mm] a} pm) opm] | on C]y] pamma}r} oom} om) am} re} om) pam) mom six light. Beis p- pus ajust man. DYD"Ty P- D7 blood. DY" P. Syaei a fox, prdyrey p. WYP harvest.* DY P- 59 an interpreter, prydn p. S53 a word. p21 p. 12 an old man. | D1 P emai a way. D977 p. WY) a boy. Dy) p. bye Ibid. The accent is on the last syllable, except before the affixes 12> tae a oat is aa Ds , where it is on the penultimate. * Or a reaper. ae. io) Aine fag cy ku) VO * 7 jing 7) " ian re”) . 7 i J ah Ani " 7 ts ie te at % . je q 4 a Ore wie, “ae >: ee oe, ) | >, 7 A ae a eS vee x Ty, : re oll . Wr i Vl: CONTINUED AS their, m. pa BED ala byw poy pons | oni | pani Don pan D3 7° DM | DanN DTANN | Dyn DSN | Dp pan -—nip | p27 pvon p03 p33 pony DMN | poss | D>yn | psn pba pons * Or DWI: wWwyan ani wry wor yan | nD son avn 33199 | 9953 | Oy | WANS | DIDS) DN yn oy ssn | a9 mean mb mons mn mnin mon abn mba ms mine Ping main NN rr myn mp3 mPI3 yan iy yor inip ynin yon won bp 153 ‘ny YM | 1a"N Yan | sn yen iba v3 + In pause ‘9h, %OD- Te SPAN por a) ni y0 qron 123 W122 spniny yak TN 33 330 Br ie] yen aN TON hip nin yon qon 123 122 HY nary qos pani Wy >| yyn 7703 yo re] NN ‘mi ‘min nbn = Sh b9 ‘24S INN rb ‘bn a4 miow ‘0 “0 be ninw 38 ‘2"N Spy q Or oY. bY yn soa! Dw In p.* by a ram, Doty: p. Nyp death. Dn p. + bn sickness. Toon p. + 99 a vessel. p59 p. Dy a name, ninw p. aN an enemy. DDN P- {TT an arrow. D'NF p. bps a camel, pvdina p. f.| your, m. our. her. his. thy, f. thy, m. my. Gen. Absolute State. Form. al Wag ee Seca! ete Se): ee) map| pp abook. | yp 1] DOMED] MBP} MED} =D] TD] TEP "8D P| BBD P. Hf p2wan ywwaN AWAIN wan qwan quan wan win wan a month. < — = — CONTINUED. o_o XI. fi a 1] their, m. pop ae) Op ore Dip DN? oy ony Dey oT eye Dn Ap pa mbap onin oa ninin oye pavnisy? OND panos png? ponizbp CLASSIFICATION OF jf: | your, m. our. her. his, ; pp) (bp mbp bp 1} opp) wo] bp] vb ed 1} dp’on yn pn ypn ? Ee x | 4 © IE \ \z . 1 D22p 37 +p MP I 03)? 3p TR MR I p25 4 mys my 1 poy wy my yh 1 DIbyI WY) § Neyo} nbyp 1] Deyo} eyp) Mey] reyes 1] Bnew] snd] rnp] inp 1] Denby} aanibap| nibs} nibap r} BINA; MA} Amin} inn 7] OPnMIA; ann} oatmiA; oo ynisin 1 banw wm) = AN nw 1] Bnew) one) mnie) wi 1) Bgnsqa} 3nI) AMDB} ing 1] OpHII7B} wD) AMI] ymin bang72) unzrp| Anzbp| — ingdp ponizbp | snisde| mnissy| yniadp * Or a branch of a candlestick. NOUNS.—TABLE VII. Absolute state. Form. thy, f. thy, m. my: Gen pd spp bp bp bp a basket. yD) PPD "5D 5D] DYDD p. PR) PT] PA] PR] phalew. TR) TR] RR) pre We] RR] RTD]. Tas reed 732) Tre]. ee)” ep aaee: cia po a) my mys a shepherd. 74 yy yo yo] Doyo p. yeye| Jeye wy) my] mbyio work. eye) | eye ‘by Bye | DPD p wep wep) tp) ry] mappa ene qi) pathy] cpibap} —ntbap|_nibap p. yan hn mA min] An alaw. yamn pnisin MN minim} mynin p- yn nw mI nw TY a year. pw) Pw maw miw | mia’ p. yD qn273 273 MDVD] MDW 2 blessing. pms) ymin); nis} mina | nindap. qnoe| yn>p| —mpbp} mab] nadipa queen. pnts} anise! niche} —ntsbig | nadia p. 7 Or Dar § Or My mye myb nbye wae ‘ ; Soo ee _ — “ oe! #=—] a + -. << > '5 bh) >) md 7D bb) 72 75 >) ‘5 mp mouth. ly py |} poy wy mye | mi peg my ny my my a lamb. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 63 Observe.—(* )and (.. )are likewise immutable when they are either a compensation for Dagesh ; as the first (+) in YN (instead of wn), an artist; the first (--) in WI Gnstead of YIN) a deaf person ; or in words derived from verbs of the 5th Conjugation (1): as, Wa stranger, p. ON, f. TN, &e. TW a witness, p. OW, f£ TY :—and from the 8th Conjugation (DYPIDD: as, {22 a shield, p. D3. 2nd.—All short vowels followed by a letter having dagesh* : as, mp3 a bride, 128 a husbandman, =p ye) a ladder, &c.—(See part I, page 35). 8rd.—All short vowels followed by a letter having Sh’ va jfinal+: as, {292 an offering, new a table, especially when the first letter is formative: as, DBYD judgment, NUS a native. Ath.—As the change of vowels does not extend beyond the penul- timate, it follows that the antepenultimate is immutable{. The first vowel of the following and similar words will therefore be retained : as 100 conception, nna a family, W202 consolation, nena terror W73I remembrance, &e. 5th.—Sh’va at the commencement of words is always retained, except in words of the form (py); as, 12373 a blessing, where it is changed into (.): See class XI.)—and‘in the form (‘Y8), where it is changed into (.) or (+). Obs.— Vowels not included in the preceding rules are mostly mutable. a CLASSIFICATION OF Nouns. 68. Nouns may be distributed into thirteen Classes.---(See the annexed Tables. ) * Except 788, from which we find WIDOS and WIDN- + Except the forms nbys and neva : as, OMY @ handmaid, nD a queen, ™Y2 a young woman, which change their short vowels into (:); thus, nina, nindn, nys t Except M72 a bright spot, p. WIR; WMO a vision, gen. WV p. MINI; TADVW a chariot, gen. NAD W p. NAD V- G4 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 69. The first Class comprehends monosyllables and dissyllables whose vowels are immutable: as, WS light, OID the voice, pris a just man. The words belonging to this class have, of course, their absolute state and their genitive alike, and retain their vowel-points before all the pronominal affixes. (See paradigm No. 1.) Words of the following grammatical form belong to this class :— (OB)—as, “WI a stranger, (lit. separated) D) exalted, superior, W a singer, VW or W a prince, VS or T$* an oppressor. tOyE and 9B) —as, Ia wreath, border, VA a sojourner, 14 a lamp; NY a relation, ASA parn. (O99 and Bt )—as, D'2 a purse, iD a sort, species, VD a wall ; VA a master, bey a path. Lipp and sib) —as, WN Light, WY skin, m3 strength ; 9M an ass, “ky leaven. * The genitive singular of these words is Ww and WW: Of the former we find likewise M3 your prince; otherwise they retain (7): thus 7, Ea ey, ey, Cow, &e., IS, EAS, Ke. + Except 188, which has already been noticed. t Except VY a city, p. EY, Y, IY, Wy: § Except DV a day, p. DD) or Ni; gen. p. "2° or Nid, — 9 7D, &e.; 23D’, ENN, &e.; dual, Doi Ox, Dp. my: Mn a thorn, ENN or = In: Except likewise, WY an || See the second Note in the following page. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 65 (OAYD and LiD*)—as, WA a whelp, AVF the wind, mib+ a table, board ; Sao a boundary, wad a garment. OIys.t PVD, HYD)—as, WAN mighty, PAY (for PW) a tyrant » W\Dia hero, WWDW a drunkard ; THY a pillar ; MF an oven. cabye, ybyp, SOB) —as, JWOD a bell; JIOPWY might, power ; FINDA want, {VAN a poor, needy person. aypn, Soy py) f as, PYM" a destroyer ; NipwD a treasure ; Oiyen, PIE) | wird a garment ; VW3 a song. CPE, DYE) (as, FE the fist NIB a chick ; PIA ayaa | a disciple; J13M5) pleasure. (ATVB) fas, APIS end, DAIPDS kingdom; FV WNG a cavdys | remnant » FPYYS « for YUN beginning. To the preceding may be added many words of the following fe 70D): as, ston a window.— Root, bon. (FYE: *Except PY a marked, p. OPW; 7 a kettle, p. O17: + The vowel under Ff is denominated 12431 MNS Furtive Pathach. It is dropped in the process of declension : as, M73, 113: + Except NBY a bird, p. OBY- § p. niv3919: Thus also from MANA the nether, or lower part, p. Din: 66 THE ETYMOLOGY OF as, nada captivity : Root, “i53.— (Fay): as, FVIDD a covering, garment.—(F°Y5 : as, FVIN* a lance. (NPI): as, NW an outlet, or going out: Root, NY? 3 N19 fear, + —(SYid): as, tee ee production, issue : Root, N8?- Otvs.—Most words of the form 2YB, as WP) honour, respect, { 303 a writing, retain (+) in the genitive singular, and in the absolute plural: as, PY a neck-chain, p. ™*PIY,; some, however, take (-) in the genitive singular, and dagesh on being inflected; thus, Pt time, season; gen. VO? ; ‘32%, OID, p. 0°31 Many words of the form ?¥8 receive likewise dagesh: as, D1 a myrtle, p. DDT ; DY! little, p. DOV few; DIS a pond, p. ODIX- Sometimes, however, dagesh is omitted: as, DIN, ODMAN. From Yl honey, we find ‘27: I. 69. The second class comprehends monosyllables having mutable (*) as, O° d/ood, derived from verbs of the 7th conjugation Gre) and dissyllables which have a similar vowel for their wtimate and an immu- table vowei for their penultimate: as, ISIN a treasure, “DVD correction. * Plural DIN or NINN, OD NINN. + Yet, of this we find DAN: t The only inflections with which this word (103) is found in Scripture, are FIND and O23 ; but in the later writings we find it inflected in the following manner:—2)3, gen. 1N3 or 1N32— *3Nd, &e. DAND, °3N3, OMAN, Ke, THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 67 Obs.—The change consists in this,—I1st, (+) is changed mostly into (-) in the genitive singular and before the heavy affixes : as, OA, gen. TI, D7 (for HPA) ; WIN gen. WIN, DPVIN, ke. 2nd, In the genitive plural, and before the heavy affixes, (+) is entirely omitted (Sh’va being substituted for it): thus, p. "24, gen. (OI, MMI, &.; p. MVS, gen. TIS, COMnyiN (See Paradigms, No. I1.). Words of the following form belong to this Class :— (YB) as, T* a hand, 1 a fish. — (ya, bya, Wt) as, a'r) a palace, AMY a musical instrument, a harp, 1353 a star. bys, bys, by); as, Jaa thief, a2 a talent, nbp « ladder. abya, ibys, Dye) : as, 7.3 a furnace, {AP an offering, Inbw, a table yn, bya, 5p): as, PO a curtain, covering, FINN a native, jaa a tabernacle, a dwelling-place, Dawid judgment. dyin, Sy, byt) as, YDID a removing, march, IDWS a foundation, WF a sojourner. II. 71. The third Class comprehends words which have a mutable (,) or (.) in their penultimate, and * From V? we find 03°3', j3°1) your hand. f* Several words of this and the following forms take dagesh: as, DIN a wheel, WW a rose, UW a high place, a place of refuge. p. DDN, DIWY, 1230, &c. These belong to the eighth class. { Some words of these and the preceding forms retain (,) in the genitive plural, &c.; others reject it: as, YOM a plant, ‘YO; avin, ‘avin; VED, YED, ke. 68 THE ETYMOLOGY OF an immutable vowel in their ultimate syllable: as, YEP harvest, yor an interpreter, V2 blessed, JAY pain, labour. The change consists in substituting (:) for (+) and (“); thus, 1$?, gen. VSP, YEP &.: mone, 1S, TYP, &e. WILY, gen. Asp, Observe.—As two Sh’vas cannot begin a word, it follows that in words wherein (,) is preceded by (:); as, Hay hunger, PIB an unwalled town, the (:) must be changed into a vowel; and hence from the first we have in the genitive 1229, and from the second NBD his, &e. Words of the following forms belong to this class:— _ aye, Gay, + bayp, + Coy) as, 2°) a generous, liberal man ; Ss a master, lord ; yA blessed ; JON faithful. jabys, sibyp) as, 78, JIN a remembrance. (7p, 190d) as, TY joys TIM sorrow. (DiBId): as, Dipi a place ; Opa): as, ['4/9 an intelligent man, pig an interpreter. * (..) is, however, retained in the genitive singular: as, yn, gen. 22° + Except wow) an officer (perhaps of the third rank) and Yiaw a week, which retain (,): thus, Deroy, Miya; to distinguish them from D9 the third time, NYI2Y oaths. t A few words of this form, as WHY pure, 543 great, change } into short (+) on being joined to another word by Makkeph: thus, “19, “273: Several words of this form take dagesh, and change (1) into («): as, DTS red, p. DIN: OVW naked, DDI: THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 69 AV; 72. The fourth Class comprehends all dissyllables having (++) or (~-) for their vowels: as, 137 a word, a2? the heart. The change consists, 1st—in substituting (:) for the penultimate (~) or (.) and in changing (+) ultimate into (-) in the genitive singular, and before the affixes 03, J2; thus, 724, 724%, 03925, &e.; 24, PAA, &. ; BIA, &e—2nd. In the genitive plural and before the heavy affixes, penultimate (,) or (..) are changed mostly into (.), more rarely into (-)*; and ultimate (+) into (:); thus, 27, 03735, 12734, O37, WI Words of the following forms belong to this class:— OYydt)—as, IM gold, DIM a wise man, WI) a river, WA fresh. | bya)—as, “YY « hair, 2Y a grape, yoy a rib, FY a twig, &c. Vi 73. The fifth Class comprehends dissyllables having mutable (..) for their wtémate, and mutable (+) for their penultimate: as, {pl an old man. The vowels are subject to the same changes as those of the pre- ceding class. To this class belong all words of the form (ry): * Thus D231 a wise man, gen. O20, p. OOS, gen. p. N20; 43 a wing, dual and p. 99513, gen. p. 1242: + Some words of this form take dagesh: as, bys a camel, {2 the rabbit, jerboa, jOP little: thus 213, 213, Dy, 7523, ovr, wo. They belong, of course, to the 8th class. 29n milk, has its genitive singular 29m ; 129 white, 22: a 70) THE ETYMOLOGY OF as, "¥9 a court, 132 the liver, V8? short, IM a plug, nail, &e.; (NYB)*: as, NOY unclean, N2D full, &e. Obs. — 3% the thigh, AND the shoulder, 14 a hedge, b13 plunder, robbery, from their gen. s. thus—D32, FT}, 213 or 213, Va or 113 Wil 74, The sixth Class comprehends all dissyllables which have their accent on the penultimate: as, JV] a way or road, WWW a gate, IBD a book, YA a month, Y? night, YS iniquity, vanity. Words of this class have their genitive and absolute state singular alike ; except those of the form DYED (as'Ni death), which drop (=), and change (r+) into (__) in their genitive singular, and retain (~) in their inflections: thus, M2, ‘ni, ini, &e. And those of the form bp, (as bose aram,) which drop the(.), and change (-) into (+) in the genitive singular; retaining (.. ) in their inflections; thus, DN, Dy 12%, &c. From Dy wrong, injustice, we find, however, gen. Sy instead of DW : py instead of Diy, Js new ; but p. niriv- Words of the following forms belong to this class: Oya, DD) as, JD a king, Waa boy, 33a a garment, “ED a book, pon a portion. * These, however, retain (..) in their genitive singular and plural. Thus, 82D, gen. s. N20, gen. p. NOY- Likewise, 22¥ the heel, gen. s. APY, (but gen. p. ‘ARY), WW a sleeper, gen. p. 120%, Naw, gen. p. “TN, &e. 7 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 7a: The vowels are subject to the following changes :— (+) ultimate is changed into (:) before the affixes of the singular, in the genitive plural, and before the heavy affixes: as, 1, "30ND, "BPD, DIZ, 03999, &e. ; WA, 12 ve. But in the absolute state plural, and before the light affixes, it is changed into (+): as, DD? kings, 122% my kings, 0°32 garments, *143- (+) penultimate is changed mostly into (-), but sometimes into (.) before the affixes of the singular, in the genitive plural, and its heavy affixes. Thus, of 20, and 3 of 142, are changed into 9 and 3; as, ‘398, "173,* 3, D022; but in the plural, and its light affixes, it is changed into (:); as, D309, &e. (..) penultimate is mostly changed into (.) or (+); as, 7B, “BD "aD ; pen, ‘pon: &c. In the plural it follows the same rule as penultimate (+); thus, DOMED, IED, &c. ODED, &e. Oybp—as, IN an ear, wan a month, wp holiness, 374 breadth, 7s length. The vowel point () is changed into short (+), and (+) follows the same rule as in the preceding forms. Thus, JH, Win, own, WIN. * Some words retain the (+); as, 132, "122, 1722, &.; 72M, 20 Others take either (.) or (-) in the genitive plural ; as, ")) a child, gen. p. bs or "1. 1 The word YB work (action), changes (2) into (7). It is thus inflected. — YB, gen. yb, ‘oye, OYB, &e., OD2NB, &e.; plural, Oya, ‘bya, yp, ondys: dns a tent, is declined in the same manner. bay, TPON or nk, On, &C. ; But plural DTN, PPT, YPN; gen. p. RN, DPMS, &e.; “8h a form, SF or TNA. From 7P a handful, we find ¥OR; bs greatness, 1: { Many words of this form have their plural like those of the preceding form; as, "pa, OMPa; ON, OMNI, &e.: 173, 739, N39 from their plural, 1393, nin43, nin3}. 12 THE ETYMOLOGY OF bys, O1D) —as, by wrong, wyustice, I) the middle, nip death ; TYI* an olive, va) night, |” wine }'Y an eye. The changes of the vowel-points of these forms have already been explained. (PYD)—as, ™ fruit, "A a kid, “mS a lion, ¢ md cheek, jaw-bone, 2 a vessel. (:) is changed into (.) or (.); and (. ) into (:), in the singular: Bo. ee te oles XC, 8 "D3, WD" In the plural most of them retain (:), and change (.) into (+); thus, "73, § [8 or NN, gen. pl. 214, &e.—193 changes (:) into (..), and retains (- ‘; thus, DPD gen. pl. 3, 23, PPB, YB, &c.; OPP, &e. CYB)—as, on | s¢ckness, "DY uffiction, "YS or *T¥ balm, § a ¥ r, ye “Wi burning, anger. * Gen. s. TN—'NN &c. p. ONT, NY, POI &e. WY gen. PY— 2Y, WY, &c. p. (dual) EY gen. IY— VY, PY, &c. But MY, signifies springs, fountains, and its genitive is MNP: Thus likewise, [32 a spring, well, p. DIV or MPV, gen. p. 'YYV2 and niyy2- Several other words of this form have their plural in this manner: as, % a host, DYN; W a young ass, ONY — nig a house, forms its plural 0°93, and retains the long (+) and dagesh through the plural inflections: thus, gen, *N2-— ‘A32, PHB, &c.; contrary to general analogy. + Most words of this form change (:) into(-) in pause: thus, "BB, 2 t The plural (dual) of me is Dyno, gen. yn: § A few words of this form change * into & in the plural: as, bn a ring, p. O82; ‘NB a simpleton, p. OYNB or OND; '3¥ a gazelle ; p. DY2¥ or DSIY ; f. WAY p, Nisy- || In pause On, 129, “WY: THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 73 VII. 75. The seventh Class comprehends all words having (..) mutable for their ultimate, and an immu- table vowel for their penultimate: as, YD a ruler, regent, \N a father in law, JIN a lover, IY a hater, enemy, SD2 a covered seat, a throne, VND a merchant, Pp» a staf, AIS an enemy. Likewise some of the monosyllables derived from the nm: as, DY a name. (+) is mostly changed into (:); as, ‘218, ONN, *24N, bon, mi2p, iunh, &c.; or into (-:) when the middle letter is a gut- tural: as, ‘208, 3208, &c.; COMMD, MID, &c. Before 4, 03; and {2 it is changed mostly into (+); as, 729M, TPP, m0Pn, sometimes into (-); as, F248, DIDIN ; WOW, 12’; and into (-) when the 2nd or 8rd radical is a guttural: as, 1208, O2308 Www, &e. In the genitive singular (--) is mostly retained, though in some instances it is changed into (-); as, 4319 an altar, gen. Nat bpp, gen. b5 or Sp: Words of the following form belong to this class:— yp, Gy iby—as, 3pi8 a visitor, ae) a priest, VY a raven, IWN an ambush ; WY a blind man, sby a stammerer, pox a dumb person. bypin, Syn as, VDio a nail, wn a mortar, T)\3V3 a key, “wy a tenth part, tithes ; {3DI9 a poor man. 74 THE ETYMOLOGY OF (yd Lyi) —as, MDD a wonder, WIS an appointed time, a festival, ple a snare; *DW a name, }2 a son, tYY a tree. Wan RL 76. The eighth Class comprehends all words which double their last letter by dagesh on being augmented: as, Ji a garden, 33 my garden; 3; the heart, °A? my heart; pr a law, statute, ‘PI my statute ; bn a camel, sos my camel, 13 thy camel, &c. The vowel which precedes dagesh becomes immutable, and is therefore, in most cases, retained through all the inflections. Words of the following forms (derived from roots which have the second and third radical the same) belong to this class. (753) —as, bp a basket, ID a pail, bucket, O° or DY the sea, DY or DY a people, I soft, tender, b5 a poor man. These retain (-) in the genitive singular and in the inflection §. * With Makkeph.—"DY, J3. The plural of this word (}2) is 33, gen. p. \23—23, 333, &c. 733, &e. + ¥¥ and a few others of this form retain (-) through their inflec- tions, except in the genitive plural and the heavy affixes: thus, "SY TW, &c.p, OY, SY, WEY, gen. p. ¥Y, HP, &c. t Many words of this form have (+ ) or (-) in their absolute state: as, OY or OY; generally (+) in pause; as, o5, bo D3, a heap, ba. but always (-) in the genitive and the inflections. § Except T¥ the side, 3 a small piece, morsel, \O the threshold, which take (-) in the inflections: thus, *T¥, 7B, THY, OMB, From THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 75 bya, w a tooth, by a shadow, Sy the heart, (Pp end, WM the palate, WN fire. These retain generally (-) in the genitive singular*, but change it into (.)in the inflection: as, 138, 13¥, p. OIW+, ow, ray. PW, PW, &Ke. (Db) —as, biy a yoke, pm a decree, bs all, the whole, AY might, power, strength, An a drum, DF innocence. Some of these retain — in the genitive: as, by gen. by . others change it into short (,) with Makkeph: as, “PM, 23: Before the inflections, (1) is mostly changed into (.); as, ™Y, vy, PY, though sometimes into short (,); as, “WY; especially before J and D3: as, PA, PN, APA, OAD; WW, MY, WY or WP pia, OBI) —as, NYD a place of strength, a fort, WV, INYD or RYD, DIV; [IO a shield, 9B, p. BIND, 20, (+) being foe immutable. Many contracted words derived from roots whose second letter is 3, as, 8 face, countenance, anger, (from "38 to breathe through the nose, to snort), and NA a daughter (from N32 feminine of |2 a son) belong to this class, and are inflected in a similar manner: thus, ‘BS, 8X, IBN; plural, (dual) DBS, g. p. ‘BN, YBN, PAS, &e. RS, FAB, &e. p. MID gen. p. MB, 53, ynia 13 a mountain, we have in the plural 5°, gen. p. 9, 0, &e. (x) being a compensation for dagesh. Thus likewise, 13, pure, se- lected, O° 3, VA, &c. * Except a few which take (+) with Makkeph: as, “a “e- + But OY, signifies two; and OY years, 2 my years, VY thy years. Several words of this form change (..) into (-): as, ]3 a stand, basis, 133; 32 a nest, with Makkeph “}P; but in other respects regular 3, &c. From U& fire, we have WX, OWS and DWN instead of DQWR: 76 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 732, &c. Many words of other forms receiving dagesh on being augmented, belong likewise to this class: as, 724 a camel, YO time, NY the day of rest, the sabbath, "2% a poor (humble) man, fc. Most of these have already been noticed in the preceding notes. 1B.e: 77. The ninth Class comprehends all words ter- minating in M>; as, MWY a field, MY1* a shepherd, MD beautiful, handsome, MIMN3 a camp, 7S a seer, AND appearance, colour, vision, MWYI work. 1. > is changed in “> in the genitive singular: as, my gen. TY; TY, TY: 2. Before the inflections it is dropped: as, °Y9, D'A, YT, Ww &o. 11, TY, TY, &e. p. nit’, gen. p. Mm’, niTY; or p. DIY (by analogy), gen. p. "IY, "WY, T1Y, IY, &c. 3. Before the affix of the third person masculine singular, 7 is mostly retained +: as, 177, Inbye, INNW2, &c.—Third person f. 8. OST2 or ANY, NHYD or ABYDY * Words comprehended in this class, are derived from roots whose third radical is 7; they form their feminine by changing (-) into (+): as, m7 a shepherdess; m. 7D}, f. MB}; ney one that ascends f. ny. Except 32 one who weeps, weeping, M28 one who watches, a watchman, and a few others which form their femi- nine M33, TES: + This is likewise the case with some nouns not terminating in 3: as, vB a concubine, IND, 1 a hand, 1 t Aben Ezra (in N\n¥) asserts, indeed, that this form (AWYP) is inadmissible: I have, however, followed Aimcht, who justifies its usage. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. aT Words of the following form belong to this class :— (AYIS, MYDS, MYD)—as, TUM the breast, p. HNN; 3p a reed, a@ sconce, p. D"3p or Hip; nby a leaf, p. piby risa arrogant, p. PNA; AYI* a friend, companion, p. DY; my p. DY; map a purchaser, p. B93). (MBS, MYBID)—as, api p. (by analogy ) D3 : mavis second in rank, double, p. pb vi9 ; Man, p. HN, dual DI. (MYID) —as, YO a staff, branch, tribe, p. BSI or NVA; M29 one that strikes, p. BD, &. 78. The following four Classes comprehend nouns feminine terminating in M~, N-, n-. Those that terminate in %— have this in common:— 1st.—That they change T— into N> in the genitive singular, and before D3, }2. 2nd —That they retain N and + in the rest of the inflections of the singular number. - 8rd.—That they form their plural by changing 7~= into NM}, which termination is retained through all the plural inflections. For the changes to which nouns terminating in N are subject, see remarks on Class XIII. X. 79. The tenth Class comprehends all nouns ter- minating in M—, preceded by an immutable vowel: as, MWNAA strength, NINA a prayer, supplication. * WY), nw, and 1P9 retain (-) in the genitive singular. 78 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Excepting the genitive singular, and before 03 and {3, as already noticed in the preceding observation, both vowels are retained. The plural is formed by 0), and the absolute state plural and its genitive are the same. Thus, “134, gen. MVNIIA— NIA; p. MIWA gen. NH33,—DINIY, &. Words of the following forms belong to this class: — (Fes, A>ips, ADYE)—as, ADI @ meals ATID service, labour ; Aba or AD greatness, joy. (ADAYD, ADIYD)—as, MHan a bruise, WWIA an early Sg: (Ad, 75%D, DD) —as, MM distress, anguish, ro}? standing corn ; NY old age, VV provision ; AIA under- standing. (FDS, rib, bb) —as, ape a bride; ‘Vi a measure ; ND a hut, tabernacle, npn a law. (DBD, ADBA)—as, ADDA a prayer, HOA praise; HOY a roll, volume. | ( myn, Mid )— as, M39 a smiting, wound, MDP a tempting, temptation ; MITA a law, instruction, MITIF an acknowledg- ment, thanks. OL 80. The cleventh Class comprehends nouns having the same termination as the preceding, viz. M—, but preceded by mutable (,) or (-): as, MY a year, AW sleep. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 79 N~ ultimate has already been explained ; and (+) or (-) penulti- mate are changed into (:), except in the plural absolute. Thus, 72%, gen. NI, NW, &e. Plural MW, gen, MIIW Nw, &c. Obs.—W ords having (+ +) for their vowels, preceded by (: ), change (:) into (-) or (-); as, 7373 a blessing, gen. NII, *HI, N73, &., p. MII, gen. MIDIB, NI7IB- See the examples under the form neve: Words of the following forms belong to this class: — (TYE, NYB—as, maw a year, ID’ fair, beautiful, MIiD* a portion, mpY + lip; WS a corner, MND t a hundred. g—nbyia, by) —as, IY advice, counsel, rw sleep, ror] anger ; nwa an inheritance, WSYIS a device. (gop, MOYR—as, AID a free gift, gen. DIT; APTS righteousness, gen. DPT; MYA a rebuke, gen. Wa; MP a dish, gen. NWP il; ny terror, gen. AT; a3 a carcase, gen. Aba} # m'N1I9 (Est. ii. 9.) is a deviation from the rule. + p. MINDY or (dual) ONY, gen. p. TINY or “Nay; MN an oath, retains the first (+); thus, gen. nds, nox, &e. tp. MIND, dual O°NN9, instead of DIMN- § Most words of this form retain (..) in the genitive: as, 773%, gen. NIAS NIA ; 772 cattle, has its genitive NYA AH72; NV2Y. a crown, gen. TVIOY.; NBS, gen. MI¥2- (See observation, on Class XIII.) lp. MVP, gen. NYP. wn yp (Exod. xxv.) is a deviation from the general rule. Several words of these forms retain (:) in the genitive: as, “TY a cave, gen. TU; myn an aqueduct gen. NoYn- 80 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Die ih 81. The twelfth Class comprehends nib nouns chiefly derived from words of the forms byp byp and by as, for instance, Don a queen, from sbb a king; WWla young woman, a girl, from Wi) a ve MWY aid, assistance, from WY an aid, help ; TWD a hiding-place, shelter, from “KMD a secret place, shelter, protection; FAI a waste, ruin from IW dryness desolation. N— has already been explained. The short vowels (-) (.) (.) and (,,) with the following (:) are retained, except before the abso- lute state plural, where the short vowels are changed into (:), and the (:) of the second letter into (,).—Thus n3>0, p. nind0, m2, p. nw; 7297, p. mi3IN; TBI, p. mis; new, p. niony, | Words of the following forms belong to this Class :— () bye, nae, DyB) —as, mDby a young woman, nipoy (ni by) es sbrsiy a robe, garment ; Finny Joy, NAS Love, niv32 or nya a ewe-lamb, at a girl, nimdy a bondmaid ; Abn a reproach ; WWI a ruin, deso- lation, N22 wisdom » TVW cunningness. XIII. 82. The thirteenth Class comprehends feminine nouns terminating in ND, N, N—, Ne, or Nn, as, N33 a mistress, NIND* a coat, AYA a ring. * This word has several other forms. (See Kimchi in Own). THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. Q] The Genitive and Absolute state singular are the same: as, N23 g. }34-—On being augmented by the pronominal affixes nN re- ceives dagesh, the last vowel is changed into (:) and the penultimate (.) is either retained, as MQM cattle, ‘MDZ, WPI, or it is changed into (-) or (.) as NIQW keeping, trust, Iw ; nji— 733- Penultimate _is mostly changed into short (+); as, NIOP encense, EOP -* Obs.—Most Nouns belonging to this class have two forms for their absolute state: as, M24 and AY33—N)A2 and AYAA— mane and 7M war, —N3Y2 and 7AXY a pillar, NYSIA and nydin a worm (in the same manner as the participles N]P}2 and M1PB-) Now, the. singular is regulated by the first form (termina- ting in N-) as already described ; but the plural is regulated by the termination "~, and hence the plural of M23 is M933 N13), &e., without dagesh (from 123. Thus likewise from gn — mone; but p. ion —ininndy (from MON). From HAS NAY, but p. MAXI MA: Words of the following forms belong to this Class: — (nigye, Appin, Nope, Myp) —as, MIA, MIpyH: p”bsn blue, or sky-coloured ; ANN a crown, chapiter ; nydin a worm, Abi ability, Avni} copper. (ADyS, bys AYA, nbyd)—as, TIS a mantle, sy e eR Etro nny we have AYN, nvr. From n pwn hire, we have ‘A202: + p. MWY (from MY) g. niwy. REDS § p. DAY, g, “23¥ | 82 THE ETYMOLOGY OF “(nbyps, nbypn or ASpED)—as, AND or AND war, navi + a family, sowing rule, dominion rppwa- (abyas, AOYSA or FOYEA)—as, FINDA or ATNBA glory, splendour ; IVIFVDS a sack. crbyin, nbyia, AY) —as, FW staying, sitting, AW my sitting, nbmin hope, atin birth-place, natwe-place. To the above class belong we or nws g: NYS: AW, FAWN, (for NZS), is thus inflected ‘MON, TAN, IN, &e. Exercise. In translating the following exercises, the student must insert the words Is, ARE, &c., where he finds the asterisks* : as Son navn «2d sir Dy ay verbs All the days of the afflicted man ar‘ evil, and (but) a cheerful heart 1s a continual feast. Ses AR weeds) spas ope 9a | yey °7w> STA ‘DUM TM :onya Cw TY CANT 1 Hear j2{ Instruction. *?Do not forsake. 4Fear. 5 Be- ginning, or chief. © Knowledge. 7 Death. ® Hand, power. 9 Tongue. + Or nnawr, p. ninawn- J. D- nina: t For the signification of the untranslated words, see the Index of Words at the end of the work. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 83 t7 mp ‘ 16 py #15 po 14 nanny 13 Wy 12 AMP 411 wy 10 Ww vn AND 1 a5 wy 21 927} rh ws 19 Nay “sang saiva-os spay yi aya set Ay Sp Psa D> thw : 79S ova MNOS FN na x Bap 33 ANY ‘ 32 pop 31 95 30 paws “yong * an “AINSA Ay :PBNVAN * BD “ASHN) B32 92 “PAVIA “DY Pa, NOR "API PA yy pba “Sng may Sapp “assy some eran poe “Ay toy ont spay “opyD po ont “py Sma amg enyia roy eyps “ony @Sipi :7§9gp> “pray “Dy 10 Wealth, 11 The rich man.* 1% City. 13 Strength. 14 Dread, destruction. 145 A poor man. 16 Poverty. 17 Likewise, even. 18 Neighbour, friend. 19 Is-hated. °° A poor man. 21 A lover, friend. * Many. 7% Hate-him.t * Is-separated. *% Do-not forsake. 26 Do-not-come. * Calamity. %8§ A whip. 29 A bridle. meemrouns: body, back: >2 Ay fool. «33 Ai crown, °* Glory. %> Pa- rents. 36 Oldage, *7 Righteousness. %8 She-(it) will-be-found. 539 Sacrifice. 40 ¥¢1a wicked man. ‘4! Abomination. 4 Prayer. 43 WW" a straight, upright man. 44 }13) will, delight, favor. * He- that-offers. 46 2° wealth, substance, goods. 47 Is like one that slays. 4% Before-the-eyes-of, in-the-presence-of. 49 Cry, supplica- tion. °° Sound. 1 Song, prayer. 5% Cleaves, penetrates. 53 He- that-builds. 54 A stranger. > Gathers. °6 A stone. 57 A grave. * The words in /talics are not expressed in Hebrew. + The words connected by Hyphens are expressed by one Hebrew word. 84 THE ETYMOLOGY OF A virtuous woman [woman'-of virtue’] 2s a crown’ to [of]-her husband,‘ but-[and]-as-rottenness’ in his bones,° 7s one-that-causes-shame.’ House® and-wealth’ are the inheritance’’-of fathers”, but-[and] from-the-lord 7s a prudent’ woman [woman prudent]. The way'-of a-fool’ is right’ in-his-own-eyes ;"° yi o Ms ? but-[and] the-wise-man-" hearkens® unto counsel.” The light”-of the eyes rejoices” the heart ;” and-a- good-report” [and-report good] fattens™ the bone. In-the-light”-of the king’s countenance [ face-of-the* king’ | is life ;* and-his-favour” zs as-a-cloud®-of the latter-rain.*" The wrath”-of a king 7s as messengers*’-of death : but [and] a wise man [a man wise™] will-pacify-it® [her]. The grave” and-destruction™ are before®* the Lord, how-much-more”-then the hearts-of the children*’-of men? [man*']. LN 2017 SMWY. 40y2 53p7 SOYY p. Minyy TmvAQO—sNIa ofin 10 mon 11 12 mba — 13 7771 14 Ow 15 ws 16 PY 173M) isyrnyy 19 NYY —20 ANID 21 MEW 22.9 23 PaiD mys 2+ yw — 257 26 NB er gf 28 DMN 29;4389 sony) s1 WApP—92 MAT} 98 NP p, DDN 34 D211 VAN 35 MIBIY — 36 ONY 37 TAN 38732 3993 AN 4072 py. OYA 41 DTN THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 85 CHAPTER IV. ADJECTIVES. 83. Adjectives are attributes expressive of the properties of nouns, conjointly with which they form either the subject, or some other part of a proposition : as— 7a 3 77 AV A soft answer turneth away wrath. + DxY wan AND AywYw A good report maketh the bone fat. : pri 315) O71) "NS As a roaring lion, and a greedy bear, so is : S5 py by yon bun A wicked ruler over a poor people. 84. As qualifying words, adjectives are placed after their respective nouns: thus, 210 YS a man good, i.e. a good man; but not WS 3e- 85. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender and number :* thus— * Adjectives, considered as mere attributes, cannot, strictly speaking, admit of either gender or number; but being in their origin, nouns or participles, in which sense they are still frequently used, the distinction of gender and number became necessary ; and it was retained, even where they were used merely as qualifying words, G 2 86 THE ETYMOLOGY OF NO WN a good man AW AWS a good woman BY DWI good men FINO BWI good women. 86. Further, when the noun is in a definite state, that is, where the noun has the definite 7, or any of the pronominal affixes,* the adjective receives the definite 7 ; otherwise, the attribute ceases to be the qualifying word, and becomes the predicate of the noun which it accompanies. Laamples. BA WNT AIBA ANA Bab WINN ANIA Swan JOP %32 Mab jh3 DPA 93 AAW BI"NhI2 3D YONA Nai WNT D1) DYINA Ain’ pw the good man the good woman the good men the good women my little son thy little daughter his little sons your little daughters the man 1s good the woman 1s good the men are good the women are good * Or with proper names, which are in their nature definite: thus PAST PVIW the just Simeon or Simeon the just; whereas } vv PTY signifies Simeon is just. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 87 JOP 22 my son is little BP aip Fa thy daughter is little B°3OP P32 his sons are litile NP BMI. your daughters are little. Comparison of Adjectives. 87. The degrees of comparison are expressed by prefixing to the noun, with which any thing is com- pared, the letters 3 as, from, (than), andl in, amongst; the adjective not being subject to any change, except to indicate the gender and number of the noun compared. » indicates equality: as oe ba great As the sea. or | indicates superiority : as — Dy ba great from the sea, 1. e. greater than the sea. 4 the superlative : as— bwINa bana the great amongst men, i. e. the greatest of men. Additional Examples. INY-D3 NaPwaN FANT 9 Who (is) this that-looketh-forth ) as-the-dawn, Mama m2 a3 rid’ fair as-the-moon, pure as-the- SUN. pens 47M 3%) Better (is) thy mercy than life. AND DIN bab} cal NS I am not better than my ances- tors. 88 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Dy 0379 5 aia va p»>p Our pursuers were swifter than the eagles of heaven. nvina 655 ipo MIM Behold my thousand (i.e. my family (is | the poorestamong Manasseh ; 93N MAD YYRA YDIND and L Lam] the least in my fa- ther’s house. There are several other methods of indicating the superlative, for which the student is referred to the Syntax. Haercise. jeg has qzpo Sean yea a AER Jodinaa osden ovdita * ocben oiqa prob 25ing sora soya Apmay Aba ya ‘rpm Apa oy nibs ‘oxya nidean psy nasa pay Api omaybs Ab Sms Ib WI ping ‘wats ‘ping "ina Dea jopT .o'sbea Sea tgpia “phn : DIpINa “DIN MIDS 1 A king. 2Great. * Insert the copula is or RE according as the noun is singular or plural. 3 WY acity, p. OW 4 PIN strong 5 Sweet. © Honey. 7 Bitter. ® Death. 9 Wormwood. 1° Smooth. POU 2! Strong, mighty. 1° Wise: ‘my sApInh vory> sam) IN *Ding Pama rs DMR PD ee 1 Light. Good. 3] eye. 473% sleep. > A labourer. 6 A rose. 7 Amongst. 8Min a thorn. 9 So, 10 YY a shepherdess. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 89 “yy 12 Deyo “wisi “ow> ¢!vpAS enn smavds AY ANN "AN “BID ia segmbind “Tt ANID abun “avi "AION "ND “my an PPS ayia) gs wats pints V4 ° INS bY, 203 «3b :* AI "ARON Ain :anwD “AD NT pws Ohya °mowA : mp oye : na “MINIT Dwa NA 11 2a daughter. p. M33: 12 Vinegar. 13] a tooth. 14 Smoke, 19 Sluggard. 16 To those that send him. 1790 the palate, gums. 8 End. 19 Strong, bold. 2° Love. *1 Hard. * The grave. 23 Jealousy. “4 What. * A lion. % Beginning. % Wisdom. % Strength. 9 A dog. °9Man. 31 A giant. 32Was. 33 Fair, beautiful. 34 Comely, agreeable. NUMERALS. 88. Numerals are generally divided into— Ist.—Cardinals; as, * 7X m., MAN f., one, F wow. wow f. three. 2nd.—Ordinals: as, PWR m. ABW f. first IY, im. VW second ; iad drd.—Fractional: as, ‘$M half, mianoys a third part. * Jn Ezek. xviil. and xxxiii. we find the words ON and 73 used for TX + It is very remarkable that (1~) which is generally the charac- teristic of the feminine, becomes the sign of the masculine in the numerals from three to ten ; the feminine being indicated by drop- ping the %> The only rational explanation that can be given of this peculiarity, is, that numerals, being in their nature abstract terms) 90 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Cardinal Numbers. 89. Cardinal numbers, from one to twenty, admit of gender : as, INN YN one man; NTS MWS one wo- man; OID WY INS eleven sons, NID WWY NMS eleven daughters ; but above twenty they are common to both genders. Further, from one to six inclusive, they assume fre- quently a constructive form ™* (which does not, how- ever, alter their signification): as, INN one, WY INN eleven; DIY two, OY DIY or DY IY two witnesses; vow three, mwy voy thirteen, TS wow three hundred. have, like most other abstract nouns, originally received the same termination: as, for instance, 939 wisdom, M34 strength, N23 understanding. And however strange it may appear, that the abstract should have preceded the concrete, yet, that this was actually the process in the formation of language, may be proved by more arguments than one. Be this as it may, certain it is that the gender of numerals is an unnecessary incumbrance on language. That it may be dispensed with, without occasioning the least am- biguity, is evident from its extending only to numerals under twenty. Still more evident is it from the English language, which, in this respect, is the most rational of any language with which I am acquainted, * This form appears similar to the genitive form of nouns ; it does not, however, express the same relation. Except the words 708 and Nnn&, which are sometimes used in the genitive; as, O79 TN8 one-of the mountains; WY NOS one-of thy cities. But even these cease to be genitives when followed by 9 ; as, 733!) TON one of his sons; VIYQNOX one of thine eyes, of being expressed by ®, which literally means from, and not by the form of the numeral. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 91 ©Q. Cardinal numbers from one to ten. Fem. | Mas. ip Ha ET rg eres Seen Const. Absolute. Const. Absolute. One TIN nS | abs Yuasa: Twof mt Ding ecavimeyyey2)/ Dry Dy | Thre wow wy | ynodow mwdy 3 3 Four ar YIN | HYD Wa 4 4 Five wien vinn nye omven 6 7 Six wy wy mnyy mew 6 Seven yay yay nyaw yaw 7 Picntwe mee! OY i) | Me AY: 8 op Nine YOR yWR ony omyn 9 b Tn — “Wy | mey mby io ° * The letters are used as numerals in the printed Hebrew Bibles, to mark the chapters and verses: and by the Masoretical and Rabbinical writers for various other purposes; but they are never used in the sacred text. ‘The following are a few specimens of this species of notation. Number of verses contained— In Genesis ah a8 = 1000 + 500 + 30 4+ 4 = 1534 Exodus mix = 1000 + 200 + 9 a ANY Leviticus AO = 50 + 9 + 800 — the. Numbers mpnx = 1000 + 200 + 80 + 8 = 1288 Deuteronomy yn = 5 + 50 + 900 moe LS + TON and MWY admit of the plural: as, OAS units, MWY tens, decades. t Many Grammarians consider the numerals having the termina- tion (NM) as nouns denoting a collection of units: as, for instance, A) nwow a triad of days, or a period of time consisting of three 92 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Ten to twenty. Mas. Fem. Eleven * YY SON TIWY noK Twelve — sy ow Mwy OMY Thirteen ——-/ - WW). sw mey wioyi Fourteen —— WY AYDIN MWY DIN Fifteen —— Wwynwen mey ven Sixteen Be SE ey ne ayy wy Seventeen —— ‘Wy nyay mey yay Eighten —— “Wy miby mey nny Nineteen —— “WY TYR MWY yon Twenty and upwards. Aen varus (akan c, tire et siege ee py Ly OT OTC . predin nA a fedees s heave) stake Dy) TN wenty- tio dah cern «vets Sots Dey) De Hoventy-three ct) ce Gracie See Dy) mew WREVER i ears & Keeani nies hap bas, oh : Dy! ROT VamR an aete ciel s 2 Latte arate te Stree O'YIIS tay 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 days, DWIN NWY a decade of men. This distinction appears to me merely imaginary, as I really can discover no difference of meaning between FON wy nipy and mM Wy mow (Judges xx. 25—44). Or between DY my Ma3pI21 and DpY Mrby, p24 (Lev. xxvil. 5—7.) * Or Wy AY, NIwY AYy- THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. HPL aR OH coi. Piedd ek wi ROOM RU ao eee Own “SSL ce LE RZ ne ER pw Be OTLUVOROIES vic fic y= 5c Tiga PTS ty ore n wes Dyay Lolli ey es eae eres C6 Lhe Nein) a ameter Dy BRC Vir prea In sis/eversiwuchtMas We tek a eaten Dyn La Wa C4 TEA Ee, RA A ate FN cons. MIND Mewar linndredy of.) face MIND 92Y or DIAND free Hundred.......-% 5S d eapeeerrad MNT. vbw) Prrercs LEUNredtye ci take seon eee eee Mind YDIN Hee Litingdred any as cc te ee MIN’ Wen SIE ndredietons, Fire eee ae MINd wey SCVeDerUndred as. fava, were aie. aie mind yaw Pero em UE OUtereenrceer Stn ce mree ie Mind mIbY RresHUndred ewes ete NINd yon BMTOURAIICH sp fegdees 2st ee ala. _. FON wor Vhousand ».: 0% e.. o DEDDNL nibs Be Eece WNOUSANC Pa est stars cs oe yi ce. piaby neo eermelnousand .n).0. 22... nabs NWWy NID Mawel vas WhOlisalidierin ae as, WN2, WWN3: (See Syntax.) H L100 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 100. Before verbs, and especially before parti- ciples, the definite 7 is frequently used instead of the relative: as, IABM which compasses (Gen. ii. 10), oan which goeth (Gen. i. 14), 77 who went (Gen. xiii. 5), Lit. the compasser, the goer. Interrogative Pronouns. 101. The interrogative pronouns are %) who? MD mia* MD what? how? as, TAN YO who art thou? myn BINT 9 who is this man? A AS % who art thou, my daughter ? “WN 7D what shall I say ? ny md what is his name? WMD how good! SVT how awful ! Obs.—'D is applied to persons, 72 to things: N17 %D signifies who is he2 SD who is she? But S71 AD (what he), SND (what she), signify what is 1r? The same aS 2 who are these (persons) ? but nPN M12 what are these (things). is thus declined :— who, mb to whom or whose, *2N8 whom, 1D from whom, "23 with or through whom. The manner in which the adjective pronouns, each, every, any, one, none, all, such, &c., are expressed, will be explained in the Syntax. en * 1) generally before words beginning with NM or Y (excepting in seven places, according to the Masorah, where it is sometimes 7 or m2); M2 before those which begin with 8,4, or 1, except before S177 and 8}, where it is always 2: THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 101 Heercise. 2999 TAN <9 377759 + Ia DIN s DIY * DIN AY soos Seana na se OTN POM. RN «oD PN MID ON “DAIIN WW “BSN ADI «IN "TIS NTT TNT nA ON A: TAS ony apy aT "Wpay DY MTN PNT ony apy s+ omy ova orbs “Spgs °piyh * on "5979 san TON wy oa. "aba soy TNS phy BPN WD UIMIN DNS "4 TAy, Ty ow + “MDS maby > onbs abn Tay) may 9 2 YI ANA ION sy o2tpa “ws mA an by wns arden J =pyp sin “sndwinrdy fia: 2 First-born. °N3- 4a brother. ° Ye have sold. 6 DMD Egypt. Say. §& NINN a sister. 9 He said. 1 She said. il Seeking. 1? Tell. !3Pasturing. 14 Andhesaid. 1 D379 a spy. 16 And they said. 17 No. 38 }18a lord. 19 by all. 2042 honest, upright. 2! 33¥- 22 Before thee. *?Castye. °4 Ye shall not send, le. lay. pap “amas “pypIM] *mbNd wns ‘oN Ab aya Sy ¢Na vaie "han: SDNIw “HaaIpa DANY “IND povby osynbes “pDIMaN ”° nbs md nnn by" i Have ye deceived. 2 Saying. * PIM distant. 4 Very. ° 22 midst. § IY’ one that sits, dwells. 7 Behold. ® Come. 9 And I say. 10 The-God-of. 1! MAN fathers. 12 He-has-sent-me. H 2 102 THE ETYMOLOGY OF “nby Nt eng pms Maps ob “iw +n ed syns TORS "OM Yy WwW ma "mye son +395 aby PINT PTDATION “Ty “NS -bo3 "99 omy sorb ny sme mia cme oS man sen “Son 7 ADIND 9°39 = siomend) spo ma maa Sha gays 93h YM ON Bap “NIN) ONT. sons 7 ONS OPIS AAAS TS PS NTT INE 13 And-they-shall-say. 140% aname. }° Shall I say. 16 Did. 17 Deed. '8 Ye have done. 19 Know. 2° That. 2193 strength. 2? I-have-served. 23 3N- 24 We has deceived (deceit accompanied with derision). 2° T-will bring out. 2° He did not withhold. % Anything. 8 But. 29 We will consent. 3° Dwell. 3! JAN: Tam thy’-father, and-thou’ art my-daughter. f She 2s my-mother, and-these are her-children. This is my little son, and-this 7s my little daughter. He loved' her more-than-all’ his-children. ‘They are my father’s brothers, and she is my sister. Is this your little brother who called? me? Is this the little girl who said‘ that’ her father loved her more than all his daughters ? This zs not the cityy nor is this the house,” which I have built.6 Who art thou, my son ? and what is thy name? Who art thou, my-daughter? Lan 2-299 SN ATK 599 9B + The Hebrew of most of the phrases contained in this exercise will be found, with very slight alterations, in the first part of this work, pp. 87—89. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 108 and-what zs thy-name ? He 7 a@ wise man and a great king. She is fairer’ than-her-sister, and the most comely*® amongst daughters. His little brother will-be greater’-than-he. Whose art thou,” and whither goest'’-thou, and whose are these before''- thee? Whither is thy’ beloved” gone [went’], O thou fairest of women! whither did thy beloved turn" that-we-may-seek-him” with thee.” Thay BTN 9 bay 10 9m 1 22? 12 445 13 yon 1438 lo yLepayn 16 DY CHAPTER VI. VERBS. 102. Verbs are either Primitive or Derivative (art. 18, page 20.) Perfect or Imperfect,* (art. 13—- 16.) Primitive verbs are either transitive, intransitive, or neuter. Derivative verbs are either active, pas- sive, or reflective. Prinitive transitive verbs admit of seven principal forms, divisions, or branches}, denominated — 1, Spor yp; 2, Spay: a Syp: 4, Spe, 5, yan 6, Oyen 7 Sypnn. (Art. 18.) * All verbs not included in the first conjugation (Art. 13.) are called zmperfect. | + The want of a technical term to designate these variations collectively, is particularly felt in treating of this part of Hebrew 104 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Obs. 1.—Intransitive verbs do not, of course, admit of all the preceding forms ; nor, indeed, do all transitive verbs,—some being used in one form only, others in several, and few in all. 2.—The first of these forms, bp, is appropriated to primitive verbs, the rest to the derivatives. 3.—>p. OVD and Span, are called active forms, because they are mostly used in an active sense. DYE), byB, and SYA, are denominated passive forms, and SyBni, the reflective form.* 4,—'These several forms or branches may be considered as so many separate verbs, each of which admits of mood, tense, person, &c.; they are all derived from one and the same root, which mostly consists of three letters, denominated radicals.+ (Art. 18.) Character and Signification of the several Forms or Branches. 103. 2p or YB expresses simple action (tran- sitive or intransitive), being or a state of being ; as, Grammar. The name 03°33 budldings, used by the ancient Gram- marians, would sound rather awkwardly in English; still more ob- jectionable are the modern denominations, voices, conjugations, &c., as they are apt to mislead the student. For want of a more suitable term, we shall denominate them forms or branches. * Some verbs admit of several other forms, denominated Soya, baba, byeyD, SYana, &c., but as these occur very rarely, it was not thought necessary to enumerate them. + Letters added to the root for the purpose of modification are, by way of distinction, denominated serviles. (See Note p. 16.) Those that are added to some part of the verb by way of euphony or emphasis, are called Paragogic. They are 1,3, ', 9,3, and, ina few instances, &. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 105 “pb to vesit,* IPB he visited ; MM to be, UT he was ; son to be sick, son he was sick, 104. Syb) expresses the passive of the preceding form. Its characteristic is the preji« (3): as, *{D23 to be desirous; IPB he was visited. ‘This letter is, however, dropped, and its omission indicated by dagesh in the first letter of the root, whenever it is preceded by another servile: as, TPB (for TPB3I7 to be visited ; AWS (for NAVIN) J shall be broken. Obs. 1.—When the first radical happens to be a guttural, the dagesh is compensated by placing a long vowel under the preceding servile: as, Sonn to be eaten. 2.— Neuter verbs cannot, strictly speaking, admit of a pas- sive; there are, nevertheless, many verbs of this description found in the passive form; but then they generally indicate a transition from one state into another: as from "V0 he existed, 19] he became, was brought into existence, it happened. From 77M to be sick, nena he became sick. 3.—Some verbs of this form have apparently a reflective signification: as, SA0N) and I hid myself (Gen. i. 18), TI" separate thyself (Gen. xii. 13), ISDST gather yourselves together (Gen. xlix. 1); * The primary signification of this verb (1P2) is to view anything with the mental eye, to bear it in mind, have a regard for it; and hence its secondary meaning :—to visit, inspect, examine, review, muster, number, to appoint a person as an inspector, to intrust a person with any thing ; in which senses we find this verb used in its several branches, in various parts of Scripture. For the sake of convenience, however, we shall vender it by ¢o vesit. LOG THE ETYMOLOGY OF but even these indicate rather an abstaining from action than reflex action, and may, in most cases, be rendered in the passive*: thus, NINN) and I remained hidden (I hid myself, would be 83008), as in Gen. iii. 8, S300" and he hid himself); VIB be separated, 1. e. do not follow me; WY take heed, beware, i.e. abstain from doing (Gen, xxxi 24); IBDND remain assembled. 4.—A few words of this form are apparently used in an active sense: as, Y2Y2 he swore, on) he fought, ISI he sighed; but they do not entirely lose their passive signification ; for, he that swears, is at the same time sworn, te. made to do so by some authority: and he that fights, is at the same time fought. M82 means literally he became eased, the physical effect of sighing. 105. byp has generally a transitive significationf, and indicates mostly intense action and energy; but sometimes it has a frequentative or a causative mean- ing. Its characteristic is dagesh in the second letter of the root; as — * Ewald, in his “ Kritische Grammatik der Hebraische Sprache,” Art. 103, maintains that the primary signification of this form is reflective. But in adopting this opinion, the learned author appears to me to have made the exceptions the rule, and the rule the excep- tion: as, for every single instance where this form denotes reflex action, there are hundreds where it cannot be rendered otherwise than in a passive sense. ‘Thus—Gen ii. 4, 133; ii. 23, STP; iii. 4, NPD; 7, TINPAM; iv. 18, WM; v. 2, ONIN; vi, 21, BN; vii. 11, §YP33, 37RB2; 22, IN; viii. 2, MID, NED, 5, WD; ix, ibid. 1732, TON); x. 9, WN, &e. + In a few instances it is used intransitively, without losing its signification of intensity; as, W2 he hastened; M28 it sprouted, grew ; M28 it grew rapidly, abundantly. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 107 Kal. eel say to break. AW to break in pieces, to shatter. “38 to be lost, to perish. “IAN to destroy, to ruin. TI to pursue. FT] fo pursue continually, to pro- secute., an to write. Ii2 to write often, repeatedly.* PIM he was strong. PIM he made strong, he strength- ) ened, fortified. sib to learn. a he made another learn, i. e. he taught. Thus likewise N2Y he forgot, NBY he caused to Jorget, brought into oblivion; VWIO he was clean, pure, WO he made clean, purified ; SPY1 he was unclean, S120 he made unclean, defiled. 106. Syp is the passive of the preceding : its characteristic is dagesh in the second radical, and (+) under the first: as, 120 he was shattered ; a135 he was taught. * Hence it often denotes habitual action; thus, 3953 one that writes ; but 231) one that is accustomed to write, i.e. a writer by profession ; O¥)7 one that kills; but OX one that has committed the action repeatedly, an assassin. + These two verbs, and a few others are, in some instances, used in a particular sense: as }7290 WMO And the priest shall make him clean, i.e. he shall pronounce him clean (Levit. xiii. 28); INN NO and he shall make him unclean, i.e. he shall pronounce him unclean (Levit. xiii. 8). The same is the case with some verbs in Hiphil: as, PTS NS APIS And they shall justify the righteous (Deut. xxv. 1), i.e. declare him just. In a few instances, we find verbs of this form (Piel) have an opposite signification to what they have in ?P; as, Opd to stone, ¢PD to remove stones. 108 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Ovs.—When the second radical happens to be one of the letters 5, ¥, M, 4, &, the dagesh is compensated by lengthening the preceding vowel: as, 82 (for 283) to explain; S32 (for W3) he explained ; 312 (for 322) he blessed ; WA (for 12) he was blessed * 107. Gyn has mostly a causative signification ; its characteristic is the prefix ™, the second radical having (..) or (7) as, "pi or PBI to cause another fo visit ; PINT he caused another to eat, i. e. he fed, or provided him with food; VYATI he caused another to burn. 108. Syn is the passive of the preceding: its characteristic is the prefix J with short (+) or (.): as, IPE he was cuused to visit ; 23BW7 he was caused to he down. * This compensation does not, however, always take place: as, YS) he vewed, WI he led, WD he purified, UND he denied, WA he kindled. + There is, in some instances, a distinction between the use of the verb in Piel and Hiphil: as, Kat, W3 to burn, to be on fire; Piel, WA to make burn, to kindle, to set on fire, VY32I1 to cause to burn, i.e. to cause something to burn another object (See Gen. i. 2, 38.— xxxv. 3; Jud. xv.). In many instances, however, the two forms have the same sense. Many verbs have a different signification in the different forms: ae, nne to open, OB to open with force; lence to engrave: F3" (Kal) signifies. and he kneeled, from FA the knee; FIA" (Hip.) he caused to kneel (See Gen. xxiv. ‘And he made the camels to kneel’): but 712%) (Piel) signifies he blessed, THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 109 109. Syann has mnostly a reflective signification :* its characteristic is the prefix Mr added to the form Piel: as, TP8M to visit or to inspect one’s self; bponn he threw himself (from bb) to fall); mbinn he un- covered himself. It often signifies mere pretension, or a feigning to be what, in fact, one is not: as, sononn to pretend to be sick; WYNN he pretended to be rich, acted the rich man, or boasted to be such. Obs.—The derivative verbs are nevertheless frequently used in other senses. (See the notes.) Moods and Tenses. 110. The primitive as well as the derivative verbs admit of three moods, namely, the /nfinitive, the Lmperativet, and the /ndicative. * Some verbs of this form (Hiph.) have a neuter signification, others denote intensity: as, 13929) they shall become white; VTS? they shall become red; povin he threw down, cast away, Dvn he rose early, t.e. with eagerness, or before the usual time. Several verbs of this form denote continwance or repetition, others have nearly the same signification as in OD: as, Spann he prayed earnestly, devoutly ; yponn he walked continually, or he walked by his own effort, unassisted ; DaNnn he mourned greatly; }aSDT he was angry. + Except the derivative words, Pual, Hophal, and Hithpael, which being passive verbs, admit not the imperative. Niphal, though likewise passive, admits this mood, but then it has either a reflective or it must be taken in the sense of abstaining from action. meaning, (See Obs. 3, p. 105.) 110 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Each of the three active forms adinits of two par- ticiples*; one active the other passive (varied by gender and number): the rest of the forms have one participle only. 111. The form of the infinitives of primitive verbs is mostly TpP®, called the absolute, or TPB, denomi- nated the constructive form. 112. From this infinitive the infinitives of the derivative verbs are formed, as has already been explained in the preceding pages. (See Table X.) 113. Infinitives are, in their nature, abstract nounsf, and as such, they admit of the prefixes, 3, 4, PE =) as, 4p2 or 1p. to visit, pba in visiting, “pb3 as visiting, “pe to visit, or for the purpose of visiting, apa from visiting, WBI2 im being visited, IPEND as being visited, &c. The infinitives of the rest of the derivative verbs are inflected in the same manner. (See Table X.) 114. ‘The imperative mood admits only the se- cond person masculine and feminine, singular and plural. * Except neuter verbs. (See Obs. 4, p.117.) + For the same reason they admit the pronominal affives. (See Table LiL.) a A oe re a, SE t ‘ . “—- . 7 € « RIOR ; sali a eee 7" ~My a us x YW ail .) 110 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Each of the three active forms admits of two par- ticiples*; one active the other passive (varied by gender and number): the rest of the forms have one participle only. 111. The form of the infinitives of primitive verbs is mostly 7p2, called the absolute, or TPB, denomi- nated the constructive form. 112. From this infinitive the imfinitives of the derivative verbs are formed, as has already been explained in the preceding pages. (See Table X.) 113. Infinitives are, in their nature, abstract nounsf, and as such, they admit of the prefixes, 3, 4, PE 2. AS, “pe or pe to visit, “pb3 in visiting, 1pb3 as visiting, “ppb to visit, or for the purpose of visiting, TPAD from visiting, TENA in being visited, TREND as being visited, &c. ‘The infinitives of the rest of the derivative verbs are inflected in the same manner. (See Table X.) 114. The imperative mood adinits only the se- cond person masculine and feminine, singular and plurai. * Except neuter verbs. (See Obs. 4, p. 117.) + For the same reason they admit the pronominal afives. (See Table LL.) ‘ . >, j liye ‘ ee eid 4 " a 3 i | | enn 20 150 gic? ¢2.0 25 Mivwad Ties! - ree wai wala ee foes > ‘¥ je A Wise v4 4? Pe Varo’ ay mg j (ee sen a Fe bie) 328 a: ned é ver) Ay re ey! ) { ; wot ee re frope bow er \ ate pea mE omas oh omnes al Sait wh - ee _ Paeh Sren Lh Ae ve ed hee yi ee : : 1 b ; 110 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Each of the three active forms admits of two par- ticiples*; one active the other passive (varied by gender and number): the rest of the forms have one participle only. 111. The form of the infinitives of primitive verbs is mostly IPB, called the absolute, or TPB, denomi- nated the constructive form. 112. From this infinitive the infinitives of the derivative verbs are formed, as has already been explained in the preceding pages. (See Table X.) 113. Infinitives are, in their nature, abstract nouns}, and as such, they admit of the prefixes, 3, 4, 19, = as, “p2 or ps to visit, pba in visiting, “pb3 as visiting, pe: to visit, or for the purpose of visiting, ape from visiting, IPENA in being visited, TEND as being visited, &c. The infinitives of the rest of the derivative verbs are inflected in the same manner. (See Table X.) 114. The imperative mood admits only the se- cond person masculine and feminine, singular and plural. * Except neuter verbs. (See Obs. 4, p.117.) + For the same reason they admit the pronominal affixes. (See Table LL.) “pani to visit oneself, to review oneself, spans “pang “pani? “paMT) Teen to he caused to Visit. spana span spEN9 spa _ Hiphil | Pual. | Piel. | Niphil. Kal, Tee to cause to visit, to intrust, ae “PBA TEN ape? INFINITIVE MOOD. —eeeeeeeeeSSsSssaeFs “pd \ to be visited, &eo, PR? TPR? wpe? 3pRe app to visit frequently, nee “pBa "pe? ary) spa “pan to be visited, pen “pen “pen? Ei sp or HDB to visit, to notice, "pea 3pP? "pe? spans | pn | pe “pe | PRP | TBS “pe Typene | ARI] ype] ANpR] pee | Ip] pie Aypania Ape AIP. | Apes TIPPS APHP Gepen | BMPR) Beypee | pR| BME | Dp | epi PMpaNS | NPE | Aipps | Aisa | nispas| ipa) ninpip | | pa | D from | eee Ee ee ee ee ee PARTICIPLE ACTIVE. AIpaAT mmpan pana TIPS ABS pEN pATpEAT iaIpEAN span SAIS | PET mapa mTpay "pea nape wTpaT DETpET iapEy pea ee ARR ees oe | nanpEe AS. PARTICIPLE PASSIVE. TRE VIPRP MRRP DPR HiMpeRe PARADIGM OF A VERB OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.—TABLE Xx. Hithpael. | Hophail. 5 in 5 as b to 7Hpp TNpS Drip ApS ompR mp amp pn mypan uTpen ome ype vpn "pa Fp La ot Flin MPR Wes MPR iaTPR BApS TE p2 ole penn pany map pesn jou “pai pan mypan napa ‘rTP pe pe sp ApS iTpe BI TpE PS wTpE mpBD ape? APBD “pp Type sypEs BATES Taney mpE? “ape pe Pp? spe pe 1TPP BPE pe ApS I thou, m. thou, f. he she we IMPERATIVE MOOD. posn you FUTURE. “pe app Na Tpe ape pan apa nyTpea Me ope pp nape TPES span pann pen? “pana sper sTpaNA ny ypann TPE. na Tpan apa span pen WP. span "pe? pan nympan a npapan Tp pen ia pe A 1 pet oe 7p AMpaA maqpan mp npTpen "pee spa mapan pe "pa 7p mpRD neTpan 172° npypan Tpes TPR span “pe? “pan "PE? TTpaA Mapa ape" napa “pay pan pan "pp? span PBI iTpaA mgpan mee: Ampen 7p pen span wpe" appa 3p mpan nyqpan pst nyapen by elit tne , = - —- Ad es | —) ry 7 a x t hiveh THE HEBREW LANGUAGE Naki! The second persons m. of the imperatives are formed from their respective infinitives, from which they either do not differ at all, or in a very slight degree. The second person feminine receives ° in addition to the masculine; the second person m.p.1; the second person f.p. 1° Thus— Infinitive (Kar) Infinitive ( NrpHat) IPP or TPB “pam Imperative. Imperative. pd visit thou, ™.8. Wert be visited, — mas. valp> [RS per five VPP visit ye, m.p. TPA be ye visited, m.p. naps fp. APRA fp. (See Table X.) 115. The indicative mood admits only of two tenses; the past and the future. The third person m.s. of the past is formed from the infinitive, mostly by a slight change in the vowel point: as— Infinitive. 3rd person. ea Sn eae vs ttn hy pe Piel p> DANO LONI EPIL AS f p= eA PBs Shao e kee eR hone p= BRya ant appa on = os oa Pe PEN The third person of Hophal and Hithpael are formed in the same manner. (See Table X.) In Niphal 112 THE ETYMOLOGY OF the 1 is rejected, and the characteristic J retained: thus, from “PB (for TPBIT) to be vesited, TPBI he was visited. 116. The rest of the persons are formed from the third person m., by subjoining it to the letters ‘A /; Mi thou, m.; 1) thou, f.; 1—™ she; 13 we; Dh yous Ih you, f.; 1 for both genders, they. (See Table X.) 117. The future tenses are formed by prefixing to the zmperative the following letters, F, 3,°, &; thus— imp: 1pa2— future, TPES T shall visit ; TpaA thou shalt visit, PBN thow shalt visit, f. ; VIP" they shall visit, Mie, (Ree 118. In the same manner are the future tenses of derivative verbs formed; except the future of Niphail, which rejects the ™ of the imperative. (See Table X.) * (1—) The student need scarcely be reminded that this is the feminine termination of nouns and participles; and hence we may infer that both the third person masculine, as well as the feminine, were originally participles of the past tense: thus, 1P2 one that did visit, VIPB a female that did visit. Professor Lee, in his elaborate work on the Hebrew language (Art. 152 and 195), supposes that they were originally nouns ; this is very probable, especially if we admit that nouns were originally verbalia. (See Art. 6, p. 10.) THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 112 119. The future tenses with the prefix } and dagesh in the following letter*, or } (before &), are often used to express the past; as, TpaA thou shalt visit, TPE and thou hast visited, PAS J shall visit, TPES) and I did visit; WON’ he shall say, VN and he said; 03 we shall go, 3" and he went. Obs. 1.—This prefix (1 or }) is denominated by Grammarians } conversive+, because it changes the tense from future into past. But } (with sh’va) before future tenses, is merely copulative: as, PDN! and I shall visit; VIN and he shall say. 2.—Words thus converted from the future into the past by the prefix 1,{ having any but a principal distinctive accent on the last syllable, have their accent removed from the wltimate to the penultimate, and the last long vowel changed into a short one, pro- vided the third radical is not 8, and the penultimate is a simple * Except where the prefix is ’ with sh’va: as 1}, 121, &c., when the dagesh is omitted: thus, '3%, 72™, &c. Except, like- wise, when the prefix is 8; as, V8, TN, SPAN, where the dagesh is compensated by the long vowel under the }: thus, V2), NI, &e. + I have, for the sake of distinction, retained this technical term, though it is evident that the } never loses its copulative power even when it is said to be conversive. The fact is, that this letter always retains its primitive signification, namely junction; but it not only joins words and phrases, but likewise the téme and other circum- stances. That its influence is not confined to the past and future only, but that it extends likewise to the present tense, and to the several moods, might easily be proved by numerous examples, were this the proper place to enter into such a disquisition. t The prefix } has no influence on the accent. (See the examples in the first note.) 114 THE ETYMOLOGY OF syllable, not followed by sh’va: thus, TION’, aw), DAD», iD’, 735),— TON, IW, OP, 2D", J But if the preceding conditions be argee wanting, the accent is not removed; hence we have VON"), ND", TT, NIP, VA, JIN, &e. The accent is likewise retained in verbs of the fourth conjugation, having chirik instead of (..) in the oe ee 5 yyy, future : as, 7p), jw") 120. The past tense, with the prefix} or 1, ex- presses future time when preceded by a verb in the future, or by an imperative: as, FIPA L have visited, IPD and [ shall visit ; FDS thow hast said, AVS) and thou shalt say*® ; V1 he or it was, TM and he or it shall be ; VON he said, V8) and he shall say. Obs. 1.—This 1 is likewise denominated conversive. * But when a past tense, having ) prefixed, is preceded by another past tense, the 11s in that case merely copulative, and the verb retains its past signification: as, VON) 89? he called and sad. 2.—These rules, which will be more fully explained in the Syntax, are equally applicable to the tenses of the derivative verbs. 121. The active participle of the primitive verb (72), is formed mostly by inserting } (or its vowel pointy) between the first and second radical : as, * In such cases the accent of the first and second person singular is removed to the ultimate syllable. (See the above examples.) Ex- cept verbs whose third radical is a quiescent letter: as, ‘N81, _TSS1D1- + Except verbs of the fifth, and some of the eighth conjugations. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. abs “PID or p52 one that visits, and the passive participle, by inserting 1 between the second and third radical: as, DS: | 122. The participles of the derivative verbs are mostly formed by the prefixes 3, 2, 9, 2, M3", or by a change in the vowel points. Obs.—Participles being in their nature nouns, are varied like them by gender and number (see the following Table), and by the pronominal affixes. (Table III.) They are inserted amongst the verbs, because they supply the present tense, for which the Hebrew has no particular form: as, m. 7PB I8—f, NIPID INL an visiting, or I visit. (See page 117.) 123. To conjugate a verb, is to express all the modifications of which it is susceptible. As these modifications are chiefly indicated by prefixes and affixes, and as these are common to all verbs, there can, strictly speaking, be only one conjugation ; nevertheless, as the vowel-points and some of the letters constituting the root are subject to various changes, verbs have been distributed by most Grammarians into eight classes or conjugations (Art. 12), the first of which com- prehends perfect verbs (Art. 13), the rest comprehend imperfect verbs (Art. 14—16). The annexed table contains a model of a perfect verb. * These letters are probably fragments of the words ‘) who, or M2 what. 116 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 124. Remarks and Observations on the preceding Verb. Obs. 1. The dagesh, in the first radical beginning a word or syllable, as “PB, IPB, &c. WENT, &c., is used only in roots beginning with either of the letters M5 31434, but not in those beginning with any other letter ; as, 7199, ‘A199, pont 2.—The accent is on the second radical when the same has a vowel, but when it has (:) the accent 1s placed on the next vowel ; except the terminations Of, jf, which always take the accent, not- withstanding the second radical has a vowel. Except likewise the plural terminations of the participles. Kal. 3.—P2—The forms of the infinitive of Kal are either (Opp) : as, “ps to visit, 13¥ to lie down; or (dy) : as, IPB; or (O98): as, 320% The first is denominated the absolute form, and is chiefly used by way of emphasis, before and after other verbs: as, 029% 7p) 4p visiting, he will visit you, i.e. he will surely visit you (Gen. 1. 24). The second and third are denominated the constructive forms, and are chiefly used with the letters, 1, a ls TpA2 wn visiting, 7PH3, &c. (See the preceding Table.) 23Y3 in lying down, 1203, 33yi2-+ Before 4P'2 () is changed into short (,); as, bi cons. bbiID, to rule, s2-viND to rule over us. This rule is equally applicable — to all words terminating in (_); as, SBN, SBIOn, with *, “Suing -Svinn, &c. (See Part I. p.79.) * The following forms occur sometimes; bya to boil; on to be great ; TIS)? to fear; TIAN? to love ; ap? to approach. But the first two are probably adjectives, and the latter abstract nouns, used instead of the regular infinitives. + The constructive form is often used without the letters 9, , Fea (See Syntax.) THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. (aby; Obs. 4.—Participles, as has already been observed, supply the present tense : as, nie IN, m0. nie 8, f. Tlearn;* WY AR, m NAY AS f. thou standest; WV NIT he sits, NIWY NN she sits; TPT WN m. MIDI IW we walk, &e. MIP WN TF call, NIP IN TL am called, invited. Verbs which imply neither action nor passion admit neither active nor passive participles, the noun adjective being used like other nouns in conjunction with the personal pronouns in the present tense (the verb to be being understood). Thus, as we say DIS YS J am a man, Epa) NIT he is a king, OWIN MIN we are men, so likewise DIN °38 (not 033M) J am wise, DIN N11 he is wise, O20 TN they are wise; DIS WX TI am red; bi NAN thow art great, non} naxdion the work is great; VAIN DAW we are hungry. Additional Examples. DIN NY I Wy beloved 1s white and ruddy. (Cant. v. 10.) MINI) NL TNA J am black, and (yet) comely. (bid. i. 5.) WS O'3y DT They know that we axe hungry. (2 Kings, Vile 2, } MMV ABA AYA OVI The people are hungry, and-weary, and- thirsty. (2 Sam. xvii. 29.) Obs. 5.—W?2—This is by some grammarians called the root. It has either (-) for the second vowel, as the word under consideration, * Tit. Iam a learner, or lam learning. In a few instances we find the active participle takes ('>) instead (..); as, JIA (Ps. xvi. 5.) 5D (Isa. xxix. 14.) or (-); as, 728: A few also are found with 9 (paragogic): as, 7)%3 (Hos. vii. 4.) Or with * (para- gogic): as, 22% (Deut. iii. 3.) 12 118 THE ETYMOLOGY OF and then it is said to be of the form DY, which is chiefly appro- priated for active verbs; or it has ( _) or (_) for the sccond vowel, and then it is said to be of the form bya. and DVB : as, [ED he was willing, \Pt he was old ; bo) he was able, {OP he was little.* Obs. 6.—Verbs of the form OYE express their different persons in the same manner as, bys (728): thus, (DO, ASH, TBH, Ke. + (not “¥5N). But those of the form bya, retain () in all cases where those of the form bya have (-). Except in the second person plural, where they change () into short (,); thus, 25), m2), FD), meg, 05%, App, ede ¢ OMAP, ¢ WAPD, wD Future ON T shall be able, 2217, &e. The three forms occur in the 55th verse of the 40th chapter of Exodus : mim apy am voy 998 12 Tho Oniby siap avin Syenby vy : DWN dp And Moses was not able to enter into the tent of the congregation, because the cloud rested thereon, and the glory of the Lord filled the Tabernacle. * Verbs of this form have, of course, their infinitives, pa m., and third persons the same. t In pause, (see Part I. p. 84.) BO, OXDBM, IEA ; 05), nba, 109); whereas those of the form DYB change (-) and (:) ia ae (.) as WS he said, WS, WN, VN: t This change is founded on the rule given in Part I. p. 79, namely, that unaccented long vowels cannot form a compound syllable without an accent; and, as in the instances before us, the vowel (_) cannot retain the accent, on account of the terminations DM, jf (see p. 116), it follows, that the vowel must be changed into its corresponding (+); thus, DAYS}, 12D) For the same reason is A597 The versive : thus, ‘ODN, AEB (aan. m2>) mpd) changed into short (+) when they occur with } con- THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 119 Obs. 7.—1P3 —Verbs, whose third radical is nN, drop this letter before the affixes *T, A, , ON, and jf): as, MAD to cut, NID he cut 273, IS, 1D, OFT, ID (mot ANI, HNI2):. The same in the derivative verbs 733 (not 193, ‘977, &c. 8.—The verb | to give, }02 he gave, follows the same rule, dropping the second 3; as, N21 J gave, HN3, ANI, ODI, JND2 (not ‘MNJ, &e.); 3 is likewise dropped before the affixes 13, 12; as, 133 (for 13303) we gave; AIST (for 1218) lesten ye. 9.—A1P3— Sometimes with an additional n (Paragogic): as, MAI (Josh. xiii. 11), MAPH2 (2 Kings xiv. 10). 10.—N1P3—The first (:) is changed into (-) when the third radical is Y: as, MY2v- [1.—71pP8—In a few instances with N; as, not (Deut. xxxii), MNPD) (Psalm cxviii), and with N*; as, 8123 (Ezek. xxi). 12.—7P38—Some verbs (mostly intransitives) take (-) instead of (_) for their second vowel in the imperative and future: as, 27) come near, approach, fut. APS ; IBY lie down, fut. IDV ; espe- cially when the second radical is a guttural, or the third NM or Yy; as, ony ask, Oy, NY, fut. OWA PYY cry, fut. PUSS ; new send nowy ; YOY hear, YOUN Some take an additional n (Para- gogic), with short (,) or (.) for their first vowel: as, T1QY for OY, TAP for 37, nino for now . nyow, and in pause, WYOY for yow- Some few take short (,) in the second person: as, D019 reign thou, f—’2V], in pause ‘AN be dry, f—I370 m. p. be ye dry, desolate. 13.—137?2— n is sometimes dropped, and the vowel placed under the final }: as, IS}? call ye, ww hear ye, (instead 7INDP, mv2w)- So likewise the third person p.f. fat. VYIN for 12 they shall be. * Tn a few instances we find the third person plural m. with &; as, sab they went (Josh. x.), SIAN they were willing; tor 1300 JAN: T 120 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Obs. 14.—1P>8—Sometimes with an additional 5 ; as, TIDUS ‘d will keep, nn duly I will send; for TOW, now, So likewise with some of the other persons: as, MYT let him hasten, for WT} ; nnowa for now. 15,—7P5', 1 7P}A—Sometimes with } (Paragogic): as, PYNVA, WYIL” for AYDYNA, §IDw* Niphal. 16.—Inf. 1725 —Or with (~); as, DONT: (Lev. vii. 18.) When the 7 is preceded by the prefixes b 3, it is sometimes omitted, and its vowel-point is placed under those letters : as, }QYA for }QY79 (Lam. ii.) nisyd for nye (Ex. x.) The same in hiphil, yw for piovind- 17.— Part. 175J—with (,) to distinguish it from the third person m. of the past, which has always, (-) ; except in pause, when the distinction is lost. But the feminine participle 77P5] is distin- guished from the third person 7?) Gn pause), by the position of the accent. Obs.— This participle indicates that the action is in progress, but the passive participle of Kat indicates that the action is com- pleted ; | thus— é 7202] WwW the gate is shutting. ID Ww the gate is shut. 18.—1?5]—In a few instances with 1: as, 7N3 (Est. iS eed) 24199 (Gen. xviii. 27 ) 19.—Imp. 1727—The accent is sometimes moved back to the penultimate, which circumstance necessarily produces a change in the vowel from long to short: as, MEI, 72UN, or WA (See Rarely. 31.) : 20.—7IPEX—See the preceding remark. The ® has some- * Seldom with the second person fi: as PPA, PVYA (Ruth) for ‘P3IA, WyR- THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 12 times (.); as, JAWS (Gen. xxi. 24.) poe ; and with an additional n: as, MBPON (Gen. xix. 20). Obs. 21.—1?3.— With conversive 1 sometimes with (-); as, Sra (Gen. xxi. 8); and with (7) when the accent is on the penul- tumate: as }}QON%) (Gen. xxv. 9). 22.—i7IP8N—Sometimes with (-); as, 77731M- Prel. 23.—JInf. 722—In some instances with (1); as, NB (Exod. xxi.) "0! (Ps. exviii). 24,— TP -—- Sometimes with (-); as, TAN he destroyed, espe- cially when the 3rd radical is 4, or Y, or 7; as, M2Y he sent away, VAI he cut off, 12Y he broke in pieces; and sometimes with (+); as, 2 or 1351 he spoke. Pual. 25.— 1?2—In a few instances with short (+) instead of (.); as, 13 (Ezek. xiv. 4). Eiphil. 26.—Inf. T?53 or 1?23—and in a few instances with (-) for the last vowel: as, 1$59 (1 Sam. xv.). 27.—Part. Pas .7222— or with short (+) instead of (.); as, nny, yep. 28.—ut. VPB8—instead of TPHOX, the 7 being omitted, and its vowel placed under the prefixes. In a few instances we find the 7 retained; as, 47! (Ps. exvi.), sda (Isa. lili ), instead WY, 1010" 29.—TP5'— Sometimes with (-): as, M2, and sometimes with (..); as, M32; especially with conversive 1; as, °73%): Fophal. 30.—Past 1287 or WP2I—with short (+) through the whole branch, unless when followed by (+;) in which case the first (+) be- comes long: as, 2799, TY, WVOVA, fut. WS, Ce. 122 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Obs. 31.—Part. 1789 or IP87—The same (Past) ‘N1P2) or IPD, &e. (Fut.) TPS or TPAX, &c. 32.—7P8N3*—or with (-) for the last vowel: as, PONG he strengthened himself, appeared firm, or he took courage. ‘This derivative verb is formed by adding Ni} to the derivative verb Piél the punctuation of which has already been explained : observe, however,— 1st. When the first radical is ¥ or D, these letters exchange place with n: thus, DBRYN he praised or glorified himself, (for Navn); IAD he hid himself (for WDM). 2nd. When the first radical is ¥, the Mis changed into 0, and transposed as before: thus, PIO37 he justified himself for PISNA). 8rd. Ina few instances we find the MN omitted: as, WIS (Ley, xiv.) for WHOM); N20) (Lev. xxi.) for $OYN' Verbs whose Roots contain one of the Gutturals. . e Ab e e Verbs of this description differ in some respect from the model Ip, as will be explained presently. l., Pursie hadical, Varin, S: 125. When the first radical happens to be either of these letters it receives -: or - (and in Hophal+:) in every instance where the first radical of pe, or of any other perfect verb, would receive Sh’va (:)—— * The passive of this form is OyaNA (Hothpael): as, PENN Nd (Num. 1.47.) ‘They were not caused to be numbered, t.e. they were not caused (ordered) to muster themselves. This form is, however, very seldom used. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 123 Thus, TY to stand, ass to gather, have their Inf. cons. and Imp. ay, FDS (not THY, FDS), — ns Toy (not TITY): Obs. 1.—In such cases, the serviles preceding these letters take the corresponding short vowels for their vowel-points: as, DNA in gathering, mE, &ce.— TV in standing, “oye, &e. (not OX2, Ty3). And hence their futures will be*— NIDONH IBDN FDN3 &c. FON? + BEND FORM FOSS : % ; Pah 7 ee |"e : % . 4 cool’ ; ele MITOYA AWA “TWoyI &. TOY’ WA THY TDYS a . «| . . % ° - % Ape fi The same in Niphal: as, }281 he was gathered, N2DSI, J2PS1, &c.— TY , nb), 7100, TOY, AWD, &e. And in Hiphil—Ionf. eons Je TOT, Imp. WI or Wey, Fut. TOYS, PRYA, WOYA, &c. Ho- phil—Inf, 7297, past tense, T2V7, MIVA, NTN, Ge. Fut. TOYS, TOYA, WA, TOYA, &e. | 2.—Picl, Pual, and Thithpael are conjugated regularly, like the similar derivative verbs of 73: 3.—The dagesh, which these letters do not admit, is compen- * In all instances marked thus *, the verb 3P2 would receive two sh’vas; as, “IPH, IPSN, 17753, &c., the second of which is initial. Now, if the semi-vowels which are in theirnature substitutes for sh’va initial (Part I.p.23) were to be retained, two mitial sh’vas would necessarily come together: as, "BPS or *DPXA, which is contrary to the genius of the language ; the semi-vowel is therefore changed into a short vowel. Sometimes, however, the semi-vowel is retained, and the second sh’va changed into a vowel: as, 2080 ye shall love. Some verbs retain simple sh’va notwithstanding the guttural: as from 0M to desire, “OM, THM, TM3, &c., and from “DM to want, 12M}, DN Especially the verbs 73 to be, 7H to live: as, pee — IOS, JL; &e: + Or ‘BPSD: 124 THE ETYMOLOGY OF sated by lengthening the vowel of the prefix. Thus, DN from gathering, instead of 5\)D8'2 (compare 4PB))* FONT to be gathered, FOSS I shall be gathered, 28) he shall be gathered, &c. (compare TP3i, TPBY, &.). The last rule is equally applicable to verbs whose first radical is (1): as, 72 to pursue, 112 from pursuing, TIN I shall be pursued. Il. Second Radical ¥, 7, 7, & 126. When the second radical happens to be either of these letters, then the infinitive follows the general rule: as, M2 to choose, MAB in choosing, sn25, &c. But the imperative and future take (-) instead of (—); as, WA choose thou, m., Fut. WAs,* minal aR tee Further, the guttural takes (-:) whenever the second radical (P) of TPB would receive (:); as, “WA choose wou, a, &c. Past M2; 1003; Butea AWA, 93°-—Niphal, 77033, 9933- Imp. Wan, Wak Fut. Mah, MIA, 973" Thus likewise PYT to ery, to call aloud, Imp. PYT, *PYI—Wa he burnt, Taya, Ty2: In Piel, Pudl, and LZithpaél, the dagesh (which these letters and the letter 1 will not admit), is mostly compensated by lengthening the vowel of the first radicalt as, W2 to kindle, set on fire, (for * A few verbs of this description retain (1): as, DYN, O73, Dyn: + There are, however, some verbs where the dagesh is not com- pensated: as, {82 he vewed, 09} he comforted, he consoled, &ce. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 195 ya). Thus, likewise, 7173 to dless—Prev, Inf. 723 (for 3). Part. act. 723%, 737312 N73) &e. Part. pass. 713), &e. Imp. 722, °272 &. = =9Fut. FAN, PAN, &c. Past tense, *N773, A313, Ke. Puar, inf. 72 (for 33) to be blessed; Part. 713, &c. Past tense, MI, FI &e., Fut. PAN, PAM, Ge. HiruraEy,, 7137, Part. qn, &e. [Ill. Third Radical, M, or Y- 127. When the third radical happens to be one of these letters, an additional (-) denominated 72133 ANS Pathah Furtivum, is added to them whenever they terminate a word, and are preceded by the vowels (1) (1), (), or (.-); as, WIRY to hear, YOWA in hearing, yawa, &c. Part. act. yov*, f. Ayo’; Part. pass. yin’ NirwAr, pot (abridged YOWA) to be heard; Fut. YOYS-+ Hipnin, PaWA or YOYA ; Imp. yawn, &e. MIYOWA, &c. Part. WWI, &c. Past tense, PHYA &e., AYOWA; Fut. RWS, &c. MIYRWAY, &c. The (:) of the second person feminine, and (—) of the imperative and future, and (.. ) of the other parts of the verb, are changed into (-); as, RYOY (for MWY) ; MYYD (for PMRW); YW, NW! (for pow, novi); ows (for VOWN), NirnAL, Imp. Yow (for ygwit)- PreL, YOY (for VY) &e. * (=) is sometimes omitted : as, YP for YP + Or with (..); 4s, YAWN T shall or will swear, YAWN, &e. { Or abridged YOUR for WYVR—NDI for MAY he shall cause io trust, inspire con fidence. 126 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Kxercise. DyMayIN ‘YAM DIM ATI? ETB MIT FID naa spay a xb piers ayn “ib pom ai stb) py 1 saa OTT patio + pya ‘tw romay qe apib os spy aT pai stab Bc. AYA uns aoe xn: DMD rib rapid en swan} sip “mid nis ith sn: roby sqpby) "yan: opm TWPy abn = sib m3 sans ae ‘byes 710 oak PANN an mony put ae “py nies many iy by yoo: panded ivy ows vondyh bbs "OWA “AIT ay WY DPSYEATnY) DpPAThy ons ypu DYATN abrnn : On anya eT paMamnyy ns "ANTS fobs awg aT saa bean edwin oy ardy soon sbeg saoeb 1 sib to learn, Pi. 4199 to teach. 2 pn 3 Righteousness. 4 Hw language. ° 977: 6 The inhabitants of the world. 17 P27. to speak. 8 Hebrew. 9 Chaldeans. 1° Todo. 1 Straight, right. 1? Before. 13 Cause me to understand. ° We shall use this sign to indicate that the letter over which it is placed is Paragogic; and that the verb over which it is placed is to be understood in a converted time. 4199 15 PWD to transgress. 16In order. 17 M3yin- 18 They did. 19 73% to say, speak. 20} 21 This day, to-day. 22 Hiph. to cause to come together, to assemble. * *3 To fear. %4 7o0- to reign, in Hiph. to cause to reign, to appoint any one as king, Hoph. to be appointed king. * bein to rule, govern. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE Loe “pNP ‘Me ropa 2 Swise Ni nga ay Obipy ND PS ADT ARN + App voy Powe + OMY Joe Jay noe may Pw NT APT NL Ty s osivy mide by 26 DN to despise. 7} INalord. °% Kingdom, realm. THEY MHD yD 25M TY TT APIS MN oAYEY BSS a> OF Ty 3: B35 Api "3a 12 3a Sonp on 'nn? wy MY YThe ‘2 MYRY raw smi Sy yows ques cde spy NS Seni 33 cman DIY) "NMDA BY AT rN} ‘naa yaya Dips : DO mI “py yowin soy yowe XD sqeias Sy m7 3° Aye Dew :" DIPS MNT ween 9 ery oy “ploy eva Paiyaa so ona by “poniva jo :"nby ofa Te)» NNO TUYhY ma xb "57 : Does ANY “op*ywiEay “DANN: BPAY | YTV YI MibyD wwe Wey “ay yin nibyS sossns wise sway Denia 1 Justly, right. %Togive. %Behold. +*How. % Pharaoh. 6nm'a- 7 Kase, quietness. ® A harp. 9 Again, any more. 10 A cry, lamentation. 1 Before, formerly. 12 Judgment. 15 "W3 Pi. to bring joyful tidings. 14 Peace. 15 What is heard, a report. 16 A messenger. 17 Pu. was sent. 18 WY sin. 19 12! to sell, 13!) he was sold, 13'207 he sold himself, or offered himself for sale. 20 WS a transgression. 21 But. 2% Ahab. % 122 to pass, VAY he made pass. 128 THE ETYMOLOGY OF *ptay> “sand oy om qaanny py Y eyya mpna : pyrrdsp mA “yaa Map Py ° nines my qq snyye by ry pay pe con " rN ma yng waren sSenby yey spa: oy ona joo: emrSan yo my Ames saTby Dy warns: Syn SIT WIAA na sink ae mA sey ows snian sna? sen py aio ke an pony s3002 : ADE WP "hbyA tons AN mA yowa *qnanen + Sia Opps Ay PI! + ows qoqanm ieiagba qpana ets oNa pan sovids tp ssgany soya ota 5b saya 24 DYD to be vexed, DIY IT? Hiph. to make him vexed. % INN An enemy. 26 73Y- 27 MMAY- 8 And no purchaser. 2% Blessed (Kal). 30 TY to stand. 31 To bless. 325} 33 At all times. 54 Thus. 55 Good of eye, z.¢. one that is kind, generous. 3° Jael. 3% The work of. °8 He that blesses himself, 39 Truth. 4933. 41 YN seed, offspring. 29nd CONJUGATION. 128. The second Conjugation comprehends all verbs whose first radical is 3: as, 33 to approach, Inf. cons. Wal or MY}: The J is dropped in every situation where the first radical of 1p2 (or of any other perfect verb) reccives (:)*, the defect being indicated by dagesh in the 2nd radical, whenever it * Except the persons which receive the affixes jf, 0, and some in the passive participles. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 129 is preceded by a servile having a vowel: as, WI for wad (compare PP) ; Wis for Was (compare PDN). But ini every situation where the first radical of Tp2 has a vowel, the J is retained, and the verb is inflected like Tp: as, YI, WI (compare AVP). Hence we have Inf. cons. (of Kal), NWA" in approaching, nwa, nea, MID. Imp. 83 or Wi, Wit, WA, IW Future, WAS, WAN, "WAN, &e. | Niphdl. Part. W343 (for 333). Past tense, mwas (for FWII3). LTiphitl. Inf. and Imp. W399, wan (for 01, Oe, OTe ace W737). part. pas. w3'9. Past tense, WIT. Fut. WIS, &e. Hophat. Inf. wan (for W431): Past tense, AAT. Fut. WAN, &e. * Some verbs of this conjugation retain the 3 in the Inf. Cons., and in the Imp.: as, bb) to fall, 933, 5523, 5B Db: Imp. bb) 9) s—but Lut. DBA, OEY: Some few retain 3 likewise in the future: as, 782 to keep, 8) or 18); especially when the second radical happens to be a guttural : DMA, &e. + Hence with 4P0, Wi: with paragogic 1, MY: mOr with (-. ) ea, 1/3, &eo: 130 THE ETYMOLOGY OF All the other parts of the verb are conjugated like 1p2 a thus, Past tense of Kat, AA, A), &e. Part. act. O43. Part. pas. wd, &c.—Inf. Imp. and Fut. of NrpHt, wasn, Wass, &c. And so likewise the whole of Pitn, PuAL, and Hirupain: as, WA), w33, OPI AIAE 129. ‘The verb Wn to give, drops, in some instances, the second, and in others the first J :—thus, Inf. cons. m3 or AA for MAN. na or MA in giving, nnd, &c. Imp. {i], “Ah, &e. Fut. Ins, [Eun &c. (for [AIS, &c.) Past tense sFINY, AID] (for FIN, &c.) Nrpwin, Inf. [aT or NIN. Lp. an. Fut. (MIS. Part. (F3. Past, (HA, MHI, &e. 130. The verb mpe to take, is conjugated in the same manner: thus, Inf. cons. AMP to take, AMPA in taking, FINPY, &e. Imp. MP or MPO—NP or MP, &e. Fut. MPS, Apa (for moe). Past tense, “FAM. NIpPHAL, mppn- Past tense, °F(23 or “NDy3, &e. 3rd CONJUGATION. 131. The third Conjugation comprehends all verbs having NS for their first radical: as, 258 to eat, FDS to gather, assemble. This letter (N), being a guttural, will, of course, follow the rules laid down in Art. 125; that is, it will reccive one of the semi-vowels where the first radical of pd receives (:), and the dagesh, which it does not admit, will be compensated by lengthening the vowel of the prefix. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 131 152. In the first person future of Kat, the (&) is either ass or RRS In nate first case, the Vanes elie ae Do boss, ae itn the second case, the seek sees, ®S, reCely esas s, FDNS LF will nee FDNA, eee jee eoosse 7 = =—«s Es wee we Obs.— The verbs ial to be lost, to perish, mas to be willing, to consent, “iN to say, MBN to bake, form their future like bon: thus, 728, TENA; WS, TNA: MAX, MANA ; MDS, MENA, &§c. But the verbs IAN to love, AS to seize, to lay hold of, YS to treasure up, AD to gather, collect, $e. retain mostly the & and the ee though they some- eee [ee weeps ae on go away, Fut. ‘one. eee &e. shy to tarry, Fut. ae “NA.—nnS to come, Fut. MANS, MAN? or rin? In every other respect, these verbs are conjugated like those of the first conjugation. * The & is frequently rejected in the other persons: as, min (2 Sam. xx.) for TINA: A (2 Sam. xix.) for WONA; NAA (Prov. i.) for 728A; and PS (Job xxxii.) for PINS, FIBN) (Ezek. Xxvil.) JIANN} But these ought rather to be considered as anomalies. + In pause sometimes with (-)—P2Nn, 2983, TENA: t See note p. 122. 132 THE ETYMOLOGY OF EKzereise. wy 92 5 pwn TAR Tay PAN IBN Bi ENN, OMIT MND ONT fe Np 4D te pam wy caviar ody awa sopcbs> ope): ta “yap pa owam “gaetby man vnineyia qa : pyre emyd ebay) “mph way “one oA onND vopbamy "onbn yo “emboxy “thy wa “Opi m2 “Tg Ady) > Avan onBNA :”ypha "aNB xo opbmy snipycnd gop re Sone oab- wi : mbpy mby oya ape sing sawn “piney? "yan away Te "as “DPD myn) * Hone WS TNT YY MAND A many Abe SS ne Sn pa yina “WS PT Mp INI“ yNTTyy “BE sno: “api xd) saab sboxn ND ody spy 1 W2 to approach, to draw near. * Pw) to kiss. 3 And he called. 4David. 5 Y3D to meet, to slay. 6 A people. 7 ANDY a maid- servant. ® 1a child. 9 Leah. !° Afterwards. |! Joseph. 12 Rachel. 13 At the time. !4 Food, meal. 15 Hither. 16 box to eat. 17 Bread. 18 bay to dip. 19 NBamorsel,crumb. °° Vinegar. 2! Game, venison. 22 9DN to bind. 2 Fetters, chains. 4 Ob) to fall. % non to dream. 26 A ladder. 27 28) tostand. 833) to touch, reach. 29 Stood. 30 }N2 to give. 3! With me. 3% A tree. %3 Fruit, 34 A garden. 35 JF the middle. 36 4): TIE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 133 “JD PE TR emp aD wap “wo "wa TY ANA MBNA omNA cya Sy IRS oy Sova ony) “oa Gn Soa) yaahy oon by p999 an *mermy sboN) Ai “oyey seonp yaa) “npona : owANS oom OSMAN) “Bw) mops ap calypso) sey a> pina yay mam iy bh ops eos esmayd pea “yay 9? NINO pam) “yaya DN smiiyd 96 mam) Nowe emmy on qo Ama sanz > ym 2°59 sop a nN SYA IA phon. “ny © OpaS samy “ao + MR Bway mya ebay ridtia osbeey midis Ab 35 - Imp. PP}, Pr y.— Fut. p's, pn, &c.* Hophatl. In Gyan, * is changed into }: thus, Inf. IWIA.— Part. IWIA.— Past tense, WIT, “HIWIA.— Fut. WIS, &e. Obs.—The following verbs supply the omission of * by dagesh,t like verbs of the second conjugation :— * Some of the modern Grammarians suppose that those which have } in Hiphil, pag originally } for their first radical, as in Arabic: thus, 15) No apr! Oys &c. There is, however, not a single example in Hebrew of a verb beginning with }. + They are therefore denominated ‘2 X00 deficient in °. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 137 8, Hiphil, 8 he placed; YS* to spread out, Hiphil, WSiT ; P¥? to pour out, Fut. (Kal) P88; 8) to form, Fut. W88, 783; N84 to burn, set on fire, Niphal, N¥3; Hiphil n3n*. 5th ConJUGATION. 134. The fifth Conjugation comprehends all verbs whose second radical is } or *: as, Bip or Dip to rise, a’ to return, {'A* to understand, AY or AF to contend, dispute. | These letters are generally quiescent, but sometimes they are omitted.t * To these, some Grammarians add 2%) to place. Niphal, 183 AISI: Miphil, 237 fut. VYN: MI Hiphil, 73IT he left alone. It is, however, very probable that these are derived from verbs whose first radical is 3. + When } or ’ retain their consonantal sound, as in '8 to hate, Via to expire, they are conjugated like the perfect verb. Thus, MDS T hated, HY L expired. Fut. Ys, &e. t Most of the early Grammdrians maintained that the second radical of these and similar verbs is 1; that }2, 2%, DY, &c. are infinitives of Hiphil, written without 4, 7. for P39, 2, &e.; and that PIN, PIA, IN, &e. are the futures of HMzphil. But as these verbs have mostly the same signification as those of bp. and as the ° is evidently a radical in some parts of the verb, as, ‘M2 I have understood, searched, M3 thou didst contend, I think the moderns are sufficiently justified in considering ° as the second radical; or, which is still more probable, that these verbs were written with either ° or }. L38 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Kal. The Infinitive absolute has mostly 1, though sometimes 9, or ‘— for its vowel ; as in the preceding examples. The Infinitive cons. has mostly 1, more rarely } or ‘—, for its vowel: as, ava in returning, Wa, 375, DL7.— FID to die, NDA, mins, ny5—295 to contend. ‘The laoperarive and the Passive participle are mostly like the Inf. cons.: thus, DIp,* "DP, WP, MNs2.— Part. pas. Dip.t Map, D°P\,t AD". And from ['2, Imp. Pa, 72°, 1°32, &e. The Future follows the Imperative; and its prefixes 3,1, 7, 8, have long (+): thus, Dips , 1 will rise, DPA, DA, &c. And from }'3, PAS, PAA, °223H. || ‘Lhe third persons m. Past tense, have either (+) or («) or } for their vowels: thus— Dp he rose, MVia2 f. IP p. and the other persons— "ng, ABP, FSP, 998, SHRP, HNRP. Mid he died, IND f. IVD p. and the other persons— Ab, Ab, Ab, Ns, ON, TD * And with paragogic 7: as, 723P, 12}2- But the noun 132 understanding, has the accent on the last syllable. + Sometimes with (+): as from Wi to be ashamed; Part. Wi3 mwa &.; and from 319 to be good, iW, NIV, DY, Ke. t We have likewise D’D'P- (2 Kings xvi. 7.) || According to the early grammarians, the future would be AN, PAA, which is, however, not used. Past tense, 22 or ‘DANE, MIB, PIB, 1B, 723, 9393, OAD, 133: TIT?) LP) Cpe. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 139 WD he was ashamed, mwa f.WA p. and the other persons— ‘AwA, AW, Awa, Wa, DAWa* Fw. The AGRE eerie is the same as the third person m.: thus, D2 one that rises, Meapt, DP, nipp.—nr one that ts dead, WMD, BIND, NiND.—C2 one that feels ashamed, mvs, Dvta, mivas. Niphdl. The Infinitive is Dip, Nan, and with 4, 4 a) pa Dipra, Dion3, DipT9, Dip. The Imperative is the same, Dip ’ DPI, IDPH, NadIpT. The Future is DIP, DPA, MPH. The Participles, NPI, &e., PAI, 77133, 6°23, 759333. The Past tense is ip, Ma\p3 "Ips resseees DPS, MND D3, &e. Piel and Pual. byp and byp double the last radical. Thus, Jnf. DPP t to raise up, re-establish.—Imp. the same.— Fut. * With short (+), because Of and {A have the accent. (See JPawa thn Gay Vat ay + The participle feminine has the accent on the last syllable, and is thus distinguished from the third person /. past, which has always the accent on the penultimate. t Or like the perfect verb: thus, 0%? to establish, confirm, per- form, |3P he established, performed; especially in Rabbinical Hebrew, ‘Mia*?, Mp, Ke. 140 THE ETYMOLOGY OF EiPrips -— Part. act. Spe, &e.— Part. pas. Mri, &e.— Past tense, NP, WIP, IdIp,—*AppIp, APDIP, &c. Pual is conjugated in the same manner, with this difference, that it takes (-) where Pvel has (..): thus, Inf. DID\P.— Fut. D\PN.— Past tense, Dip, &c.* The other parts of Pual are like Piel, and can only be distinguished by the context. iphil. Inf, Opin or Dp to raise, to cause to stand, establish, DONS, DTD, &.—Jmp. DPA, *bYA, WPT, AIBPA— Fut. DPS, D°pA, *P"PAt, &c.— Part. act. B°pia, MiD*pia, &e.t—Part. pas. Opin, MP1, &ce.—Past tense, Dis, Map, 5° — PPA, MBA, &e., or ANSP, Algpi, &e. Hophatl. Hophal takes } for the first radical: thus, Inf. Dpa.— Fut. D218, &e.—Part. OPIN, &.—Past tense, DPAN, MPa, ANI— "HPA, Alp ri, &e. * Participle, DDIP, MDDIP, DYDIP, Nip: + Or with (..); as, (BS LT will frustrate, annul, 12%; or with (-), when the third radical is a guttural; as, YS J will ill-treat, cause evil. t Or with (..); as, 72); and with (-); as, YI- § Or with (-); as, 780, Yan: ———— - —-_ “ THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 141 [ithpaet. Hithpael is formed by adding its characteristic letters to Piel: thus, DS pAN he aroused himself, opposed himself ; Imp. DIP, ‘PAIPAT, &e. Haxercise. G53 xb ° WON3I : Doxa Haney 2 oto DY maT UITNT RN JOP MN wD AT PUYA “AYP | ned ren “eA TT ms :'nay voy Py gina emp AM aon joa crbipa sm sat tascam Sy and op 77 3 TH IN 7 Dp + Dwi AT Ws: [aN sy 85 spy toy ozs: Sarna may Oy caw igen lait ON? 935 (353) Pyime $ Oy 933 stn "Sw Sy ae: np TAA ADP + ODM "mason mip mia mpaby : ype By awh “ow AI Ay AMS 3 23 Ws TY MB iw : My “oan ¢ "Be ON a ya yf NDI i To go down, to descend. 2 To purchase food. # Root, 3) to be able. 4W head, top. ° ¥P the end, extremity. © IW? to sit. TNut. 87998 thedepth. 9 Dust. 3 to know. | The Grave.) Lo return.) 41° io COR comms? 10) a child. 1° 4) tender: young. 16 The living. 142 THE ETYMOLOGY OF "ana cp yobs soa ytia "poe anew BAT steppe Ta TI RAND TAOS t AAT onby yin ox oonis: AyTIN “*pawiorny yoig pop oom) yoo “ps ONrOSny snis “mys ines ye oA "3h ba “ANDY Gs ppp yrainna ins ws espy xd syne Sy swan Foy som ws by sata np ay: My Oy :TApY Ovy Nye OMA Twa : pox tN “man anny Sy Nyopy oi: nin: mvigrny sand pays ons ima xO oa ny: “yea Anion WD INA AO + PPA a wn: aM yn by *niay ney NS: mpm omy “on yp pprrn> “ynsopp : ppm "apy oD : DE Je op + Dn? pepe “aa: by By DPE se9a9 @yopSy ny sen 17 M9 to die. 18 Truly. 19 Came. 2% To any one, 2 Mordecai. 22 Judement. *5 Root, 2 to understand. 24 73)98 truth. %> Mul- titude. 26 A vision. 2% To stand. °%8 Died. 29 }\9 to lodge, remain during night. °° 723? to bury. ®! The anointed. % Evil. % The wicked. °4 Harvest. °° To-morrow. 36 Parents. 37 Old age. 38 22119 kingdom. %9 Poor, indigent. 4° A prophet. 4! New. 42) Asroek.,)4° 537 foot. 6th CONJUGATION. 128. The sixth Conjugation comprehends all THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 143 verbs whose third radical is 8: as, N¥2 to find, NP to call. They are thus conjugated :— Kal. Inf. S819, N¥ID* to find, NPA in finding, NYY, &e.— Imp. NYP, NSD, NSD, NIN. + — Fut. NYDN, SSH, NLDA, &e—Part. act. NY, MBP or ANY, BNI, AINYID—Part. pas. NIND, TNT, DNIYD, Fixivy— Past tense, N8Dt, AND, INYP—ONYD, ONYD, ANYD, &. Niphal. Inf. and Imp. S¥id1, &c.— Fut. SS, &e.— Part. N83, &e.— Past tense, PS¥/D3, MINSD3, &e., NSS, HINX23, FINSDI, &. * Sometimes with N: as, N7P, to call, MP; xd to be full, nixon: + is sometimes omitted: as, {N¥!D° t Some verbs (chiefly mbransttives) have (--) instead of (r) for the second radical : as, Non he was full, ANP, INP NNDND, Non, NXP, &c. In such cases, the participle active of Kal has the same form as the third person m. past. Thus, x1) — whence AND, DN?0D, nixon: Thus likewise 82D he is unclean, or one that is unclean, MND, DXDY, MINQY—NYY¥ he is thirsty, or one that is thirsty, TNDY, ONDY, MINDY: 144 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Priel. Inf. and Imp. S$19.— Fut. S88, &e.—Part, act. S8NA, §c.—Part. pas. S$I99, §c.— Past tense, NXD, Sc. Pual. Inf. N¥8!D.— Fut. NPN, &§c.—Part. NP, &¢.— Past tense NYP, Fo—ANYD, FINED, FINS, Se. Hiphi. Inf. 8°$'911.— Imp. 88D. §c.— Fut. SOS, &e.—Part. act. N°$I9.— Part. pas. NSD, Sc.—Past tense, NSIT. ANYON, Fe —ANBBT, QNYBT, ANY, ge Hophal. N¥O7 or NYT in the same manner as pan or pari. Hithpael. NYDN, Se. like IPB. 7th CONJUGATION. 136. The Seventh Conjugation comprehends all THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 145 verbs whose third radical is 1 without, mappik,* (Part I. p. 21); as, sibs to reveal, M23 to weep. The letter is changed into J or ’, or it is omitted. Kal. Inf. abs. sos to reveal. t+—Inf. cons. nibs, moaa, nidsa, §o—Imp. 3, *%3, 93, FDI — Fu woe. aban s, san, ny, §e.—Part. act. abi3, big g, pia, nadir —Part. pas. * Verbs having * (with mappik) for the third radical, are conju- gated like perfect verbs: thus, ‘024 J was high (not N33), 723: Part. 33, D'23- Fut. FAIS (the 4 retaining the mappik in all parts of the verb wherein it forms the last letter). + In a few instances with }: as, 19? to purchase (2 Sam, xxiv. 24), instead of 732; WY to do (Gen. xxxi. 38), for mibyd- t The prefixes }, nN,’ have mostly (-) or (-) when the first radical is a guttural: as, nbyn thou shalt ascend, nbyy, nya; NINA thou shalt encamp, MIN thou shalt see. _ The it is sometimes it with conversive we : bh and he ascended ; Hf ha he did; spe either of the letters - D,D, 3, B, 3, 2, both receive (:); as, 20) and he captured, 22) and he wept. § Instead ne3-—In some instances ' is substituted for the third radical (1): as, 7°22 one that weeps, f., so likewise in the past tense, MDM she trusted (for MNDM); YON they trusted (for 10%). TIT T And ins the es” ne they shall be ES : ee with a myoM (for YDS). 146 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 98, 9D, peda, niva—Past tense, nba, minds, soa oma, Hea, 173, Fe Niphat. Inf, abs, MOI.— Cons. HADI, HAA, &e— Imp. NOI, sha, sda, nav — rut. Ow, ndan, San, &e.— Part. kh m533, §c.—Past tense, 533, Ada, soy y9. mea, mia, &e. Priel. Inf. abs or “3, ioe 53, &c.— Fut. mee §e.—Part. act. 519, §c.— Part. pas. mx, §c.— Past tense, mba, FAD, Fe. 99S, Ge. Pua. Inf. aba, riba — rut. IN. — Part. 53. —Past tense, | mba, MINDY, Go. — IN", Se Hiphil Py A, iin —Imp. int, Gee 3 13 with the accent on the last syllable: whereas verbs of the fifth conjugation have their accent on the penultimate, as, 2?) they stood up.—ia¥ (from 2) signifies, they returned; but 138 (from nav signifies, they captured, took prisoners. } And without 7: as, YS‘ he shall command (for 733). t The 5 is sometimes dropped: as, oun bring up (for mya). : | | | , | | ba THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 147 mpAn, MDW, &e. Part, act. s6329— Part. pas. MOND, &e. En onse. aban or IDI, anbaa, shana, be 10. Hophat. ‘Takes (+) for the first vowel, and the radical 1 follows the same rule as in the preceding branches: thus, moi pedaa, &e. MOI, MOIR, &e. Lithpael. oP, DPI, &., MIAN, ADA, &e. 147. The verbs 79 to be, MN to live, belong to this conjugation ; but they deviate in some measure from the preceding rules, as may be seen from the following examples :— Inf. abs. mn to be.— Inf. cons. nn, nina in being, AMIS, nin, nn. Fut. 3 ane or me I “phall. or will The an or nnn SAA AY or Ms MIA MINI or "M35 TTA, APN ITA FBMAD or PAB * And with conversive ~?3%: BY and he caused to turn; SM eg (2 Kings il.) and he caused to see,1. e. he shewed. L 148 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Part.m. 7 or MA, f. 7A or FM, p. BI, f. HM. Heaezytense, ENG, Vn ay ales Wl nen Foslaee On, WIL In Niphal we find some of the persons of the past tense only: thus, S03 T have become, 173, 3, WG; and by analogy, 13°13, BEV, FVII, PII: Inrrnitive AxBsoLute MM to live. Kal. Imp. FA, Hub. MBL 330 — Fut: mAs, mma, rn, nae or Dae: mid, &e.— Part. 7, F7N, BMA, FAYM-— past tense, “FN, DN, AM, 0, A, 13, BAA, FN, Mat Niphal not used. Priel. Inf. VA to preserve, sustain life, Ayn, nis —Inp. rani Mok. Mae hm ered £78, MOS, mM, TA, ms mn, rena, PIN, Nanny, iss AIA. — Part. mini, &e. Past tense, "FT, OT, HY, Men, 13M, Ban, TAN, °T- ETiphil. Inf. VI to cause to live, restore life, revive, nino — , Imp. BMAIAP &c. Past tense, ON, Aen, AM , mn, VW, &e. * Or Dp h—nin- THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 149 Hexercise. "377 TH SENT CaN TN WA TP ‘wR mip Sip 5 nip emda > cmyy min py md sea cng eo ma PT aw BTA mwy TRY may PNW AI] NPR BT pwiby ar soe Ss oxin9 saynps NON fp Ns or m>y JAN ANIA NAPA mbm NA tof DIN “Ws ot meg apy nt aye ni popa ANYD "WII : MA ANS “NEY OA : TIN NY UmYA WS DY + DAIS NyD J? ym Dy SPepyya JO ANNE! Nye: opm ND ppm "obey pw “ng ita NYA meyen BN or" mvang on myypa wayt xb my Sa satab 6 Ss aS . . spb i" omby mydp mop: Mayr aNd “yb bs ogma xbp "Tbe =ayma xboy spoy "Amp aon imix on : ems xepmy ONO: Paw MR AON JB WA aA ND IMA wT 1 Before. 2 Root 872. 3 Root MWY to do. 4 Not. 5 Root 738 to turn, Pi. to clear away. 6 Called, invited. 7 bey toask. 8 Tocome. 973Y to answer. 1A bird. 1 Honey. 12% sufficient, enough. vee etnety1. 1° To pay. — 16 95 to catch, 175M to lay hold of. 1nY lip. 19 Anger. °% Therighthand. % A bribe. 22 ]7P. | ahorn. 23 N32: 24 Spoil, plunder. 25 Goods, riches. 2 To sin. = Pw: ——— | °T Strange. Take 150 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Sy MY OA TN SnNyD AP "a 9 SPE D2 APKW MAPNY P BYOH Md wh yw mp :pwpa by nim myn pyr nye qs ninoy) NOD AS EM TTMN Aeyy DDN “DY PY rp RYE TWN MAIN Ay +° ny Ma Opa Toy te a i: age soy xO wy “pvp sos maw oa: oy SBMA oY chs DTS MAN man: ey yatby =migds DS) AbD OUMNH + FyI9 DN As SMS WY WI so SIA OS PIN + 8 ANS “Oy INST) Tp2o TT “ppa DID 75%pIA sony) anwby op cay dby | obine “apyD. WTI Cw “wey empINA DT DCoy aI DY yo 2 TNIto see. 29 MWY to do. 2 N¥) to go out. 31 Both. 32 yy advice. 93 Wablindman. 34 MWY work, deed. 35 ND2 to cover. 36 Shame. 37 {Pt an old man. 8 A sack, sack-cloth. 39 BYY to taste. 4° Any-thing. 41 7¥1 to feed. 42 nn’ to drink. 43 With force, vehemently. 44 31¥ to return. 4° Each. 8th CONJUGATION. 138. The Eighth Conjugation comprehends verbs — whose second and third radical are the same; as, 39 to measure, AAD to surround. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 151 The second radical is mostly dropped, and its vowel transferred to the first radical. The deficiency of the second is indicated by dagesh in the third radical, in all cases where it has a vowel. In many parts of the verb, however, the second radical is retained, and conjugated like the perfect verb 7P- Kal. Inf. abs. 23D or 3D to turn about, surround.— Inf. cons. nba, 2b, 265 or 2909, 3b—Imp. 3d, *2b*, 920, ny/3Dt.— Fut, OPH, 26H, *3R, 3b’, 3G, 24, 9M, Pnvabns, 125%, APaA-—Part. act. 3D, AID, B°3D, ) FSD; or like the perfect verb, 225D, 32d or AAD, BAAD, AIQID-—- Part. Pas. aia, Maid, DPaiAD, AWID-— Past tense, AD||, MAD, jaD—"aD; Hab, Fab, 93D, BHD, 7A2d- | * Sometimes with short (,); as, 3) seng or exult thou, f. (Isaiah | liv. 1) 13) m. pl. _ + The long vowel (~) is changed into (. ) because a long vowel cannot form a compound syllable without the accent; and as the _ accent can never come on the ante-penultimate, the long vowel must necessarily be changed. (See Part I. p. 79.) _{ The prefixes 3, n,°, 8, have long (+), except the second and third persons f. pi. § (~) is changed into (..) for the reason stated before. For the same reason is (_) changed into short (+), with conversive \: as, 3D! he shall surround, 23% and he surrounded, 29M), 203. || Or 32D, like the perfect verb. In the same manner, DD] he | mmagined, intended, Mom}, ‘EDD 15? THE ETYMOLOGY OF Niphal. Inf. IB, ABA, &c.—Imp. ABA, or ABA, "2D, IAB, ND ADI-—Fut. IDS+, ADA, ABA, 3B%, &c.—Part. 3D3 or sin) Mab, D’aDI, &c.— Past tense, ABI or ADI, M33, or 7303, 1223-33, NADI. &e. Piél, Pudl, and Hithpaet. Are conjugated either like perfect verbs, as, 22D to bring about, to cause ;§ bbs to praise bop, to curse, Lbs he praised, smbbn, &e. bn he was praised, nbn I was praised, boann he praised himself, boasted.—Part. Lomi, Sonia, bbang &e—Imp. Son, 5bi3, HDA &e. Sonn, bbana, &e., and Fut. bony, Loy, Lbanwy, &c. Or they are con- jugated like verbs of the fifth conjugation (YY). Thus Inf. IAD to go about, encompass ; Shin to make foolish, frantic. to act without reason.— Imp. ASD, pills) &c. — Fut. IBN, &ce.—Part, act. 171D%9, &c.—Part. pas. AnD — * Or with (..); as, DM to be melted. + Or with (~) DAS J shall be finished, completed, DFM, BF); or with (-); as, 12. he shall be measured. In a few instances without dagesh ; as, bps T shall be light, i. e. not esteemed, bpn- t Sometimes with}: as 3433 he was rolled, 1539 they were rolled together. § Hence the Rabbinical, 12D a cause. || Hence Hallelujah, mon i.e, Praise ye the Lord. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 153 Past tense, AAD, MAID, }27iD——*AI IIb, &c.— PuA Inf. 524D.— Fut. IDS. —Past tense, 35D, *FaaD, &e.— HrrHpak&1, Sa)ADT ; or from boy Soa he rolled himself. Hiphil. AD.—Imp. ABA, °ADG, &.—Fut. IDS, IBA, °DDA, | &e.— Part. act. 1D, Nadi, &c.— Part. pas. ADA, NAB, | &e.— Past tense, 30, M3BA, SBP NDA, NADA, &. Hophail. Inf. ADIN-— Fut. IDS, ADI, "ADI, &e.— Part. ABN, Nad, &c.— Past tense, ABI, Mabini, Ja_DIN——*adAN, MADINA, &e. Exercise. S YATMN 995) DY sot oAhy ap o> 134 nb) ND :7BiYD YQW TYATMN wabA oyowin pia VYYIITNSY °3D3) + DIPPATNS BaD : nb iNa Wy remed codeimrmy bo goin wy soe pe 1 Much, enough, Seven times. 3 Many. 4179 to measure; in Hith. to stretch one’s self. ° Jerusalem. * Or with (-); as OPM he caused to be light, V0 he made bitter. 154 THE ETYMOLOGY OF SHA MNT PT YP EAM wp) AN ED mY Thy DID AINA WEN Tp DV mM Oy 33D 3 :ooSyo omyp npwrns “oniba oa + yea pe oxd ppma yang: moyen ‘pe by phy Bay my San9 Six pyay Dp) pein Tea ah oy ap ND) oy NO cw oo Dima: *IEID pi mand yaycypip "npn mbypo9 Dy aa" eypddo pia pepe yaw deni yordoa “pws tN sty gem $n: ovn-ds sa$bn odes : gnix 2m abo “omen xO: qwa ond ow abboe wayyy Soom “mpwignrba way Sony boy bd WIT APT: PIN De ay: fy ne one I “APO “yeh wrade mMD : ty Dy moa moby fwd fom ompp Sys sab me: ant spy NO spypa : omy AA apy uw man paw maps abo: pm ayy apd oyyt 6 53 to roll, roll away, remove, in ith. to roll one’s self, to wallow. . 7 bay to wither, waste. ® The vine. 95D to number. 1°"PM to search. | DN to despise. Mg bon to praise ; in Hith. to praise one’s self, to boast. 1% A dead person. 14 Sense, understanding. 15 Soul. 16 $39 to shout, to sing. 17 993 to rejoice. 18 Awake. 19 }2% one that dwells. 20 Dust. 21 vind to dress, to clothe. 22 Salvation. *3 A pious man. %4 154 to jump. % The lame. 26 Dumb, “7 073 a vineyard. TABLE XI. Ewhibiting all the Infinitive and Imperative Moods of the Perfect and Imperfect Verbs, Primitive as well as Derivative, at one view. INFINITIVE MOODS. Dib n> oma wom | yy om “pm | x’p'n? | oN pnde) Eighth Seventh Sixth Fifth Fourth Third Santad First Conjugation. Conjugation. Conjugation, Conjugation. Conjugation. Conjugation. | Conjugation. Conjugation. 3D er 330 nipy ri°3 Nx pip| muy aba box} mpg way! tbo thd) : ; ; | ‘ Efe, Se eee dR &e, IDA &e. mdza &e. Nya &e. pipa &e. MQW | &e. bows &e. nwa Ke wapba bi : DA) IDA nba syn bipn wan box wan sabi h &e. IBAA &e, mya Se NYOTS | Se. DIA) &e. BARI) &e. Goyna| &e. waa) &e spb ee a3 niba by Syd byip ay boy wa) 192 bn , : | i. &e, 33D2 Ke, nibaa ke, NYDA &e. Byipa | &e. WIA ke. Soya &e. WIA &e. spa nab] ney ng Nye] bhp ae} boy 0 722], &e. 3303 we nipya | ke. Nya] &e.DEIp| ayia ebay! se pina) &e. taba J a0 Nn abp] | eeo] pepo] ae aen] bap] en] eo Al ; as : : i iph. &e. ID &e. mova Ke. NMYOTA| Se. DYPAR| ko. WAAR] ke. Soxna ke. PANT | &e. POAT spin | mba ban NYA ppaa wan Soya wat 12H) } Sidley soa : pals a Hoph &e. apiia &e. midyaa Ke. NY¥DTa &e. pina ke. SWAAD! ke. boyina &e. WIAA | ke. s2ba3 op azinpn |nipnandina| oo xypnn| —opptipnn! = sean) bey} wan} bn \ tain PER aes vey aa cae Seek sige &e. JADA &e. mibania &e. Nyaa ke. PAIDAAA | &e. AWHTA || &e. Sowa &e, BRS — ee ee \ a2 —-—_——— 3b mba NYD BID ay boy : °2D obs ND BrP aw show wi va tee amb a3 ANY ap 1 | s5oN Top sb ng’ap mya] ayy] ip] aw) aD B naa) Ag 257) nbn Nye biphi wan boxn waa sph api ay) NBT ‘ipn| —savan| “Dona wa} taba ; é oy “ es “7 Niph. 9205 syn INYO spipn Awan soya wn sbi || “7? n3gen myo} manger) Mabipm| maser) Aaa) AawRA) Ape a31D np Nxt batp aw 238 wa 722] "az1D aby ogy rap ay shane way sad s3\D iby ANY sp ani vODN qin ss | ie nyagip mys] ayy) miypip] mages) gba, ae} aI? abn nba NyDA pp win boyn oral s19693 7 ADH shat} yA wpm) SpA] DN) wa] pA | 3 Hj TT ae eons ¥ Ree Lt Hiph. q2DH sy] NOY aia sya ION WIT po = nygo7 mgban| maNypa) mapa] Paawin| = maze) Aaya) ABA asp mbinn| =o s¥pnn]oopipna}| = awann| Deana) wna | enn ‘AAD toon) ¥en) cppipng| © avann] asm] wana] enn SADA ann) oo aN¥ona) sepipna) =—oaavann| «oo beynn) wan) pon | roainpg) Ayn) PaNyenn) raapipon| maaan) Aypaspn) AavaAD]| AypoAn | “As, abba shba 65 sib: The rest of the infinitives are varied in the same manner: thus, RWIA MWD nid nwis Goya Soya ae. 3b 9 2D 42D na’ap DA °3T7 log nygBn 33D ‘23D Arid 333d apn *2Dr "aD “Pap aaAbA “ADA ja DAH AANA mba a3 ra nba shan Ia nya nbs by a3 nsds nba ban Ta nna nbann bani INA nyipany NYPD ‘Dp NSD *DrP IND ADP AaNye narip NY =) al NT *DIPT NYA Appa MaNyen) — Aabiph NYD BrP NM “agp ANY | HIDNP | Fax) Tyfapip NYDT pp NST DN ANY ip Manyen) —AyepH N¥ON7) BpIPA NYO) ORI ANNA | epIpAr MaNyeT | Asap 3 “wy I) naa wii wy wT naw ay "ay el mae swan DwIA IVyn naawin awn “ABA aWAnA Aaa ~~ Nps a bow shone Adon naPdy box hoya PONT) AIOENTI bow shay sdN n3DpN boy | sboun PION naan SaNAA | San DINAH nabasnn 2 LNG sbba shba sinh sides: The rest of the infinitives are varied in the same manner: j Soya Soya we. wa ava wT wag wag nae wad way aw TaUad wa oy) rial whan navn viann WANT wan mayan > gab nat spb oda sbi naqpbn sab oan ad nap> nba) sppba wpoN Aap? snban bn yb Ay | Niph. J 7 P Piel. Hith. thus, mvAa nw. ney nwa 5! yoy iy or we ae i: ah va pps Righth Conjugation. JON ‘a> IDA xiD° apn 31D3 nyzp7 WIA ", 93ip? Evhibiting the Future Tenses of all the Perfect and Imperfect, Verbs Primitive as well as Derivative, at one view. aby van", 25° 2A 253 nygrs apn rr?) AZiDN sa3-* azipn zip aziDA a3'D3 maag’ > way x jai" ARN azipA aio azipn 33103 nga3°-% JaziDA ple -, oon ; jazip’ IDA) n’> *n) Seventh Conjugation. noite naan m2" nban npn adan , aby iby, ma mbar mba moan 233 aban yon Sixth Conjugation. Ny NYA NY? synA ND art a ol INYD? Th TABLE XII. vy m3 Fifth Conjugation. Dipiy ‘Ip AA Dip? pipn op M3) aa Fourth Conjugation. Wis ne wh a wh 13 nx’ 12 Third Conjugation. ee er eel bot iby, ban box? boxn box ompn Second Conjugation. wr. wan wa? wan wai mage amapa) myaws savin mybo aban] Maw WAN a“ ” NYDN NYA Nyt? NYDA Nyt ANY NyeN NYT =: DN ‘22> ADA 3° 3DA 3p) nay? aA | » 93D! Dipi "pip DIph Dip® pipA Dips ADIpA away ey" awAN ay win aw maaye- awa Se =) 2) bowet son”, boxn boys box bowa gba 280 Lich aba visi pnb First Conjugation. Fem. sbi mp Teh ab abba abba nape nbn wats sway, wa v3 wan wan napa wan “1, smb Fem. abe mips PR and? spb sb) nay A IDIN SDIA 3D} IDIA 3D;3 yaDIA D7? Ae a a” 23 iFDN 93377 > AZADA 235AD' aziApA 335703 A327" FANANA ** . 92AD%, | co, obs] oe. geeype] "2 Spt) fs aapaey eis. soph] > eA) ar mpi Nutt bip\ply awe ban vany| Fem. igi ee nban} yes oxy) mers pip) apis spin cba bayn | warn eign | mers TED mb» ND? BI” | ay | bow war’ “132! ban NYDA bate ayn ban van 2h nu NyD3 pRipa ay bxe3 wia9 “1ab3 mgr. abin| mages. eye) myers wopipm mygy aaa ingbarsban) mye wpa) Aye M27 a5 5 aye] 2 TANS sto eatiat ere a9 ne, spe) * . awa| s7192" mae seri boipl awh ed vayt| Fem. HR borhan! wars germ] tay eipa| ages avin) day bag) ways ea ern Tee ripe wa? Dbip? sym] Danee bay 722, ran san beipn win DaXn van 782A nD bop) WY ON) De 72Y nye, bal ray aeegn |naQpr* soBipp /nyge- sayin |ubarabayn myears wa AT 7D Zr) 7) ol ribate wpe Dipls seit) Day thant] Fem. “TDR oy, phan] apes esa] ip opipn) aps awin py. Soy) ower, en] mppp. Then nby Rig Dip? ay bony pings might nban S¥DA Dan 2yin Gown wean ann mba N'¥D) pps ry beoys winay nb} mbes, aban | agg ey Aypp. IPA | maave api mybassbeyn | nyyraeean |p Ip” PPA eM sop] or aneyn| ft) apie] es anipin| oe abe] os awa] ot soit nba nyo pi awh bat vay) Fem. abet} vb, nban| ages Nye) ppt ppin) gers aan) Yay OUND) was wa) TBE. np Nyt pp aw 7! wi ndan NYOA ppain awan box wan nba N¥93 ppas wis boy vay nyo, shin | may > Nye) TyBP- BPA Taw sagan Masog) Naya swan | APIs sR) You ee, shy] 8 Gham) os. appy] os saya] foo a abo) 8 5 ee) oe npaniy NED BRAINS wing DSM warnes| Fem. sigma | 1 Hhe=, mbinm| aye ™ NYA] SBR ™ DpIpMA | °aw-- avinn Says Deen | war Wann) pT abi | Thos nbant Nyon? ppipn’ awa bax wisn) aging | He nbann NEON pripan sean) = baynn van sehr | si nbang Nyon) byipn) wn bana van} nye san ate aban nigag” sega “oo > INYO nyigor sapipnn ow . iarpipn’ nage agin aon » sagan? nyoasoaeny ” a . voy ngyyr wan oo ; wan? 1953 We swpbng | We Ayo BoA You ry gaghne| They aba Thou “ig? | He snbA She A ane They vny Future. I Thou He She Kal. We Niphal | You | They 11 Thou He She We You They _ Thou He She Hiphil. We You They - - Mithpael. Ay i » ae ebay tir - o TABLI S XIII. Exhibiting the Participles of all the Perfect and Imperfect Verbs, Primitive as well as Derivative, at one view. pYbs mm. | xem | yy im “pm | NDT | pop pny 23 Cention | conftestion | [onfigaton’ | Coafagsdon | Conhugeton! | Ceayusetion | Coneacoe oogaatonct Saeed 3D mbia| yi pp| ae boix wis sib | Aap) daa] | Axi mip Figwiy) pig) ata mid ho ae — | Axyin — | mapir}| onbzi neigh npib BaD pia) peyyin | ppp Ba | posix) = eyiah ppd Lisp nibia}| ning nin niawiy) onibyin naw)! ABAD Lica, f 3455 | v3 NIND Dip ay bye) Wa 10d ae maiap maha] maiy| © pap) awh) paw mind | paiap) =soba] opis] op, meaaeh| ay BHAA prqind | nian) iby] nanan nipip) — HiAw | nibs Fwy nimind ) papa} mbs|| yma] tips] aes) a va) eb) mgpy) mg) igypa|—mipipa) iawn) Daya) An) 829 | ——| omy) omega} onipp) naa) onbaya) gaa] R02 | F Nihal Beads | py | BNI | BYip3 Bays | poy : Bya3 pends | | nis? niby | miNyy —oMabip) —igeiamibgyg) WD niga || fase) vby| yp] kip, sek] baw] np] 1828) ) | maging) mbya, mya] mppipp «—mgetp) bp! nv nyebe | | Ac ongsiop| = —- | Agee! ngpipp magia) nbaye) nye] R28 | | Branip9 pi NYP Yani Bay | prays Bway peo | L niasipg} —nisap) ninyyp| niopipp inva | idee) iva | nimabia | \ Piel , agiop| onby) wen) ppipa, aw OND) NB a9 | | nazion| nba) nyynip| napipp navy) mba nvAD TIP Pas, 4 anid —— | ANypa| pips navi} (nboye) nya) M222 paziog| by) pryyne| prmpipa pray] vay) pe) BNE | | mine) mibysninen | niopipn ning onibayp) nwa) nig | J a3iD | nba Ny pyip. swt] | So vin | te mazio| mba yg mpeip| mah | oma) me | mph i ; pisgto| oa] ee] Drobip) oiaes mag] oD | BRO | 7 niaaip ribs] ning) nisin) onings | nib) iv | nie? f ap/ | nb | NN bpp | 2v | bow wen snp > map9/ ipa) myrepe) nip) pein) naa) eB mph. Aud 9 yg] — ayia) en) ne) nape peape| ty) ONY) DMD) BD*wD | pdx) pw) pHtigbig niapp| onibya) ninyyna) nie) ninwio niyo) ive! ninabe | | \ Hiphil. spi; ong) wyee) ppm, ae} «© ND) RT| mapa] IQ) Nya] Apo) «Maw PAN] WAR BPR | Pas ~~ ——| ANyno —| ngyso) mop] nym mabe pepyo} «—693) NYRR] «oo ppa| Dea) OYPDND] Dw, Dab niapia) nix | nisypA!) nigpip| Nisa. miboye| iwi ningbia | spn} mpg) yp opin] aan) ON) wa | DT mapin} = mat) Aye) mpi) mavan| AdaNn nvan qed || pgp pry] DYE) ormpan) iawn) progam) prey egg | FM nisin nid | DISNsen ANAT | iawn nibosa nw naga J asinpp| onbind, oxyend| pripno) «oawano| obasne) pn) abn) nagings) nbang, myyene| mesipne navinio| nbsp mean) mggbnp naaAd —— | SYR) Nopipne | AWA! ndash | Ayan nahn | Hithpael. pragineg) pYane| oyynng|prepipne| payne] oben) pene! omebna nian niban | nixyans Mispiphis | Niwa nidsawn09 | iwi minha. ® "¢ , as et ae 7 " ed ~ , - © wu f hh ‘= -y 7 4 i” he ae wi N a a ar " Cal Dn) | Righth Conjugation, / | | | | m5 om) Seventh Conjugation. yon Sixth Conjugation. ANS Ds DNS Ny rise saNYD PONY ines TABLE XIV. Ewhibiting the Past Tenses of all the Perfect and Imperfect, Verbs Primitive as well as Derivative, at one view. vy m2 Fifth Conjugation. "Hep. Fay) a mp 3tp2 1» BRM. Wp “® M2 Fourth Conjugation, Ay NW, 3M naw 102 7 ON 2 N"5 “13 Third Conjugation. NON n, Dos bow N22 13798 7) DID V2 pon Second’ Conjugation, pinby First Conjugation. asl My) AW way WW 93833 7, DAWA Wa Je | aes 'D Uo 71303 | map) 7 BARD) 3D) nna 390229 7 BN m3 oN) Fs DNS) N¥ID3 riyyin3 HaNeyng 7» DIYS NY) "ODP AE Dipa risipa nabNp 3 7 BAP WIp3 9 Aaw3 | BDA wis Apel |} J3a¥3 pawn | qwia nas A» BON) 228 nD 10283 7 BAIN W383 2 ¥le | YAS ne Fe) w33 rie 43033 7, BAWAI Wag *AIND | Aaa 330 | Nap | WAND 7 BRAID | AnD | A. ales) ns Bs mp3 nna 93% 3 7, BOY a5) FIN | A, Dw sy FIND 7) OED INSD *AiSIP A» BRI Bip nig\p 13—P }> Bip iaKIP Haw Ay D3 ay nav" 33) 7 BAW ay ADDN Ay OBS bas na nDoN |) BARBS qbDe oth DDE wa nes 13039 7) BWI wD HAND AL AgNO 33\D maz 33ND 7» Baz a2 P3907 abi) nap} ac 7, BPR 13D) “3 | A» MPa mp3 | ny nna 333 het 1» Bia 93 9 A ND | A, DNxP NX Ty ngs TaNSQ 7) BANS ay ‘BP A. AigRp BID ngbP saBip 7) BAND sr\p me, A. Baw awh mI aw 7, BAW, yaw Abe | D, DORN bon nN 238 “Ty BIBS 2S AWD Ae DER way Xs nwa} ava) 7} BAYA) WR | mT A. Ba nov nna 93°37 | 7 BEeSyT | ae SANIT | A, BNNeT all nergy NYT 7) BONSBIT NT iN A, Hipp DPI | nya sD’ 7, BAAD pH DPN "AI As AAV | wR | ADwAT | savin | } DRAW | win ‘INT Ay AQHA DaNn APN "OINTT 1 BADIA shear RYAN A, By cry mena ean 7 One awh SHDN | A, nap 3DIF ADA yaaDin j» BHAI qapin sma na noi nN? OI 7 ane syn nN n, DNB Ny ry VINE 7) DNB aN pe AM ee pan APIA spn 7 BAPpIA Aopan sAwAN A, DAA win navan saan 7 DAWAN sean smb A. B2OND 2280 nQaNn w22Ny 7. BANDING D2yn ‘AAMT A, AMA N. NNANN AWAD | nAaNAg | AWAD | 7 OAasADA | 7, en* ann sINAD oman moan ria asa] aban 7) DANYDAA ‘ONS A, Dsy¥oni Nyon nyo} UNYOAT ANYON “nap A. Rigpipnis peipnn nan DEP 1» BAe VaRNpHi “HAW A. Aw awinn ngeinn POAIWANT sawn NWA | nOINHI BNI bexni nO AANA Hoenn A. De van nea Bea SABA wai) ry? | I LP, pas Thou ab He nape | Sh | ‘Re | We f.9, pant You sd They my) | 2 A, nabs Thou © snghy | He mp3 | Sie |B ump We £1, BATON) | You mba They vq LA, nash Thou > She = qd | We Pe pat> You T7139 | They TB. |F PBIB | 126 arr She Z om £7, DAM | You IT1D2 | They] ae fA» BBN | Thos THaofi | He rrp |she 2 apa |we £4» BAMBDA | You spon They myn | LA, Ata Thou. ae | He | rye | ste 2 samba we £9, BANDA | You, rah | sO | I A, ANON Thou gona | He | rrgebniy |she 2 aan | we © DAWN You soa | They THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 155 Dap ARS Syke Sey aos apn? yey ot sDyAchy Dy ap sa] FY BN + BBo-ny sina oy aby np yan Nd vp snp ofa bbanr bs Lemmy Syy ingama nan Sona bs aabbon py “mwraoy > ya dwy Sbane Sy sAnoa chan by oman tne yon Sam Sbonen bom jing oa Doing = Nveyi + aye why ID SSTENT APY OYE INTIT 1D BIA aN FMD mms “mbna “aynhmya avin aps “oatby mans nnpdy ardy baynnds syby bbinn> pean se boonyy omy 28 To understand, to contemplate. 29 And Amasa. 30 A way, highway. *! On account of. 9%? NOHDS a sack. °? At first. The accompanying Tables, containing paradigms of the verbs of the several conjugations, are so con- structed, that the student may at one view see the distinguishing characteristic of each conjugation and its several branches. Table XI. contains all the Infinitive and Impera- tive Moods of the eight conjugations. Table XII. contains all the Future Tenses. Table XIII. contains all the Participles. Table XIV. contains all the Past Tenses. 156 THE ETYMOLOGY OF CHAPTH Rs VIE Dousty IMPERFECT VERBS. 189. From the preceding exposition of the He- brew verbs, it appears that the differences between the perfect and imperfect verbs, arise from the latter having either (3), or one of the gwescents °, ), 7, &, as a constituent part of their roots. But the root may have both J and one of the quiescents at the same time, as radicals—as, for instance, NW3 to bear, to carry, to lift up ; QI to stretch out, bend, incline ;—or it may have two guiescents : as, MN to be willing, to consent ; NY! to issue, to go out; NV to fear; 7 to throw, to dart; S32 to come. In such cases, the verbs are said to be doubly imperfect; and they will be subject, at the same time, to the rules specified under the several conjugations to which each letter has a reference. Thus, for instance, the } of 83 will be regulated by the rules laid down under the second conjugation (p. 127), and we shall have for the future RWS (for NWI), and & will be regulated by the rules laid down under the sixth conjugation (p. 142); and hence NWN? with (,) under the second radical, instead of NWN or NN: Thus, likewise, the 8 of 748 will follow the rules of the third conjugation, and we shall, therefore, have in the future MA J shall be willing, NINA, &c.; whilst the 7 will follow the rules of the seventh con- jugation; and we shall have in the past tense, ‘38, MIN in the same manner as from ria, mPa, m3, &c. This will appear still more clear from the following examples, in which the leading words of the several verbs are given, leaving it to the student to fill up the rest by way of exercise. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 157 140. First radical 3, and third &: as, 8W3 to carry. Kal. Inf. abs. NYI.— Cons. S22) or TN, nywa, meiy9, &o.— | Imp. NY, NY &e.— Fut. NYS, &e.—Part. act. SWI, &e. Part. pas. N52}-— Past tense, NY), &e. ANY Niphal. Inf. NWIA to be carried, NWITA, &c.— Limp. NWN, &e.— Fut. NWN, &c.—Part. NW, ANS, &c.— Past tense, Nw, ANYS, NWI, Ke. Prel. Inf. NWI fo exalt, NWID, &c.— Imp. NY, &o.— Fut. SWIX. Part. act. Niv99.— Part. pas. NWID-— Past tense, xiyj—— SANDY, &e. : Pudi. Inf. NY — Fut. NWIN.— Part. NW}-— Past tense, NwY3, ANY, &e. a 7 HHiphil. Inf. SW or NWA to cause to bear.—Imp. NYA-— Fut. NYN-— Part. act. WID-—Part. pas. SWid-—Past tense, SP ONBT, ONBT, NBT, &e. Hophail. Inf. wT — Fut. NUN. — Part. NWTI-—past tense, NWT, ANY—ONBi7: 158 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Hithpael. Inf. NYVIAA to exalt one’s self.—Inmp. NWI — Fut. NIPINN-— Part. NYINI-—Past tense, NYIVI—NNYINI- 141. First radical 3, and third 7 : as, 13 to incline to stretch out. Kal. Inf. mda3—nia3, AwoJa-— Imp. mDd, f- *DI-— Fut. MOS or DS-— Part. act. M013, f. WOI—Part. pas. 10), f. N3-— Past tense, M03, NFbI——*Vb). Niphal. Inf. MbosA——MNIA--— Imp. mQant—fut. WQIS-—Part. m3, f. I-— Past tense, M04, I — 7 3- Vath Inf. MOI—Ni*.— Imp. 191-— Fut. WIS:-—Part. act. MO3.— Part. pas. Mib3%-— Past tense, MJ, NMBI— VB 3- Pudal and Hithpael Need no further explanation, as the former is formed by substi- tuting (+) for the first short vowel of Piel; and the latter, by pre- fixing Nil &e. before Piel, as before directed. Hiphil. Inf. MBA—M A, MBIA-— Imp: mn or Oo). eae Fut. OS or DS, TOA or BA, A, 79 or 09, MJ or 03, * As nipy—nipyd. a THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 159 WA, &e.— Part. act. M1WBla-—Part. pas. N39:— Past tense, NABH, MAM, ke. LTophal. Takes (+) instead of (-) and (.); as, Mut. MQS:— Past tense, Ve 142. First radical 8, and third 7: as, MES to bake. Kal. Inf. FDS—TNEN, MENA:— inp. MBS, f. DN — Fut. ras, MENA, f. °DSA-— Part. act. MeN, f. NDS-— Part. pas. YEN, f. MIDN-— Past tense, NEN, NHES—TVPAN. Niphal. Inf. MES to be baked, NiDNG, MENIa-—Imp. MANS: Part. MaN3: — Past tense, NDS, &e. 143. First radical ', and third %: as, N¥" to go out, SV to fear. Kal. Inf. S3I—DN¥, TANYA; NY—NVA- Ip. S¥, f. ONS, NT, f OND Fut. SBN, NBA, NYS, NPA—Part. act. sui, AN or ANY——ND (like NOD) ANT—Part. pas. NIT, ANI — Past tense, NS, ANYONE, ND, ANT NT, Niphat. Inf. SYN to be feared.—Imp. 8 V1--— Fut. STIS, ST. Part. N33, IN T3-— Past tense, NI—— AS 53- 160 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Hiphil. Inf. NOVIA to cause to come out, to bring out, msi. Imp. S857, OSI Fut. NYIS-—Part. act. NYIS— Part. pas. S8$13-— Past tense, NYG A—— ANNA: Hophal. NBA — Fut. NYAS— Past tense, SS1—— NSA. 144. First radical, *, and third 7: as, 7 to throw, to shoot. Kal. Inf. AVF, PVVA-—Imp. TT f. Fut. TTY. myn, f. "Y— part. act. ny, ae rVy-—Part. pas. Fae. Ff. TEIN.— Past tense, 1) nAv— Ay. Tr’? Niphal Inf. VYAI, HVT: — Imp. mynd or rm Prt-— Put. mys or Ml YS:— Part. act. mini) ie mia: — Part. pas. m3 — 33. Tiphil. Inf VW to throw, shew, instruct, ANA, A NNA-—Jmp. MAA, f. MA Fut. myiN* —Part. act. rryitd-—Part. pas. M9-—Past tense, TIN, AAA AW t- * And without N—NN A, &.; hence W and he shot (2 kings xiii). + Piel would, by analogy, be 7, M7, as we find from ‘7’ to throw, MA, 44%; and Hith, TN similar to TNT he confessed. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 161 145. Second radical }, and third 8; as, 813 to come. Kal. Inf. S\2——S)12-— Imp. S53. f. °83-—Fut. WIS, SAH. Part. 8a, Sa-— Past tense, 8A, ANA—"N3, ON3, N23 Hiphit Inf. S31 or NAT to cause to come, i.e. to bring, NANA, Imp. SAN or NAI-— Fut. NAS:-— Part. act. N99%9.— Part. pas. SSI19-—Past tense, NAT, ANAI—— Nj or INI: Hophal. Inf. S30-— Fut. NTS, SIAN, OSITH-—Past tense, N37, ISIAH ARAA, O&A, ASDA: Irregular Verbs. 146. Irregular verbs are such as do not form their several forms from the same root; as, for instance, ‘msn TL went, Jon one that goes, are formed from the root 7 ri’ The same is the case with the whole of NreHdt, Pret, and Hiraprarn: as, T2203 TL passed away ; ‘maon LT have walked frequently ; ‘moon, &ec. But the Jmperative and Future of Kar, and the whole of Hipnit are formed as if the root was J "thus: > M., my, fis Gi JON LT will go, Jon, isbn &e. yon he made go, i. e. he led.—F ut. pow, pon, &c.—Part. porn, &e. 162 THE ETYMOLOGY OF The same remark will apply to several other verbs ; as, 339 to be good.—Part. 218, 1339, &e.—Past tense, N22, HPO (like verbs of the fifth conjugation), the root is therefore said to be 330: But the future is 20°8, 2D; and Hiram, 2°}, VON (like verbs of the fourth conjugation), the root is therefore said to be 20): Thus, likewise, from the root 14) to fear (fourth conjugation), we have 13 J feared, FH, &e.; but Imp. W3:— Fut. WX, WN, &e. from i (fifth conjugation). From b>) to be able, we have Pay I was able; but future, DDIN TI shall be able, 22h, &c.; which is the future of Hophal, and means, lit. J shall be made able, or I shall be enabled. From Mh’ to drink, we have ‘NY TJ drank, HOS I shall drink. But Hiphil is formed from npy: thus, mpi he caused to drink, MPWS T shall make drink (not THWH, TAVN*), Quadriliteral and Pluriliteral Verbs. 147. Verbs whose roots consist of four letters, are denominated Quadriliterals; those that consist of more than four letters, are denominated Pluriliterals : as, baby to support, maintain ; MOMVIt to linger, delay; delay ; SIND to turn about, to flutter, palpitate. These are, strictly speaking, derivative verbs, and are found only in byp, byp and bysnn. They are inflected in the * To the above may be added, what are by Grammarians called mixed forms: as, for instance, 31 (Psalm viii. 6) in which the first and third vowel shew the word to be in Kat; but the second vowel and the dagesh are the signs of PIL. jy Derived from 213 to contain, comprehend, sustain. { Used only in Hith.: MTN? to stay (Exod. xiii.), probably compounded of 1?) what ; indicative of delay, lingering. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 163 same manner as other verbs: thus, Jnf. and Imp. babp. Fut. a8 Part, act. baba. — Part. pas. bsbai. — Past tense, spbabo. Pual, babs to be supported, maintained, baDoN, &c. ; and Hithpael (by analogy) babana, &e. In the same manner, we have from yore) to delight, take pleasure. Hithpacl, AYOYAOT I have amused myself, took: delight in: and from MIND, YEAR: Exercise. povoy 432087 Bn 729387 YMCA ADH es “PION DAN [NB ODDS TEN “iw DAN 275 ND on) pry ADP ona Sake naw qyos pw 7pbn swiss nisdna my mp cond) sinks 93 enyprioy omeng some cove ond oops ond ga qtay oy NO yoy ony): SAND PONT “ny Dob vambes pot? ody onpwey: Saeed PONT O27 “VND NT DAS) ODN “Np 1 Instead of AXT,—Root A817 2 Root 753, Hiph. 133 to re- cognise.—Hith. to make one’s self appear a stranger, to feign or to pretend not to know. ° MP hard, rough. + To purchase, chiefly food or corn; hence 12¥ and 13 corn. 5 Food, from bay: 6 3t to remember. 7 He dreamed, hence pion a dream. e bi a spy, from ban to travel about on foot, to explore, originally derived from > the foot. 9 Root MN) 1 The nakedness. 1! Root, nov to send. 1% Root, ne. 13 Root, IDX to bind. 1% Root, yna M 164 THE ETYMOLOGY OF emp bu nye °apwin Sys ons“ oRBYYT + DIAN *99N DO TONTTAN OWE "sivy ANT wrowin pys poy DvD ANIA TDN? TMS DMN TORN DD ON :° NT DOyMAN] 1 ODD “PI Ww ANID "957 DANY sayy AMA NOT |INTT MaA] YPN INNA OPA by sss tongs “Sos poms Sy wre NN 273 Noy ody “aonana ivi) "Ay 735997 Ws TN Pa “yA em mya ods oN prby saype axpnm Sy sbxd ogdy satay Non bx? ons yp NS on se mio apron payey xd) aa orgy pipe: abe sonia poe +3 ApH * ypby 3 fiyayeny ope np ory maT) obs © aes pa bscny "oandie apr. oes sorb inks ober emg ond ennds sip Sy why paeeps awinds m2 soyip ach pA bn Oy Bye my “ane s AD to try, to prove 5 Root HD+ 16 A prison, from "OY to guard. 17 Root, WY 18 Root, MM 19 Root, NY to fear. 243 right, honest. 21 Root, sp: 22 Hunger. *3 And they shall be verified. 2% But verily, % DUS to be guilty. 6 Root, AN 27 MW anguish, °%8 Root, 139; in Hith. to beseech, entreat. 29 Root, 73 to exclaim, answer. 30 NDM to sin, 31 Y7 to require. 9% An interpreter. %8 Root 23D: 34 Root, 123 to weep. 35 Root, DW to return. 36 Root, T4¥ to command. 3% Root, nbn to fill. ®pYasack. * Root, }na—Nn- 40 Provision, from T1¥ to hunt. *! Root, 8’: THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 165 Objective Pronominal A ffixes. 148. The objective pronouns me ‘TN thee FNS, JAN. ..., Aim IN, her AMS, &c. (see Table [X.), are very frequently expressed by fragments subjoined to the different parts of the Imperative Mood, Past and Future tenses of verbs transitive: as, °37)2 visit-me, "4212 bless-me, for TPB visit, TIN me; ‘JIB bless, TN me.— IIP2 he-visited me, °4972 he-blessed me, for IPB he visited ‘OX me, ‘TS, JI —PAIPB L-have-visited- thee, for JIN "FATS: — PSS or WMIPAS I-shall-visit- him, for ‘Mis TPES: The following are the terminations by which the objective pronouns are indicated. — ‘3me, J thee,m. 7 thee,f. JorWhim, (ori her. ema yousm:.. |) ow, 1... them, mi) them, f.% 149. The manner in which these are affixed to verbs, and the changes to which the vowel-points of the latter are subject in consequence of the augmen- tation, are exhibited in the following ‘Tables. Obs.—The affixes of the Infinitives and Participles will be found in Table III. p. 56. eee et * These terminations are denominated objective pronominal af- fixes, to distinguish them from the similar affixes which are added to nouns, participles, and infinitives, to denote the pronouns, my, thy, his, &c. (see Table H., I.); and from the terminations *M M, NM, &c., which are used to indicate the personal pronouns, L, thou, &c. M 2 166 THE ETYMOLOGY OF Haxercise. HIAIIN TR BAND AN IY DANY “AI nv oTBNAD :ORN PS 2] PAIN TENA STS SPYA HW VIHIIY Nr) ay pr Wy wey : smb ukae “UN phe IIE 1) *.T22 eee pee Loa ee s Dalal npr ny one SIND BSS a abe ‘ave Abita yay pees N39 nit spa Non: FINN Wy MOND ANI Ws "327 (2 CDN AND : DANY My “mbar NS map aa aman wy onary: sank "Db ns "STRAY Asay. sw) “maya by open soy oxy .ond bron “NI IQ ON + "Aapann 3 pany main ie yp v2 msin Sy : op “snpein : Jan 1 IAN to love. 2% ON to say. 3 How. + 83¥ to hate. 5 Tobe rare, esteemed, 6 Thou art honorable. 7 nba a daughter-in-law. 8 4) to bring forth, to bear children. 9 My husband. 1° Is it not, behold. 11 The end, extremity of. 12 They aremany. 1% Violence. * To forsake. 1° To keep, preserve. 16 83 to guard, watch. 17 733 to honor. 8P30 to embrace. 19PY Hiph. to make drink. 2° n>? to reprove. EB TABLE XV. Verbs with their Objective Pronominal Affives. Kau. | 5 ? them m. DD) 43 us. ry her, 4 in him, I thee, f. ‘| thee, m. J me. | Past Tense. . . f. i9 ¢ you. 1 DPMP. Gps [Wa wpe | pase yma] —) ompp | BATRP] RTP I pR) = —— | =| aR | pp | thou ——]manspe} Dp | ame] — | — armpp | rmpp | show, bape} ype mIpR | PR] TPR) MPR) ampP| ape BAPE | 1 B]NTPE| NTE) AP ANP |aM— NPE | IPE) UME) we) Ape BAP | Ts Depa] = —] TR] MTR] TPR, Te) —— | ape , DTPE) U ipes BITp2 BIIp2 13I7P2 72 WIP! I7p2 *JITP2 WITPD | ITP they pup map| AR) ANE — | AMP you Imperative, bape WIPE MAS Mp | > pe ETE Bp. ape ape | P- WpE “PIPE pp | (7p U manpe DINpE 1371p ATS AVS SIPS Future. DIpES | > BETS | —— Ta, AIP AAA PE | TIPE | PRR) | apa | *BapPD —] span | Maen, ApER | PBA) —— | aap) apa | thou aie — | 93°F meypan | pan] ——] 0 | apa | pan | ous BIpe! | BITRE] WIPER MR. Te AypeY | TRL) TIRE] TIPEY) pee) apes DIpPA 1 BPIPaA) UTIPAA| » » AIpaA) » » NPB) TIPBA| TPeA) pan) span Bp) | 1 BPTI] |e") pba > TPP) TIPRR| TRB] = | pa | 99pBD| neipen| BIE? BIITPH* | 139 7pe? ITs" TPS’ | TIPE? | PPE. | “ga Per HTpBY | they Shall or will visit. you pmpan aren} DID} pan ‘aTpRn Piel and Hiphil. Dp. 7, BIT) wIps APE spe! rape] vipa | app | app | be Dapp | ], BITES FTES TPES | TIPS | TPES — | pei | 1 will, &e. pT pan | 7 DIVPEA | 977 sNT | AYpaT FUPBT | FPR) TPE | a PBT | TBAT | he BYES | 7 Bat PRE) = | Tp pa | TPR) TMPRR| | pba | win TABLE XVI. Imperfect Verbs with their Objective Pronominal Affives. + Bee] ppp] ape moy| oan py) ape} ape | ome | a [ne > apy] T, Dany | anpy mnpy| anp.anpy| np | nee | ape) mgby jane E BER |t — ——| app mnt ie} | | | ey | thon 7 BBW |. Domi ——| Fin APN) > IN) TN) AME EDI | Iwill, &e, 1 BOW | 7, —]} pwn ADA awn sa —} Saw | — DIwA | thou » Bbaly, pads) aba ra Wea] aa] en] taba | aby | he 1 onda} t, Bamba] sana nn23 snag} ana] ana} vada} minha] sme 7» pnd; | q, pgm} = — ADA mvp; yore! pay = —— | omg fag abe}. pe] = — | maha uabar) abae) aba midge | twine. F » BeRin| Baeyin| sap map| an depis| Fann} yepin| saapin| — ois | he » BORIS | BDH Hi BRINN FASSBIWN | FRI, | WSL — HIN | Twill, &e. 7 i i By poy iy ring ny BS V8 *ay MY¥ | he commanded I> ORS B2Re oe yy i — WEN | I will, &e. 1 Ope) BIDVe) VAY pei) Spe) qa | TFET) tae | eT | ne restored 7 BPW) BID | IADR | WPS | FPWR] TPR =< IN | I will, &e. ' Or TANT: * In some instances with (+) under F); as, AYDWT (Josh. ii. 17. Cant. v. 9.) ; IATY (Jer. ii. 27.) which according to rule ought to have been 2AYSWN aa T2)- * Or with 9, *2NT28- * Sometimes with (+) under the third radical: as, 122}? (Prov. viii.) especially in pause: as, 2: * Or 7728, and in pause We 5Or jo: ° When the second or third radical is a guttural then the first receives (;) and the second (+): as, yaw hear me, T mayow hear her, ITITTw anoint him, &c. 7 Sometimes with (.) as, T8) (Prov. iv.) In pause IPOS and with dagesh in 1: as, JSS [ will show thee ; J2IZN J will bless thee. ° Or WIPES or ATP: — Obs. The 7 is sometimes See and compensated by dagesh in 3: as, 127228: So likewise TTTPES or TDTPOS, WIPE, or a TPM, MIPEA or 7 ADIN: 10 Or joI|A- ' Some- times with an additional >: as, IT they shall seek me. 2 Or DybE, abs, So. Dn, sn, &e, So 2D, ‘DBD, TBD, Se. siox, JBON TRE, WTZON, &e. NIP, ANID, TNT, TI, &e, HINT, WON, &e. TT i a oo). ee erie w Leh, | eee) ee a ; 4 ‘ , ee ’ f iM 4 > B ay Mea 1 Re o % ee ras - : ; len ee eae = Se ‘ ame oe 1 » }/ a, I ¥ 7 ’ ‘ 7, ivi Rok ee tit at 7 . , 4 2 . ul ad | | i vile ; wie } oh “ ‘is Ny ~ H | Are t } ul geri i LD ee ae orate fh, eh ; { by! geet eed A ; RO ELE . ae | . ; oe 4 : t j : Psu => ] : ad e i pli | 2 r < pnb te pee 2 | 1 pied oe eae x} ; fee ‘ee FEM, 7 et " - R before-THEE ; ey be- _ fore-HIM. 154. Most of the particles are either nouns in their absolute or constructive state, adjectives, pronouns, or verbs*, used for the pur- pose of modification. Many of them are compounded of several * T do not wish it to be understood that I mean to intimate that particles might not, in their turn, have given birth to other words: on the contrary, I think it highly probable that several adjectives, nouns, and even verbs owe their origin to them. ‘Thus, Nd to be full, Non full, are probably compounded of 2 what N> not, i. e. what will not contain more; |N') to refuse, from M7) and }'® not; m7 calamity from 7 alas! wo! }B to be distracted, to be in a wavering, uncertain state of mind, from {2 perhaps (itself derived from m5 to turn). See Aben Ezra in MIMY, and Kimehi in mw on the word TAX: (Psalm Ixxxviii. 15.) THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 169 words; others are abbreviated or elliptical expressions, or exclama- tions, used for the purpose of soliciting attention: thus— NAY is evidently derived from N¥ time, and means present time ; and hence, now. pp? is evidently the noun 0°35 (the face, countenance, front), in its absolute state, with the prefix 4, and means, literally, to-the-face, and hence, formerly, forwards. 35? is the same noun, in its constructive state, with the prefix 5. and means, literally, to-the-face-of, and hence before. 1B) is the same noun, with the prefix 12, and means, literally, from-the-face-of, or from that which is before, in front ; and as every cause necessarily precedes the effect, this word came to signify cause or because. From the same source are derived, spn (compounded of *9B-ONID) away from, from-the-presence-of ; sp-Oy upon-the- surface-of, Se. Oi to-day, is the noun Ov with the definite 1; lit. this day; and *9 by day, during the day, is evidently derived from the same noun. Sy upon, is derived from my + to ascend. From the same root are derived mbyr upwards, e322 from above, &e. 12 so, is derived from the verb })2 the primary signification of which is, to adapt, to adjust; and hence, to prepare, to establish, to fashion. From {2 are formed j28 zt is so, truly, behold, pe therefore, roby upon this, hence.t * Several other adverbs have this termination: as, =P) with- empty-hands (from P' emptiness, vacuity).—™3n gratuitously, with- out cause (from {1 grace, favour)— This termination, is, however, not peculiar to adverbs, as several nouns have the same: thus, mop a ladder, pe eternity. + Kimchi derives this particle from the noun oY the upper part, which, however, is itself derived from niby- t For further explanation of this particle, see Vindicie Hebraice, page 52. 170 THE ETYMOLOGY OF }N is the constructive form of 8, which signifies non-ewistence, not extant. Its antithesis is &%, which means, actual existence, real being; and hence, “* there-is-in-being, extant, there exists. 20° well, is the infinitive (Hiph.) of the verb 25 to be good, and means, literally, to-make-good. 179 soon, quickly, is the infinitive or imperative of 7D to hasten. 125 go to! is a derivative from 2? to give, yield. MDS where, is compounded of ‘8, a particle of interrogation, and 7B here; and 128, 13S how, of 8, and 13 thus. ya is compounded of ) what, and YIN (or, according to Kimchi from 1 and Yl) literally, what is known? what is the motive or impelling cause? From 4?) comes likewise m9, literally, to what, i.e. for what purpose? and 3 how many? how long? literally, as-what, i.e. as what number? as what time ? M2 here, 13 hence, are compounded of the demonstrative OJ this, and the separable particles 1 and ®, lit, in this, from this: the word place being understood. 155. There are, indeed, many particles—as for instance, xb not, }, M3 behold! ND when, TSX if, provided, &c.—whose etymology is less obvious; for which reason, it may be supposed, they have been considered by some grammarians as primitives. It is however, very probable, that even these are deriva- tives. Thus, NS is probably derived from ny, to be weary, to be exhausted, to labour in vain; and hence * In Chaldaic M8, Syriac Aj, Arabic Us|. In these languages it is used negatively my, Nn”? (compounded of NP and NS) there ts not. In Hebrew, however, we find it only once (Psalm cxxxy.) used in combination with the negative particle "8 (Psalm exxxy. 17) ; and then it is a pleonasm, as |S already expresses the notion of non-existence, THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. bars; |} axon beyond, far off, out of reach. 4}, M37, NI are probably mere exclamations for the purpose of soli- citing attention; ‘IV when, at what time? appears to be a compound of M2 what and TY time ; and O8 ¢f (Gif needs we must have a triliteral for a root) is, perhaps, derived from DAN to be attached, related, connected*. 156. The great influence which these words have in discourse, as well as their frequent occurrence. renders it highly desirable that the student should become familiar with their general signification. For this purpose the following list, containing most of the particles not already noticed, is here subjoined :— * The primary signification of the primitive, from which this and several other words are derived, appears to be correlativeness, of the reciprocal relations between distinct objects, neither of which could exist in a perfect state, or, in some instances, even be con- ceived without the other: as, for example, 0&8, the female parent, the mother; MP8 the truth, i.e, the exact conformity of human conceptions with the real nature of things, and between our thoughts and words or actions. And hence the secondary meaning of union, attachment, accompaniment, integrity, completeness, per- fection, &c., as found in the following words, DIN, DIN?, MON a nation, kingdom, OY a people; MY an associate neighbour ; M'dyv corresponding ; my? towards, opposite; T8A to entwine, OOXN twins, OS a foster-father, NOS a foster-mother, OM innocent, com- plete, upright, DN perfect; P28, NWN faith, confidence, adherence. Hence, likewise, the particle DY with (accompaniment), and ON 7f (attach, or add, as a condition). Thus, ‘mDoM MPD") ‘nl ON if thou wilt go with me, then will I go, 7. e. attach as a condition of my going, that thou go with me; or the condition on which my going depends, is thy accompanying me. 172 THE ETYMOLOGY OF less, indeed. NAN | rT MN: SN > ah! woe! alas ! na. A Iw—in, IN or, or—either sboyye perhaps, suppose. pois surely, verily. nN TN sins sae ake be- MSINN backwards. mee after, behind, be- IN yond. pnb. DN slowly, softly. IBN: MUN 'N where, where now? MIN: MIS 7s ae Nb. ONS DN bg, Nt n0, Not. NEN now, then. > Eb by if Loy BN 2, when. xb-ox if not, unless. DION truly. VRS then, at that time. how, in what man- ner 2 only, scarcely, but woe to me! last night. bax fs yet, neverthe- rms: |S whither. 2 ND NON pray, particles o entreaty. Di ANS also, even, likewise. 5 AN se much more. how much less. DEN except, only. bux near, close by. Lins Ginn | yesterday. sien ofthe objective a TN me, TN &e. AN, AN with, with me. bona on account of, for “ay2 the sake. ie between. by not, without. pba unless, without, not. syba save, besides.” "J enough. MINT aha! exultation. nibn hither, here. raw) much. [IM besides, without. D7 not yet, before. ia m33 75 15 Ne if, for, that, together, united. thus, so. because, but. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. defies: ‘DD as, thereabouts. sb alone, only, besides. ah would! I wish, , perhaps. nd were it_not. MSS” Gates SND very. IND since. PND whence MD within. yn without, externally. 55 by95 ee against, to- wards. NW WD to-morrow. ta) below, doumwards. sendy beneath. DYN a little, few. YI bYD very little. miy>, 39 before, opposite VAD round about. “TY, TY until, till. Ny again. rN Ty che how long. MOY man “IY until now. DY with me. apy because. m5 here. “MN MB unanimously. DYD once. DOyb twice. DINND suddenly. DP”) emptily . Oe nae min nw there, thither. PPA beneath, enstead. “TOI constantly, always. Yeu | Dy cAy exe CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 157. Syntax is that part of Grammar which treats of the significance of the inflections of words com- bined with their relative positions. By the method adopted in the preceding part of this work, many of the syntactical rules have necessarily been anticipated. These we shall here collect, and add such as have not already been noticed. But before we proceed, we think it advisable to make some general remarks on the nature of propositions and their con- stituent parts. 158. ) ts Aa jer ge of (the) host-of Bb ER OS oe the) king-of Syria, was a great Ga gy nn a, PAIN NDI WN BNA (ns) The a a ee ee cup eens ee ar was found, he shall be a slave. TAY TT Na a | 180. Obs.1.—The several words forming a complex term may be either so many names for the same object, which is thus, as it were, presented, for the sake of distinction, under different points of view: such, for instance, are the several words, I, thy-father-in-law, Jethro, (the subject of Prop. a.) and the words David the king (the predicate of Prop. B.): or the several words may be names of dif- ferent objects, between which there may subsist one of those nume- rous relations denoted in many languages by the genitive case, and by the possessive case,+ or the preposition of in English ; such, for instance, are the words which represent the subject and predicate of Prop. c. Now, when the first happens to take place, the several words are said to be in apposition, and must agree in case, that is, they must be in the same case in which the leading word happens to be. But when the second happens to take place, one of the words is said to govern the other in the genitive ; and in Hebrew, the word which is defined must be in a state of construction (Art.52), to dis- tinguish it from the defining word or words: thus, "209 (not p90): * 7.e. Merciful Kings. + It is almost needless to observe, that possession is but one of the numerous relations denoted by this case. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 183 The student will likewise observe that this mode of construction is often used, where, in English, we should use an adjective (epithet) as the qualifying word: thus, 1D/] 13019 kings of mercy, instead of merciful kings. 181. Obs. 2—In Prop. pb. the words representing the subject are of a mixed nature, and one of those representing the predicate is an adjective (epithet). 182. Obs. 3.—In Prop. x. the leading word WN is defined by a proposition. In such cases the leading word must be followed by the relative WY, or by its equivalents 9, Y (Art. 95, 100). 183. Obs. 4.—In all complex propositions, a distinction may be made between the grammatical and the logical subject. Thus, the grammatical subject, or the Nominative of the last example (Prop. E.) is, the man. But the logical subject is, the man in whose hand the cup was found. ‘The remark is equally applicable to the pre- dicate. 184. From the preceding observations, it appears that when two or more words come together, they may form either an entire proposition, or only a part of one. Now, as the copula is frequently omitted, the student may often be at a loss to distinguish between the one and the other. The following considerations will, however, remove every difficulty. The several words are either all indefinite ; or they are all dejinite; or some are indefinite, and others definite. Rutz I.—When the words are all indefinite, or all definite (without the copula), they form only a part of the proposition: thus— | 184. THE SYNTAX OF All Indefinite. nyo TWN A woman a widow, 1. e. a widow woman. iD YN A man good, i. e. a good man. nam Mw YIN A land good and extensive, i.e. a good and ex- tensive land. All Definite. npoNT NWN The woman the widow, i. e. the widow woman.* YT WNT The man the good, i.e. the good man. laa) mea YISI The land the good and the extensive, i. e. the good and the extensive land. joan nics Solomon the king. ny WNT The man the this, i.e. this man. npxn DWINT The men the these, i. e. these men. AINA WA The man the goer, i. e, the man that goes. Rute I1.—But when one of the words is definite, and the other ¢ndefinite, then the definite term, whether simple or complex, is the subject, and the indefinite term is the predicate ; thus— * mages MW The woman (is a) widow. WNT JD or WDWNA The man (is) good, or good is the man. Nan AY PIN The land (is) good and extensive. WNT MW This (is) the man +. WINNT nbs These (are) the men. Win WX The man goes. * See the several examples—Art. 86, 98, 101, and the exercises which accompany them. + When the subject is a pronoun, the predicate may be either de- finite or indefinite: as, ON ARN thou (art a) man, VT ARS thou (art) the man, MSI 2 who (is) the man, M8 72 what (is) man ? THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 185 Rue. [11.—In case two definite terms are to form a proposition, the copula must be inserted : thus,— j¥3> "AN 817 BM and Ham was the father of Canaan* (Gen. ix. 18); 3n2pn) neo ody miyy minboy S77 ory And and the tables were (the) work of God, and the writing was (the) writing of God} (Ex. soc, 16). 185. Propositions are likewise divided into Af- firmative and Negative. An Affirmative proposition is that in which the copula, whether expressed or understood, is not af- fected by a negative particle{, as in most of the preceding examples. » * Compare the phrase {¥22 *AN Of Ham the father of Canaan, in verse 22, where it forms only a part of a sentence. + The copula is, however, even in such cases, omitted, when no ambiguity can arise from the omission: as, apy Dip PI the voice is (the) voice of Jacob; ‘N33 NiI20 the daughters (are) my daughters. It is likewise frequently omitted in the poetical books of Scripture, where the style is intentionally concise and elliptical. t A proposition may contain one or more negatives, and yet be affirmative, provided the negative does not affect the copula. Thus, Blessed (is) the man that walketh not in the counsel of the ungodly, nor standeth in the way of sinners, &c. &c. (Ps. i.1,2), is an af- firmative proposition ; being equivalent to, The man who walketh not in the counsel of, &c., &c., is blessed. 186 THE SYNTAX OF 186. A Negative proposition is that in which the copula is affected by one of the negative particles, ps, 82, 28, 93, N22 187. Obs.—These particles are not synonymous, though they all express negation. PS indicates the non-existence of the subject, and is therefore chiefly used before nouns and participles, and in combination with the personal pronouns: thus, “2a ADI PS Joseph was not in the pit (Gen. xxxvii. 29), lit. Joseph existed not, &e. ; 1328 1237 the child is not (Gen. xxx.), lit. the child, he exists not, or ws not here; jan po? 103 °38 J will not give you straw (Ex. v. 10), lit. Z am not a giver of straw to you. N> indicates the non-existence of the predicate, and is therefore chiefly used before verbs in the past and future: as, }D2 N? he gave not, 1. ND he shall not give; thus, DX N>) DIN TAN signifies, thou arta man, and not a god; whereas bs PR would signify, and there is no God. 52 has the same signification as Nd, but is chiefly used in poetry. ON is chiefly used for exhorting, entreating, and wishing ; and is therefore only used before verbs in the future. n23 is chiefly used before infinitives. Subordinate Members of a Proposition. 188. The words explained in the preceding pages, belong either to the subject or to the predicate, of which they form a constituent part. But a proposition may contain several other words, which, though they form neither a part of the one, nor of the other, are yet THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 187 necessary to complete the sense* : such, for instance, are the words ymsbo-ny, and 2373, in the follow- ing sentence, 1774 yoy-Sany NIN) and he slew all his brethren with the sword. Such likewise are the words ‘Many —nin wxd—nvxd in the following verse—WN> man weed comm) cman TF gave my daughter to this man for a wife. These are generally denominated the complements or the subordinate parts of a proposition ; and, like the principal parts, they may either be definite or indefinite, complex or %in- complea. 189. Obs. 1.—The subordinate members are, in some languages, distinguished from the more essential parts by particular termina- tions (cases). In Hebrew, they are indicated by the prefixes 1, zh aes: and by the particle NS (Art. 40, 41). Or, as in English, by pre- positions. 190. Obs. 2.—The subordinate parts are chiefly regulated by the nature of the predicate and its signification. For when the predicate is an active transitive verb, it must be accompanied by a word or words on which the action falls (the objective NS); and when it de- notes causative action (Hiphil), it often requires two objective cases. If it signify giving, delivering, restoring, &c., it will require both an objective and a dative case (5 or ON), If it imply motion, the place where the motion begins, or from which it originates (j or ) and where it terminates ( > or bs or TY) must often be expressed. * This will generally be the case when the judgment or aflirma- tion of the mind respects an event, incident, or contingent act ; or briefly, in narrative sentences. 188 THE SYNTAX OF 191. Obs. 3.—Sometimes we wish to express the instrument with which (2), the purpose for which (5), or the place and time in which (3) the action is performed, or the intention or remission of the action or attribute (ADVERBS), and so on with regard to a variety of other circumstances, all of which must be considered as so many subordinate parts of a proposition. 192. Obs. 4.—Amongst these, may likewise be reckoned all words and phrases which are apparently superfluous (PLEONASMS), but which are introduced either for the purpose of additional explana- tion, emphasis, or amplification: as IDIN JANI) and-she-saw him, the child, i.e. and she saw it, namely, the child (Exod. ii. 6) ; M22 SA 1338 9238 J, I am your comforter, i.e. J, even I, am, Ke. (Isa. Bae “aby xb MPP. 37 sing, O barren! who never bore, (Isa. liv. 1); inh xd) cand comby, ey mee and-L-will-set mine eye against them for evil, and not for good (Amos ix. 4). 193. Obs.5.—The reverse of this grammatical figure is ELLIPsIs, by which some word or phrase is omitted, which must, however, be supplied by the reader, in order to complete the regular or full construction.* Of the omission of the copula we have already given numerous examples. The following are examples of the omission of other words; Dippn was wT) BAN TbNd NY he-feared to-say — my-sister — lest-the-men-of—the-place—should-kill-me (Gen. xxvi. 7), where the words S’) she-is, and VS °3 for-he-said, must be supplied: 0°21'\—32¥ thine eyes (are)—doves, supply the word * This species of ellipsis must not be confounded with the ellipsis of parallelism, and which may, by way of distinction, be called me- trical ellipsis. The latter is entirely artificial, and consists in omitting in every alternate line a corresponding word or phrase used in the first lime. We have a perfect specimen of this species of poetical composition in the hundred and fourteenth Psalm: but this is not the place to enlarge on such a subject. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 189 ‘Y eyes-of (Cant.i. 15); ININA—WN) jw Ido eat-ye each— his-vine, and-each—his fig-tree, &c., supply the word 2 the Sruit of (2 Kings xviii. 31); MYY—MmNt mn what (ts) this (that) thou- hast-done, supply WS (Gen. iii. 13); JIN m3 map aPS 2Y (Gen. Xxvill.) supply (2) 723 i the house of; 4372) ‘1 nx) (Gen. xliv. 25), supply (12) 82) and from ; NIP YD VON (Ps. xvi. 17), supply (2) °23 with my mouth ; TY) DIS (Ps. exiv. 8), supply (5) Dix? into a pool-of. The student will do well to impress the preceding remarks on his mind, as many apparent obscurities and anomalies are entirely owing to the omission of some word or inflection,* which may, however, be easily supplied by the context. CHAPTER II. SYNTAX OF THE Noun. 194. The definite J (p. 35), is used like the in Eng- lish, to direct the attention to a particular individual, or to particular individuals, known either by their universality, or pre-eminence, as having been pre- viously mentioned, or as described by some circum- stance ; as, DYOYM the heaven, ANT the light (Gen. 1.); WIDIDT the sanctuary (Lev. xii.4); W¥? WW DINT the man whom he had formed (Gen. ii. 8). 195. The article is omitted:—Ist, before proper nouns :—2nd, before nouns in a state of construc- * See Kimchi’s MICHLOL, pp. 57, 58. 190 THE SYNTAX OF tion* (See Art. 55):—8rd, before nouns having any of the possessive pronominal affixest (p. 42); be- cause, as in all these cases the noun is already known to refer to particular individuals, the article would be superfluous. 196. Obs. 1.—Some proper names of countries, cities, &c., do, however, sometimes take the article: as, yom the Gilead}, * There are apparently some exceptions to this rule; as, for in- stance, TW monka into the tent of Sarah (Gen. xxiv. 67); Oya NS I2 the God of Beth-el (Gen. xxxi. 13); M37 JONI the ark of the covenant (Josh. iii. 14):—but these are elliptical expres- sions, in which the real noun in construction is omitted: thus, my Ook monka into the tent, namely, (the) tent of Sarah, Osa oN na 58 the God, namely, the God of Bethel. + ‘aNT NZ (Josh. vii. 21), WNIIIA (2 Kings xv. 16), and a few others are exceptions. t Most of the proper names were originally historical, or com- memorative; as, sya GALEED, l.e. heap of witness, from b: a heap, a mound, and TY a witness; BY Mizpen, i.e. a watching-place, from BY to look out, to watch (See Gen. xxxi. 47, 48, 49) ; 293 GILGAL, from bb: to roll away, remove (Josh. v. 9); or they were epithetical, 1.e. expressive of some distinguishing quality; as, aa? the white mountain; MD) the high city or place. In either case, they include a common name; and hence we see the reason why they dre sometimes used with, and sometimes without the article, accord- ing as they refer to the place alone, or in combination with the circumstance from which the name is derived. In most cases, however, the common name is omitted; thus, syoan for y?3 VHS or sya YRS, in the same manner as we say, ‘The Thames,’ for ‘The River Thames.’ THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 191 Osban the Gilgal, Hapa the Lebanon, {IV the Jordan*. (See the Notes.) 197. Obs. 2.—The article is used, though omitted in English, when the noun stands for the whole species or kind; as, DIN1 py ONY mn looks to the eyest (1 Sam. xvi. 7), Hebrew, the man. 198. It is likewise used occasionally before nouns in the voca- tive: as, ONDYT ANNI give ear, O ye heavens! lit. give ye ear, the heavens ! 199. Itis placed before adjectives and demonstrative pronouns, to distinguish the epithet and definite from the predicate (see Art. 86, 98, 184); and before participles not having any of the possessive pronominal affixes, instead of the relative pronoun (Art. 100). 200. When, therefore, a participle has the definite 3 and a pro- nominal affix, the latter must be rendered in English by the corre- sponding objective pronoun; thus, 72y099 who caused THEE to go up (Dent. xx. 1); Deyon who caused THEM to go up ? (Isa. lxiii. 11). Repetition of the Article. 201. The article must be repeated before every noun{ belonging to the same part of a proposition: thus, MAT) Mm pawnn) pm MPN these are * This word (77) is generally derived from 1 to descend ; but it is probably a compound of WN’ river, and }3 Dan, the name of a place near its source. ‘+ z.e. On the outward appearance. t Except where the noun is already defined (Art. 193). See the words NWN 31 and 7M MD WIN in the next page. 199 THE SYNTAX OF the statutes and judgments and laws (Levit. xxvi. 46) Hesrew, the judgments and the laws*. syix oan? Sram nym Oa amy Apa pt (Josh. vi. 24.) ¢ PIT MVD [a) DAA MAM py ND ws mA nips (Dent. vii 1992 AMBIT PNT) API 202. This rule is equally applicable to the prefixes and affixes ; and it matters not whether some of the nouns are in construction or in apposition : thus— iapp mop dz ny) inva oy) bs ns) 2 Syyowirnsy Daas NPY And Abraham took Ishmael his son, and all that were born in his house, and all that were bought with his money, &c. (Gen. xvii. 23). Obs.— When the first of several terms in apposition is a proper name, the prefix, &c., is placed before the first, and omitted before the rest, as in the preceding example, 133 beyny ns: But when the proper name stands after the other terms, then the prefix, &e., must be repeated before each of the terms: thus, Sxynvirny Dany his son, namely, Ishmael ; ‘wy *TTND to my lord, to Esau (Gen, XXXil. 0) ony ns — yon ISMN NIP (Gen. xxii. 2). Additional Examples. (Gen. xi 1): Pay mgr ymbines awe aba Gen, xiii. 2.) ¢ IVD) FADIA Mp3 TN 733 DIAN) “nis) +YDIPAY smpae-nyy oycnye paving * The untranslated verses are inserted by way of exercise. + The particle N& is, however, sometimes omitted : especially THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 193 (Gx xe 1) g SINT MUTA PATS Yep by pisemby minga-Sy qepa pions nb PRs Poa zoe BOYNE Mp) + ANN pins a) 55 nna py) Ex, wi 1-7) spy (Dent. xxiv. 2.) mindy) CASE. 203. The Nominative may be known, as in other languages, by its being the subject of the proposition. Obs. 1.—When the predicate is a passive verb, the objective is sometimes used instead of the nominative: as, WD MN away and Moses was brought back (Exod. x. 8); OS MS jf} let this land be given (Num. xxxii.5); because, though the words n¥1D and 787 are the subjects, they are nevertheless the objects of the several actions. 204. Obs.2.—The nominative is often found as if it were de- tached from the rest of the sentence; in which case it is called the Nominative Absolute: as, ~OS ay) PIT Wk the man of power, to him belongs the earth(Job xxii, 8), i.e. as to the mighty man, his is the earth; DAIS! TAS HN) 2 as to summer and winter, thou hast made them (Psalm lxxiv. 17). 205. The Genitive is indicated by placing the where no ambiguity can arise from the omission. Compare the above-cited passage with PNA ywAP Wo», &c. (Ex. xxxix. 33). Compare, likewise, Lev. xi. 13, with Deut. xiv. 12. 194 THE SYNTAX OF noun which is defined* in a state of construction (Art. .51,.61). The defined word may be denominated the antece- dent}, and the defining term the consequent. Thus, in the following examples, 129 na (a) daughter of (a) | king, Wn j2 (the) son of the king, 122 NDS (the) terror of (a) kingt, OY °22D kings of nations, At Wt a border-of gold, * We have already observed (Art. 36, 53) that the vague signifi- cation of common nouns is often defined by adding to them another word (or words) expressive of the material of which they are formed: as, D2 NWP (a) dish of silver, i.e. a silver dish; ora 9 vessels of iron, i.e. tron vessels—or the use for which they are intended ; as monon by instruments of war, nban 3 a house of prayer ;— or by mentioning the person to whom they belong ; as, yon ma (the) house of the king, 3PY* bak (the) tent of Jacob ;—or the object of which they form a part: as, 40 WN the top of the mountain ; W232i °B the mouth of the well; and, in short, by adding a word expressive of any of those numerous relations which subsist between objects—as cause and effect, agent and patient, the whole and its parts, &c., &c., and vice versa. Now, in all such cases, the word which is defined must be placed before that which is to define it. + The ANTECEDENT is denominated by Hebrew Grammarians, WD] or PMD, ie. that which is supported; the CoNSEQUENT is termed 21D the supporter. t This mode of expression is, in most languages, liable to ambi- guity ; for the terror of the king, may either mean the terror with which he is affected, or the terror with which he inspires others. It is the same with respect to the possessive affixes: OD2N19 your fear (Gen. ix. 2), signifies the fear which others will have for you, and is therefore properly rendered in the Established Version the fear of you: but the same word in Isaiah viii. 13, signifies the Being eT a A” THE HEBREW LANGUAGE: 195 i.e. a golden border,—the words M3, {2, NDS, 1300, and VW, are the antecedents, and 712!2, 1190, Ov2Y, and ANT are the consequenis. 206. The antecedent must be an zndefinite* term; and therefore it cannot be a pronoun, nor a proper name, nor a noun having the definite 7 (Art. 194) or a pronominal affix. When therefore a pronominal affix is required, it must be added to the consequent ; thus, 22 J (the) son-of thy-son, PITS “IY (the) servants-of thy-master, WVaITP *22 (the) instruments-of las war (for his instruments of war), wap WI (the) mountain-of my-holiness (for, my holy mountainf ). 207. The antecedent may be an adjective, the sub- stantive being understood (Art.164); as, W8F M5 m. INA MD! f beautiful of form, i.e. one of beautiful form; MSV NI good of appearance, i.e. of good appearance ; whom you ought to fear. Thus likewise ‘812 my fear may signify the fear with which I am affected; but mw in Malachi i. 6, signifies the fear (reverence) due to me. The context will, however, gene- rally show in what sense the words are to be understood. * Because if it were definite it would require no further definition. + It is in this manner that the Hebrew often uses nouns instead of adjectives. When, however, a real adjective is used, the pro- nominal affix must be added to the noun, as 7139p M2 my-daughter the-little, 1.e. my little daughter. 196 THE SYNTAX OF nd Pap great of strength, i.e. of great strength; or a participle, as aly may (the) broken-of-heart, i.e. the broken-hearted ; JW ‘AY (the) sitters of darkness, i.e. those that sit (dwell) in darkness ; PY$°2V (the) pur- suers (followers) of righteousness, i.e. those that follow righteousness; MT? WPAd (the) seekers of the Lord, i.e. those that seek the Lord*; or it may be an infinitive: as, DEW MWY to-do justice, i.e. (the) doing of justice ; DMS Nav (the) sitting of brothers, i.e. when brothers sit; MIWA MX¥3 in-(the)-going out-of the year, i.e. at the end of the year. 208. The consequent may consist of any word capable of defining the antecedent ; it may therefore be a demonstrative pronoun ; as, MPNTYY (the) doer of these (things), 1.e. whoever does so (Ps. xv. 5) :—or it may be a relative pronoun (Art.182) expressed or understood; as, DY “ADN ADI “Ws Eph (the) place where Joseph was bound (Gen. xl. 3); NS [ws] may FY a language (which) [ know not (Ps. Ixxxi. 5). 209. The consequent is sometimes preceded by a preposition; Assit i by in (the) walkers-of upon the way, i.e. those that walk on the way; V8P2 NNQYD as joy-of in harvest, i.e. as the joy of — * From the numerous examples given above, it is evident that the state of construction cannot always be expressed in English by the possessive case, or by the preposition of. In translating such phrases, recourse must therefore be had to such turns of expression as are agreeable to the idiom of the language. y THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 197 (men) in harvest. But such phrases are either elliptical, as in the last example; or they are idiomatic expressions, in which the state of construction is used for the absolute state, merely to facilitate the pronunciation of the complex terms. Of the same character are the following words, N22 19) the river of Euphrates; WOT 33 as wine that is good (Cant. vill.), i.e. as good wine; Ost2¥3_ 302 pleasant plants (Isa. xvii. 10). 210. The absolute state is sometimes used instead of the con- structive; as, {28 DYNO (xed. xxviii. 17) for J2N "NO rows of stone*; NOX OVS (Prov. xx. 21) for NO¥ WS words of truth. Cer, a I a a Ah DTN Ey Me at late 211. Several words in construction may follow each other; as, PINT DY YS 50 (the) heart-of (the chiefs) of (the) people-of the land, Ww xS7wa- “by MM the spirit-of (the) whole-of (the) flesh-of man (Job xil.), 1. e. the spirit of every living being. In such cases each of the intermediate terms is consequent and antecedent at the same time; consequent to the preceding word, and antecedent to that which comes after it; thus, in the first example, the word WNT is the con- sequent of 5 and. the antecedent of 09; and DY is the consequent of WN]: and the antecedent of PNT — MAS wR we mds (Gen. xxv. 6); tondyorrva may, maxdp Sn tag (1 Chron. ix. 13). * Some grammarians think that words of this description are in apposition, similar to nouns denoting weight, measure, time, &c.; DD ODD two talents (of) silver; O WY TB an ephah (of) barley; others are of opinion that they are elliptical, the real consequent being omitted; thus, MON WS ED O8 words, namely, words of truth, &c., in the same manner as we find that the antecedent is sometimes omitted: thus, TAS NIT (Dan. ix.) for Myton wins 02 198 THE SYNTAX OF 212. A noun in a state of construction, followed by the same noun in the plural, is often used to express the superlative degree; thus, D391 122 King of kings, i.e. the greatest of kings; OAV, T2Y a slave of slaves, i.e. the most abject of slaves; DWIPI WIP (Exod. xxvii. 34); DMD MY (1 Kings viii. 28). Dative. 213. The dative case is indicated by the prefix y or by the preposition by (Art. 40, p. 87). 214. ‘The sign of the dative is often used instead of the genitive to express the relation of property or possession; as, wr? ja OS) (1 Sam. xvi. 18) J have seen a son (belonging) to Jesse, i.e. Jesse’s son ; sy 12 a Psalm to David, i.e. of David. The 9 is fre- quently preceded by WS; as, WAN? WS JNSD My MN32 on (Gen. xxix. 9); and Rachel came with the sheep which (belonged) to her father, i.e. with her father’s sheep; pears’ man nop (2 Kings v. 9); binwi “WN DIT VAN (1 Sam. xxi. 8). Objective Case. 215. The olyective is indicated by the particle M8 or FAS (Art. 41); but it is used only when the noun is in a definite state*; and even then it is frequently omitted. When this takes place, or when the noun is used indefinitely, the objective may be known by its * By the definite state is meant, when the noun has the definite i, or one of the possessive pronominal affixes; or when it is in a state of construction, or when it is a proper name. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 199 position after the verb*, which is either expressed or understood; as, YIT8 TAY) IN TWD }2 (Mal. i. 6.). Ablative and Vocative Case. 216. The Abdblative case is indicated by the pre- fixes, 2 in, with, &c. Dor {2 from (Art. 40). 217. ‘The Hebrew has no particular form for the Vocative ; but it may easily be known by the general sense of the sentence: — Compare 513) TIN7.O'3 Ps. civ. 3. with v. 5. of the same chapter, DIN YD oO 4D AND: NUMBER. 218. Generic terms of the singular number are often used to express the entire species; as:— * In the inverted style, where both the nominative and objective are often placed before or after the verb, they may be distinguished from each other by the agreement of the verb with the former. Thus, in the following example, som) m3 WD (Prov. iii.35), though both the objective and nominative precede the verb, yet it is evident that B°D30 wise (men), which is in the plural, must be the nominative, because the verb yon) they inherit, agrees with it; and 723 must be the objective ; for were it the nominative, the verb must have been in the singular, ony’: So likewise in the following verse, TY yw nnion (Psa. xxxiv.) though both the nominative and objective follow the verb, yet it is evident that 737 evil, f. must be the nominative, because the verb NNVOM she slays, which is likewise feminine, agress with it; whereas YY being masculine, would require the verb Nn 200 THE SYNTAX OF any? AWAD (Gen. vi. 20) of the fowl after his kind, i.e. of fowls after their kind; and I have MBO, IBY) JNX Wom WwW an ox, and an ass, and sheep, and a man servant, and a female servant (Gen. xxxil. 5), 1. e. oxen, asses, &e. This is especially the case with patronymics ; as, "WONT the Amorite, *3933'3 the Canaanite, 1. e. the Amorites, the Canaanites ; Days ST and Israel saw, i. e. and the Israelites saw. 219. Nouns which occur only in the plural or dual form (Art. 47): as, DB, ON, OYD*, drop the in the genitive, and take the plural pronominal affixes (p. 42), even when they are used in the sense of the singular: thus, 0°33 the countenance, face, or faces, gen, OVI920 138 the faces of the cherubim; 31930 123 the face of the cherub ; *1B (not *22) my face, 123 thy face, §c., ONO life, g. NM the life of, "0 (not %0) my life, 10 his life, &e.+ 220. The plural of nouns expressing dignity and majesty is generally used instead of the singular ; thus :— PIS, p. DIS, Lord ; PIN, p. 248% Lord-of ; ‘8 my Lord (to * The genitive of 5% water or waters, is 2 or 2) ; but the second 1) must be retained’ when the word is used with pronominal affixes : thus, 1D 7D") Wo": + Words of this description have their adjectives, pronouns, and verbs mostly in the plural: as, Dwi DD holy water; OY) OI an angry countenance; 0°37, 0%) AN¥* (Num. xx.11); 72) %) ANN (Num. xx. 13). The agreement in such instances is merely formal. Sometimes, however, they have their adjectives, verbs, &c., in the singular number. (See Num. xix. 13; 1 Sam.iv.16; Isa. xxx. 20). t This is denominated pluralis excellentie, because it does not actually indicate plurality, but great dignity: so, likewise, P72 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 201 distinguish it from *]%$ Lorp, applied only to the Divine Being) ; ITS my Lords. ‘The rest of the plural affixes are used for the singular: as, 727% thy Lord (not JAX); YON his Lord (not ITN), IYI, &, ; Sya a master, superior, possessor, veya his master ; mova her master*. The word DTN, soy, THON, IPN, &c., though they have plural terminations, are often used with verbs, pronouns, &c., of the singular number, and must be rendered in the singular, when applied to the Divine Being: as, Diy S12 God created, Ties Nan he is thy Godt. But when these words are applied to heathen deities, they may be rendered either in the singular or plural number, one: thus, Woy wind (Judg. xi.24) Chemosh thy God; 7 bs var oe (Gen. xxxi. 32) thy Gods. In the latter case, the adjectives, verbs, &c., are always expressed in the plural: as, O08 DON strange Gods ; 329) "WN torrie» spray NPN (Exod. xxxii. 1.4). eo ee ‘. ve Repetition of Nouns. 221. The same noun is sometimes repeated :— lst.—To indicate emphasis and effect : as, 717 PT¥ PY (Deut. xvi. 20) justice, justice thou shalt follow, i.e. let it be thy thy Creator ; TLY thy Maker ; these are, however, very seldom used in this form. * But bya my husband master ; bya her husband, are used in the singular. + There are indeed examples where onos occurs with plural verbs and plural adjectives, &c., but even then it is generally accompanied by some word indicating unity: thus, in Gen.i. 26. xi. 7., the verbs ears . nvy2 M72 are plural, yet the verbs WN" 7" are in the singular. In Josh. xxiv. 19. though the adjective DWP is in the plural, the accompanying pronoun §847 is in the sigular, 902 THE SYNTAX OF constant am; %32 °23 DioviaN (2 Sam. xviii. 33) O Absalom my son, my son!i—~OS PIS PIS (er. xxii. 29) O earth, earth, earth, hear the word of the Lord! 2Qnd.—To indicate multitude: WON Na MNa own pry (Gen. xiv. 10). and the vale of Siddim (was) pits, pits, slime, 1. e. full of slime pits; DVI BVH (Exod. vill. 10) heaps, heaps, i.e. a great many heaps. 8rd.—To denote distribution : as, 7722 7733 (Exod. xxxii. 3) in the morning, in the morning, i.e. every morning; oy oY day day, i. e. every day, or daily. 4th.—To denote diversity; in which case, the second noun takes (1); as (Deut. xxv. 18) thou shalt not have in thy bag j281 JAN a stone and a stone, i. e. divers weights; Va3T, 2) 393 (Isa. ‘x12. 3) with heart and heart they speak, i.e. they speak with duplity. CHAPTER IIL. ADJECTIVES. 222. Adjectives are used either as qualifying words (Art. 83, 84), or as predicates (Art. 86). In either case, they generally agree with their substantives in gender and number (Art. 86). 223. Adjectives are frequently used without their substantives: as, 030 a wise, (man) O30 wise (men), N23 wise (women), 3) a tender (woman), &c. 224. In such cases, the adjective assumes the character of a noun, and is often susceptible of the same variations: D3 1230 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 203 the wise-(men) of nations, 1230, his wise-(men), P30 the wise-(men), yon his great-(men), mon her great (men). Degrees of Comparison. 225. Having already described (Art. 87) how the several degrees of comparison are expressed, we have only to add the following observations :— 1st,—That reciprocal comparison is denoted be the repetition of the 3, before the compared words: thus 732 OM, signifies the people are like the priest; but }73D OY TT? signifies the people are like the priest, and the priest ts like the people. 2nd.—That the superlative is often indicated—( a ) by repeating the adjective: as POY Pio deep deep, i.e. very deep; WX 1 yr 2p (Prov. xx. 14) bad, bad, says the buyer, i.e. the buyer says (before the purchase is made) it is very bad:—(B) by adding the word TN might, strength, very, or TWD IND very, very, i. e. eaceed- ingly good :—(c) by adding one of the names of God—rpi3 me DON? a city great to God, i.e. a very great city; ON 1 moun- tains of God*; ON TS cedars of God, i.e. the highest mountains, the loftiest cedars + ;—(D) by the repetition of the noun (See Art. 212)t; DDL WLP King of kings, DVBY. TW. slave of slaves. NUMERALS. 226. “AS and MON are always placed after the * Intensity is often denoted in the same manner: as, my-nanow a flame of God,i.e. a vehement flame ; MOEN a darkness of God, i.e. very great darkness. + The positive, in a state of construction, or with the article, is sometimes used for the superlative: as, 122 JOP the least of his children, {OPI WA NN and David was the smallest. t In such cases the noun must be in the plural. r)4 THE SYNTAX OF name of the thing numbered, and take the definite 4 when the noun is used definitely: as, THN wp one board, WAST WIP the one board ; MIS M3 one camp, NAST MANS the one camp. 927. The rest of the cardinal numbers mostly precede their nouns, and never take the definite 1, except as explained hereafter: thus DIN °20 or YIN DY two men, WIN *W or DYINT DIY the two men ; Dep ney twenty boards, DwpT my the twenty boards. (See Exod. xl. 12, 11; xh. 4, 7, 2024, 26527.) Obs. 1.—The numerals are placed generally after the nouns when several things are specified and enumerated: as, (Gen. xxx. 13— 15) and he took of that which came to his hand 13) a present, &c. (consisting of) DINN OMY she-goats, two hundred, Dey yen and he-goats, twenty; OND pn ewes, two hundred, Dos} ony and rams, twenty, &c. &c. (see likewise Num. vii. 13—88 ; XXVil. Xxix. xxxl. 21—45)*: or when the numeral is the predicate: as, OMY OPIN OwY OD NY, (Exod. xxxviii. 10) their pillars (were) twenty, and their sockets (were) twenty. 2.—The numerals receive the definite article when they refer to a number previously mentioned, or otherwise known, especially when the noun is omitted:+ as, D'YDINT the forty, DYYA, WYN (Gen. xviii. 29, 82), NWOMINN D321) NYAIN (Gen. xiv. 9), TAN (Gen. xix. 9; xln, 27),j * In such cases, the article is sometimes repeated before each of the numerals: as, DANN) Dyavny nvowin (Num. iii. 46). + In the composite numbers from 11 to 20, we find the definite sometimes before the decimal or before the noun: thus, O° by DoS WPN-DIINA WY DAY NS (Josh. iv. 4. 20). THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 205 Obs. 3.—The cardinal numbers from 2 to 10 require plural nouns with which the numerals must agree in gender: as, ‘Y or DY D2 two sons; ‘AY or NB EY two daughters; OMI nya seven boys, NWS yay seven girls, ED? mo by ten days, DW ayy ten women*, 4.— Above ten the name of the thing numbered may be either in the singular or plural: as, 01) WY IMS eleven day, i. e. days (Deut.i.2); D'2DD WY INS eleven — stars (Gen. xxxvii. 8) +; OY MWY NON thirteen cities, TW mey MON eleven years; ony my voy) or TY my wow thirteen cities; Odo bY DWP or WIP DWY twenty boards; MDS AND or NaN AND a hundred cubits; WS Hoss a thousand men; DB ON a thousand horsemen. 5.—From eleven to twenty, the less number must precede the greater, without an intervening (1). (See Cardinal Numbers, p. 91). But from twenty and above, it is immaterial which comes first, but the 1 must be added: thus, [Wy IHN or TAN) COMYY one- and-twenty. 6.—TN2 a hundred (cons. N82, p. NXP, dual, HNN two hundred), though of the common gender, requires, on account of its feminine termination, the units which precede its plural (MN), to be of the cons. fem.: thus, MIND vow three hundred (not * The agreement in gender takes place equally from ten to twenty: as, [22 WY MYON fifteen sons; NI2 MMYY won jifteen daughters. But the numerals from twenty and above are common to both genders; the units, however, which are joined to them follow the genders of the noun: thus WN OY yaw, VY DAL DPD Ns + In this respect we must be guided by scriptural usage: for though we find DY Wy Ins, ws BN, yet it would not be correct to say 2333 WY INN, or 12 428: 206 THE SYNTAX OF voy nor TOY nor NiND now); ANF NIND WY six hundred thousand (not Mwy): 7 Obs. 7.—Fo¥ a thousand (plural, mynd thousands); dual, DYBON two thousand (cons. ‘DON) ; though it is common to both genders, yet being considered as of the masculine gender, requires the plural termination D’-, and the cons. 7. units, from 3000 to 10,000 both inclusive: as, DDN nerow three thousandst+; MWY. O° ‘DON ten thousands; but above that number, FON is used instead of DISS: thus, AON WY IW or AY TWITDW twelve thousand; aS: Wy Mww sixteen thousand ; sos ony) Dw or mney FON D2 twenty-two thousand. 8.—The word FON is sometimes repeated: as, MiNQ vy ISDN nwigny FON pyaw AON six hundred and seventy-five thousand. This is likewise the case with the word M2: as, pw yaw mow Dy wy IW ON one hundred year, and twenty year, and seven years, i. e. one hundred and twenty-seven years. 9.—Some of the cardinal numbers take the pronominal affixes: as, 13Y }2 (Gen. xxxi. 37) betwixt us two (both); Dyamy ow at (Gen, ii. 25) and they were both naked; panvoy (Num. xii. 4) ye three; 7) veoya Siew man M2372 (1 Sam. xviii. 8) Saul hath slain his thousands, and Dawid his ten thousands. * Particular attention must be paid to the insertion or the omis- sion of }: thus, for instance, in the above number, if a } were added to sON, thus APN) Mint? WY the number would stand for 600 + 1000=1600. It would amount to the same were we to reverse the order and insert 1, thus MIND VY ON ;. but, HON nix wy without 1, stands for 600 x 1000=600,000. Thus likewise ON D'AN! is two hundred thousand; but BPS DAN or E]!nN15 HON is one thousand two hundred. + There are a few exceptions to these rules, especially in the later Hebrew. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. pairs ‘Obs. 10.—Several of the numerals (besides mY and mony) have a dual form, to express the addition of the same quantity; as, DAYDIS fourfold, OINYAY sevenfold. 11.—When the cardinal numbers are used distributively, they are repeated without the conjunctive 1; as, DY O'Y two two i.e. two and two, or by twos; TYIY AYIY seven seven, i.e. by sevens. 12.—The cardinal numbers are sometimes used to express the adverbs OYB once, D’DYE twice, &c.; as, DAY NO} nox &? (2 Kings vi. 10) not once, nor twice ;* AYA) OYA (Gen. iv. 24) seven and seventy fold, or times. 228. The ordinal numbers extend only to ten. Above this number, the cardinals are used to express them. (Art. 91, p. 93.) 229. Like other adjectives, they follow their nouns with which they agree in genderf, and they ‘take the definite when the noun is used definitely; thus, Y j2 @ second son, yi wim the second month ; * These adverbs are, however, more generally expressed by the word OYE once, ONDER twice, DDE wows or Dy voy) three times, ema) )01>) aya a thousand tunes, E2%vB yay my yay seven years seven times, i.e. forty-nine years; or by 0°22 (from 312 to number) ene par © + The ordinals Hw, TIN, agree likewise in number; as, DWI DD the first days, MIVNI NWSI the first (former) troubles ; MISA mye man yay MN the first seven fat kine. 908 THE SYNTAX OF wrowin WIMa in the third month ;* menoyin mwa in the third year. 230. The cardinals IM, NOS are frequently used for the ordi- nals Hw, MWS, and the noun is sometimes omitted: as, THXa wn? (Gen. villi. 5) on the first (day) of the month, lit. in one (day) to the month; WIN? TNONa prea mw Nise wey nos|a mn (Gen. vill. 13) and tt came to pass in the six hundredth and first year, in the first (month), the first (day) of the month: so likewise *?WYa (ibid. v. 5) in the tenth (month). CHAPTER IV. PRONOUNS. 231. The distinct pronouns, as well as the pro- nominal affixes, are often introduced for the sake of emphasis, explanation, &c., (Art. 192) together with the nouns for which they stand: as, 25h ab man ps NR DS (Gen. xxii. 20) behold Milcha, she has also born children ; 33199 528m 85 yoy ao nyAN yyAY (Gen. ii. 17) and of the tree of knowledge of good and evil, thou shalt not eat of it; TIT) NTA AS aN (Exod. xxxv. 5) lit. he shall bring her (it) the offering * TY movies signifies the third part of a year (Art. 92). + Some of the ordinals are used in the plural, the noun being omitted: as, DMY (for DY second (stories) ; pei) (for Dias) third (stories). (See Gen. vi. 15.) eee THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 209 of the Lord, i. e. he shall bring it, namely, the offering of the Lord. 232. For the same purpose, or by way of antithesis, are the distinct pronouns introduced, together with the verbs in which they are in- cluded: as, (Gen. xxi. 24) and Abraham said 1258 yaws ee. lit. J, J-will-swear ; “man mals IN Nd) (Job xxxiv. 33), lit. thou, thou-shalt choose but not T; “YH AAS) {aN man CBs! cus 2 yealit. they, they-shall-perish, but thou, thou shalt endure. Obs.—The distinct pronoun thus repeated, must be in the nomi- native, in whatev er case the other pronouns may happen to be: as, 12° a) Nin D3 ny (Gen. iv. 26) and to Seth, to him also (Heb. he—not 5) there was born a son; vaN 8 Di 2373 (Gen, xxvii. 38) bless me, even me (Heb. even J, not MS) O my father !—TM IN 37 nAN (Gen. xlix. 8) lit. Judah, thou, they-shall praise thee, thy brethren, i.e. but thou, O Judah! thy brethren shall prase thee, this being the antithesis of Cursed be their anger, in the pre- ceding verse. 933. When a pronoun is the subject of a sentence, and the pre- dicate is either a noun, adjective, or participle (not a verb), it in- cludes the copula: as, M7) 38 I (am) the Lord; OHS DY thou art naked. (See Art. 162.) 234, The nominative pronouns of the third person are often used as demonstrative pronouns GCATt Ao Tee I G)a5 they are likewise used for the word same: as, 22M S17 (Gen. ii. 18) the same that com- passeth ; WNT NT (Gen. xxiv. 44) the same is the woman; MP} oman (Gen. vi. 4). 210 THE SYNTAX OF 235. The objective pronominal affixes can, strictly speaking, be only joined to transitive verbs ; never- theless we find some instances in which they are found with intransitive verbs: as, ¥7 73 ND evil cannot dwell (with) thee (Ps. v. 4) 3 PpPY"1 and they- cried (to) thee (Neh. ix. 28); ‘3FM) thow hast given (to) me Josh. xv. 19) ; *INS they are gone (from) me (Jer. x. 20). 236. The relative pronoun WN is not susceptible of any variation (Art. 99). It admits, however, of the prefixes 4, ?, 3, 1, namely, when the antecedent is omitted ; as in the following examples :— (Gen-xxi.17.) DY ST WAND TIT Sip ny MN yaw 19 For God has heard the voice of the lad in which he ts there, 1. e. in the place in which, &e. (Gen. xxvii. 4.) (ANN WN DY 5 myy. Make unto me savoury meat as which TI love, i.e. such (savoury meat) as that, &e. (Gen. xiii. 16.) yg Sy awd “198 And he said to-who was (appointed) over his house,i. e. to the man who was appointed, or the ruler who, &c. (Rath ii. 9.) Taya payy” “WND mene And thou shalt drink from which, 1. e. from (the water which) the young men will draw. 237. The relative is sometimes omitted: as, ond Nd {S83 (Gen. xv. 13) an a land which (belongs) not to them. (See Art. 193.) THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. ya tat 238. The adjective pronouts, each, every, either, any, one, none, one another, whoever, Sc. S§c., for which the Hebrew has no distinct words, are chiefly ex- pressed by the repetition of the noun (Art. 221), or bv periphrastic expressions, consisting of the words US man, 73 all, 1274 a thing, in combination with some word or phrase (see the following examples). (Gen. xv. 10.) Sa MIPS Hana we TAN And he placed each aa one against another f. (Genexxxiv. 25.) an USP" And they took each his sword. (Exod. xvi. 29.) Wepre prs sy See YAMA wy ay Abide ye every man in his place, let no man} go out of his place. (Exod. xxxiv. 3.) SY Oy wy Da Bey Moy) NO wi) And no man shall come up with thee, neither let any man be seen. (Gen. xlv. 1.) sby19 BrS-OD IWS Cause every one to go out from me. (Gen. axiit.6.) AO) NO-—y319m Wy None of us shall withhold §. (Exod. xxx. 33.) mhz ney WS LS Whosoever || compoundeth any like it. (Exod. x. 24.) YAMA WS AP Nd) pmycmas wre ND They saw not one another, neither rose any one from his place. * lit. His piece. ft lit. His neighbour. — f lit. Let not any man go out. § lit. A man of us shail not. || Jit. Any man who shall, &c. @ lit. They saw not a man his brother. Feminine mining Oy TWN (Cen xXvi. 3). 912 THE SYNTAX OF (Gen. iv. 15.) ine mb Whosoever slays Cain. (Exod. xx. 10.) naxdps bs nyyn sib Thou shalt not do any work. bes an hs 5 every thing; “3% vib nothing ; bs \ss nothing whatever. 239. The reflex pronouns, myself, thyself, ¥c., are mostly expressed by the form Hithpael. Sometimes however, they are indicated by the word WEI soul, DSY bone, substance, or by some other word indicative of a part of the human body: as, Wp) IMS he that loves himself ; mala) by VP they had decreed for themselves; THM TY BYY2in the selfsame day ; napa my PISM and Sarah laughed within herself. Obs.—In a few instances we find the objective pronouns used in- stead of the reflex: thus, DD'S DYIT ayM and the shepherds fed themselves (Ezek. xxxiv. 5); Ya on Dynes 93 Ow AND (Exod. v. 19). | GHA ATE kaa: VERBS. The verb M7 is used :-— lst.—To express absolute existence: as, 77 77 mm) IM the Lord was, is, and shall be. * But naxdpods nyyn NP would signify thou shalt not do the whole of the work, and would imply that part of it might be done. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 218 2nd.—To represent the copula in propositions relating to past and future time (Art. 162, 168). 3rd.—To denote past or future* possession ; in which case it is accompanied by the dative pronouns, or by the sign of the dative > and is then equivalent bom DDD ON many sons were to him,i.e. he had many children; > Wi? DM olive trees shall be to thee, i.e. thou shalt or wilt have ; nisbyi Mm BID Solomon had a vineyard yt. — to the English verb to have: as, Ath—To mark transition from one state or condi- tion into another: as, nano 1 at shall become a ser- pent ; yan "I and it became a serpent (Exod. vii. 9, OS Disb MN she has become tributaryt (Lam. i. 1); mag mp omg mms mas: ob my yp teelee 240. Obs. 1.—With participles, it is mostly used to indicate past or future continued action: as, TY 77 4D (Gen. xxxvil. 2) oes * Present possession is commonly indicated by the dative pro- nouns, the copula being omitted: as, nia ony v NII behold now, I have two daughters ; 1 We 53 whatsoever thou hast (Gen. max, )2): or by W.-W there is; as, 27 sboyis (Gen. xxxiil.) I have enough; Pt 2X8 Mow. :ny is aN OD. vn (Gen. xliv). See the various examples in Part I. p. 94. + Sometimes, however, the verb is omitted: as, N32 NNW mp) and she had an Egyptian handmaid (Gen. xvi. 1). t The S is omitted when the noun has the prefixe soeenasy MIND mot (lam. 1.1) she ts become as a widow; DIST jn 13921) INS 730 (Gen. ili. 22). P2 9214 THE SYNTAX OF Joseph wasfeeding the flock, §c. ; naw DYAIN IAW! DY 7 O37 (Num. xiv. 22) and your children shall be feeding (wandering) in the wilderness forty years ; myn vn p30 (Job i. 14) the oxen were ploughing: 33NM ny JSS My AYT My My (Exod. iii, 1): OMDT- DD TyTN Ds ONLI TN (Sam. xviii. 29). 241. Obs. 2.—Before infinitives having the prefix = it has the same force as the adverb about, indicating any approaching event : as, Ni9 wiown 7) (Gen. xv. 12) and the sun was about to go down, i. e. and tt was about the time when the sun was going down; nip? Ww Mm (Josh. ii. 5) and it was about the shutting of the gate, or when the gate was to be shut+. 242. Obs. 3. troduction of a narrative, or in the middle of a discourse ; and must Lastly, it is often used impersonally, at the in- then be rendered by tt happened, it shall happen, it came to pass, gc.: as, E)! YR 1 (Gen. iv. 3) and it came to pass after some days that, §c.: TINT ADR INP °D 7M) (Gen. xii. 12) and it shall come to pass, when the Egyptians shall see thee, that, §c.: DIN NBD Gen. v.14): PS WR WwW MBA MIM (Gen. xxiv. 14). * The verb 1%) is, however, frequently omitted : as, DPN m7) NBN (Gen. i.1) and the spirit of God OD was moving (brood- ing): Onsacnns 3B) NIN) (Gen. xviii. 1) for JY TT NIN): nyeb) nb (Ibid. 10) for ny! ANY my! + apyrMy Man’ mp (Gen. xxv. 28). + Various idiomatic expressions, which cannot be rendered lite- rally into English, are formed by this verb and the infinitive: as, (Deut. xxxi.7) and I will lide my fuce from them boyd. Mia) and they shall be devoured, lit. and he shall be to eat, i.e. he shall be an object of prey to any one. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 21 TENSES. Present Tense. 243. Hebrew verbs have no form whereby present tume can be indicated. The progress of an action at the time of speaking can, therefore, only be in- ferred from the juxtaposition of the participles (verbal nouns* or names of the agents and patients), with their respective swlyects, in the same manner as is done in nominal propositions (Art. 169) relating to present time: thus, 238 ‘38 I (am) loving, or I love IAN TAN thou (art) loved ; Jn BAS Abraham (is) walking. (See Art. 124. Obs. 4). 244. Obs.—In the same manner as nominal propositions may be expressed in the past and in the futwre by the aid of the verb mM to be (Art. 162); so likewise may verbal propositions: as, my iD DY (Gen. xxvii. 2) Joseph WAS FEEDING ; Thy mn WN DYN (Eze. xlili.6) @ man WAS STANDING near me; yrbs mn m7 (Jud. xi. 14) the Lord SHALL BE HESRING (See Art. 240). * Hence it is that these words are varied by gender, even when they are used to express the first person of the present tense: as, InN IN m., nagx 8 f. I love: whereas no such distinction is made in the past and future tenses, ‘IPB, TPES, ‘NADY, AANY, being common to both genders. Hence, likewise, the reason why, in the present tense, the subject and predicate must be expressed in separate words; whereas in the past and future tenses, they are expressed in one word, when the subject happens to be a pronoun. 216 THE SYNTAX OF 245. But the verb to be is often omitted*, especially when the time may be known from the context, or from some word which marks the time: as, (Gen.i.2) and the earth ND} was without form and void; and darkness (was) upon the face of the deep; and the spirit of God TMT) (was) brooding upon, &.; AVY IN (Gen. xviii. 1) and he (was) sitting ; QV NIN) (Ibid.) and he (was) standing; 281 1238 “M2 (Exod. xvii. 9) to-morrow I shall be standing; M28 WD S31) 7 (Exod. x. 5). Past and future Tenses. 246. The past and future tenses are indicated by the form of the verb. The past by the afjizes, the future by prefixes (Art. 116—117): as, mI, sibs. But either of these tenses having the prefix } and, which shows that they are connected with a preced- ing verb, must be construed in the same time (and frequently in the same mood) in which the preceding verb happens to be: thus, TON he said, VW28) SIP. he called and said; but, preceded by a future, it must be rendered in the future; asin Gen. xlvi. 33, and it shall come to pass VOX) my poo sp" ‘> when Pharaoh SHALL CALL you and SHALL sAyf; thus * Many grammarians, not attending to this circumstance, have been led into the erroneous opinion that participles are capable of representing all the tenses. Nothing is, however, more common in Hebrew than the ellipsis of the verb to be. + The principle upon which this and the following rules are founded, appears to be this—that the conjunction 1 joins the same moods and tenses; nor will this appear so strange when it is THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 21a likewise, AVON thou didst say; FIRS) FDI thou hast spoken and said; but PIOS8):-24* speak, and say; FV) BWA thou shalt speak, and shalt say. 247. Obs. 1.—The } receives in. both cases (:), (.), or shurek for its vowel-point}. It is the same with the future tense: thus, 1128" signifies they shall or will say; 28") (Deut. xxxii. 7) ask ..and they will say, but 1VIN,,.482 (Exod. v. 1) signifies, they came and samp; WOR) (Ezek. iii. 15) and J shall say, but W28) ‘F123 (Exod. iii. 16, 17) signifies, I have visited and I wave saw; V2S' he shall say, V2") and he samt. (See Art 119.) 248. Obs. 2.—When a future is thus used to express past time, the prefix } has always the vowel point (-) with dagesh in the fol- lowing letter, or (,) when the following letter does not admit dagesh considered that the } often supplies the place of subjects, predicates, and even negative particles, when either of them have been mentioned in a preceding member of a sentence. * In such cases, the accent of the first and second person singu- lar is removed to the ultimate syllable: as, ‘27-7271; except verbs whose third radical is a quiescent letter: as, DNS, YS). + Except when the accent happens to come immediately after 1; 1) which may be rendered, and he shall live, or he did live (see et XX1. 0,0), t The accent is, in such cases, removed to the penultimate, pro- vided neither dagesh kazak, nor sh’va final succeeds such vowel, and the word is not in pause ; otherwise the accent retains its place: as, “iw, wa, 28): It is owing to the removal of the accent that the final long vowel of verbs is sometimes changed into a short vowel: thus 3p, 2Y, Jip'—op*}, IW, 3D": and for the same aeyee ‘. reason the radical M of verbs of the Sixth Conjugation is dropped: thus, 72}.—]391: TANT NW 218 THE SYNTAX OF (see the preceding examples); whereas the conjunctive } has always (:), (.), or shurek for its vowel point (see note, p. 38). 249. Obs. 3.—This tense is often found at the beginning of chapters and books (as in Gen. ii. vi. vil. Levit.i. &c.), where, of course, no other verb can precede it; but this occurs only in his- torical narratives, which necessarily refer to past time, and where no mistake can possibly arise. Besides, the vowel of the } fully indicates, in all such instances, that the verb must be construed in the past. 250. Obs.4.—These converted tenses are never used unless preceded by the prefix 1; in every other instance, the sémple past and the simple future are used. 251. Obs. 5.—Hence it is that in the converted tenses the verbs must precede their subjects: as, DTN 12N) (Gen. i. 3) and he said God, i.e. and God said; TYIB WX) (Exod. xiv. 8) and he shall say, Pharaoh, i.e. and Pharaoh shall say; (13 28); WWI 1798) (Num.v.): but the simple tenses may have their subjects bofore or after them: thus, pide N72 (Gen.i.1). he created namely, God, i.e. God created; NDI PIS (ibid. 2) and the earth was; 2B? *DNDD “I. (Exod. XxXxXii./2c)auem WB ab» ‘DNDN (Exod. xxxii.34) mine angel shall go before thee. 252. Obs. 6.—There is no difference whatever in point of sig- nification between the simple and converted tenses. Those that represent the past are used for the Imperfect, Perfect, and Plu- perfect. OS may, therefore, be rendered—he said, he HAs said, he ap said: so likewise 28'* may be rendered—and he sam, * The predominant sense of this converted tense is that of the Imperfect. It is mostly used in narratives, for which reason it is denominated by some grammarians, the historical tense. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 219 and he HAs said and he wap said. The context alone can deter- mine in which of these three senses either of the verbs are used. It is the same with the future tenses: as, VW2N’ he shall say, VS) and he shall say; Vi}. they shall be, 7) and they shall be. (See Art. 255.) 253. Obs. 7.—When the same verb occurs twice in the same sentence*, and the clauses are in opposition, the first takes com- monly the converted form, and the second the simple form : as, mp ome qvindy nt vind comby eb (Gen. i. 5, 8, 10); MIs Tay ma ppy iy ays San oh (Gen. iv. 2); see v. 3—4 4—5, of the same chapter, and xi. 3, xxxv. 19, &c. Furure, oNA m3 was 22 “wa DonpsN1 (Lev. xxvi. 29); Nan yy Dp Wi) Apyy M28 AMM (Ibid. 833.—See likewise v. 42, and Num. v. 17.—Deut. xxviii. 12, 18). 254. The following passages in which the same verbs are con- strued differently, according as they are preceded by a past or by a future tense, are inserted here for the purpose of still further eluci- dating the preceding remarks respecting the tenses. Examples of verbs of the past with the prefix } Examples of verbs assuming a future significa- retaining their past signification, inconsequence tion in consequence of being preceded by a of their being preceded by a simple past tense. simple future or by an imperative. Fut. F Ny sop) NOI past. past. : 6 Sut. : TN FAY PINE A es] BE NNT, Das yRe Ty (Job i. 1.) , " (Gen. xvii. 5.) c. fut. imp. eee 1 np (Gen. vi. 21.) * Or even in two consecutive verses, as in Gen. Iv. 4, 9. a 220 as : ast. ond Sxyqtay bay si73 (2 Kings XxXy. 27, 29.) : past. pit Paes alae wets See AEP you apy") (Gen. xxxiv. 5.) Examples of future verbs assuming a past signification, in consequence of being preceded by a simple past tense. Cc. past. c. past. past. ' PSTN] PHIL NT I BN (Judg. xii. 2--4.) THE SYNTAX OF c. fut. ; Sut. siya Sosy mommy Ne (Gen. xl. 19.) , subjune. subjunc. ox) mpd) ty now 3 (Gen. iii. 22.) Pm) pw aN YD ABANY (Num. xxx. 5. 4. Examples.of verbs in the future having the prefix §, and yet retaining their future significa- tion, on account of being preceded by a simple future Or an imperative. Sut. Fut. MSN) NI” mas; (Gen. xviii. 21.) Sut. fut. imp. maayy nds) '398 mE Judg. xi. 37.) Su Sut. am -box-boapy m3 (Exod. Ke 12.) Use and Application of the Tenses, c. past. c. past. past. MOANMN) DIN) naw Shana * DY ANY (Neh. 1. 4—5.) C. past. c. past. c. past. past. past. Sem. DDD Syy-nby bon) (Exod. x. 14, 15.) DATA, The predominant use of the Tenses is the same in Hebrew as in other languages, viz. — * It has already been observed that the participle with the verb to be expresses continued or repeated action. + For bopnid 778}, as nothing is more common in Hebrew than the ellipsis of the verb 7'7: THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. pase The present indicates the conjoined existence of the subject and predicate at the time of speaking, and, of course, that the action is in a progressive state* as, 28? mS yap oy> nby omy wg mn = 72> (Exod. xviii. 14) What (ts) this thing that thou doest (art doing) to the people? Why sittest thou (art thou sitting) alone? —227 mb ‘D2 yt IN (Gen. xxi. 13) My lord knoweth that the children are tender (young) ; DN Da) Jy m3 pS jah Dats yay mam) sy 135 (Exod. v. 16). The Pasr Tenses are used to represent the conjoint existence of the subject and predicate at a time prior to that of speaking, without expressing whether the time is completely passed, and the action is completely finished or not, nor whether it has any reference to another point of time specified in the sentence; these must be inferred from the contextf: as, "3 mi) a7 WN “i> mim by TON SWND Men (Gen. xxi. 1) And the Lord visited Sarah as he had said, and the Lord did unto Sarah as he had spoken; * This appears to be the characteristic of the active participles, and therefore all the tenses which are compounded of them, whether the verb to be is expressed or understood, indicate the action in a state of progress. + The want of distinct forms for the subdivisions of the past, occa- sions no difficulty whatever; for the same circumstances which, in other languages, induce a writer or speaker to make use of either of the subdivisions, easily show in what sense the Hebrew past is to be understood. 222 THE: SYNTAX OF HYMN MNIY AYN TPP (Zech. x. 3) The Lord of hosts hath visited his flock; 92 AND MW2 NYRY *3 YN MA? WP (Ruth i. 6) Mor she had heard in the field (country) of Moab, that the Lord had visited his people. The Furure is used to indicate the conjoint existence of the subject and predicate in a time subse- quent to that of speaking*: as, FYI TWA (Gen. xy. 13) thy seed will be a stranger ; MINN NJIA TAN) map nwa TApA nibvia (Gen. xv.15) and thou shalt come to thy fathers in peace, thou shalt be buried im a good old age; "8" FIN TPE maw pyaw ppp mM (Isa. xxiii. 17) and it shall come to pass after the end of seventy years, that the Lord will visit Tyre; TOS "STD phy WED ioyden Oy pry eS FANS aN WLM the enemy said, I will pursue, I will over- take, I will divide the spoil: my desire shall be satisfied upon themt; I will draw my sword, my hand shall destroy themt (Exod. xv. 9). * Some grammarians consider this tense as an aorist, others as a present tense; but though this form of the verb is used in some in- stances to express present time, yet there can be no doubt that its predominant use is to express future time. It has, therefore, very justly been considered by the ancient grammarians, as well as by Gesenius, as a future tense. + Literally, my soul shall be full of them; i.e. my soul shall be satiated with vengeance. t We have here a beautiful specimen of the jigure which rhetori- cians call asyndetgn. The inspired poet, by omitting the conjunctive THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 225 256. ‘The Hebrews use their present tense where in English we commonly use the imperfect : 1st.—In imagery, or in the recital of dreams and visions, when the narrator represents a past occurrence, in the same manner as he, or the person of whom he speaks, originally saw it, and as if it were still present to him. Such recitals are generally introduced by the word 3/}) and behold, being an invitation to the hearer to place himself in the same situation: as, T3748 asi DPD M7137), mon ia DH oy codes endo mam mp mein yin ied) (Gen. Xxvill. 12) lit. And he dreamed, and behold, a ladder placed upon the earth, and its top reaching towards heaven ; and behold, angels of God ascending and descending upon tt. (See also Gen. xl. xli.) oyop avin monn pian pim mora mm ay min. man ; mn vypna ND wy MIT WS) mim mora xb ita sad + TTP 4 TWO Sip UST TON min Wea xb WN wy WIS} (1 Kings xix. 11—13.) PAATINS VIB aya SDN yw lit. And behold, the Lord passing by, and a great and strong wind disjoming mountains, and shivering rocks before the Lord; not in the wind (is) the Lord; and after the wind an earthquake ; not in the earthquake (is) the Lord: and after the earthquake a fire; not in the fire Gs) the Lord; and after the fire a still soft voice*. And when Elijah heard it, he wrapped his fuce in his mantle, &e. 1 before each verb, marks not only the vehemence of the passion with which the Egyptians where animated, but likewise the ease and the rapidity with which they imagined they could satisfy their thirst of vengeance. (Compare Cesar’s vent, vidi, vict.) Nor is the next passage less beautiful: D2 WDD ANNA Mav a breath of air from the Lord was sufficient to blast all these towering hopes, and to annt- hilate the proud boasters. * It was the voice of Mercy,—the gentle voice of Truth which is never heard amidst destroying elements. Well might the holy 224 THE SYNTAX OF 257. 2nd.—When a whole phrase is used as explanatory of a preceding verb, or as its objective case, and the phrase indi- cates an action or event, or circumstance which existed at a time contemporary with that which is denoted by the preceding verb: as, (Gen. iii. 7) AYE and they knew (not V1 DYDNY, 92 | that they were naked) but BF BWM, °D that they are naked*, because that which they knew was not their past condition, but their condition at the time when they attained this knowledget; rag? N77 MyONND Dd XM (Ruth i. 18) lit. And she saw that she is persisting to go; DIA "ay wr 2 APY 8 (Gen. xlii. 1) lit. and Jasob saw that there is corn, &c. So likewise, 737) SV yoy pasa ovo meow (Gen. xviii. 1) And he saw, and behold, three men are standing by him (not stood), because the two circum- stances happened at the same time. 258. The Present Tense is used in Hebrew, in some cases where we use In English the future: viz. prophet, contrasting his own burning zeal with the soothing voice of Divine Mercy, ‘hide his face in a mantle.” 'The sublimity of this passage, and the moral truths to be drawn from it, need scarcely be pointed out to the student. * Accustomed as we are in modern language to relate all past events in the historical tense, such phraseology appears very strange: it is nevertheless very correct in a logical point of view. t+ When the attained knowledge is of any thing past or future, then these respective tenses are used: as, DDN ap 29 ys (Gen. viii, 11); Opa doa 1 AY wy MS PT (Gen. ix. 24); ND °D phe ym mq) 19 (Gen. xxxviii. 9). { The word & is never employed in the past, yet, for the reason before stated, the authors of the Established Version have rendered it by the imperfect wus. In the next verse, however, “we D ApOY D’¥92 12Y which they justly considered as a quotation, they have preserved its original meaning: thus, L have heard that there is, &c. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. B95 when the future event is fast approaching, and is certain to occur; or where the future time is marked by some other word or phrase: thus, 738 OM ‘2 (Gen. xix. 13) For we will destroy, Heb. for we are destroying—are about to destroy; MYA’ Wy oi 7a) ODD °DIN (Gen. vii. 4) Hor yet seven days, and I will cause it to rain, Heb. J cause it to rain, the time being already specified by nyaw ay ont ‘): 259. Obs.—We sometimes make use of the present tense in English not exactly to denote the present moment, but as a general expression: as when we say I love my country, he loves his children, &c. In such cases, the Hebrew uses mostly the past tense, though sometimes the future or present: thus, (Exod. xxi.5) Should the servant say, I love my master, &c. Heb. ‘HAIN J have loved; (Gen. xxxi. 6) and ye know that with all my power, &c. Heb. AYN, ye have known; (Gen. xxvii. 2) behold now, I am old, I know not, &c. Heb. *F4pt—*Ay No. (1 Kings ui. 7) J know not how to go out, or to come in, Heb. 18 n> fut. 260. Events that occur frequently, and habitual actions, are generally expressed in Hebrew by the future tense, though in English we use in such cases the past: thus, (Gen. 11. 6) But a mist went up, Heb. ry? WS) and a mist shall go up 1.e. a mist continued to ascend repeatedly, often; (Num. ix. 16) So it was always, the cloud covered it, Jc. Heb. MM {2 so at used to be, P2* tI¥N the cloud used to cover it. In the same sense ought all the verbs that occur in Num. ix. 16—23 (such as 37', YB’ &c.) to be 226 THE SYNTAX OF understood. So likewise (Job i. 5) thus did Job, Heb. mwvy he continued to do, did so repeatedly. 261. The future is likewise sometimes used for the past, or the present, after the words 18 then, DD not yet: as, YY TN (Exod. xv.) then sang Moses, §c. ; nPaN DV (Gen. xxiv.) before I had finished; PNT OW (Exod. ix. 33) ye do not fear*. 262. Absolute propositions and general truths, which are in most languages expressed in the present tense, may in Hebrew be announced in any of the tenses ; it being well understood that such proposi- tions not being subject to time, the verbs which they contain can only be asserfory; and therefore what- ever form the verbs contained in such sentences may happen to have, they must, when translated into English, be expressed in the present tense: thus, rey cobtyd pay) ga it) adet Ht (Lice. i. 4) A generation passeth away, and a generation cometh; but the earth abideth for ever. In this sentence the predicates being all expressed by participles, must of course be rendered in English in the present tense. But the predicates of the two following propositions, VDYN N21 vown mn (v.5) though the verbs are in the past, must nevertheless be rendered in the present; viz. the sun viseth, and the sun setteth—because the propositions express a natural phenomenon which occurs repeatedly * Sometimes after 2 what, 82 whence: as, UPI A What seckest thou? SAA }'S82 Whence comest thou? THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. para! and constantly. In the same sense must the propositions con- tained in the eighth verse be understood, although the verbs NPBA, yavn, Lay) are future forms: thus, Goyrnd cays Eas youn YS NPPMND) nig’ py yaeinnd aaqd whys AU things are labouring*, man cannot utter it;+ the eye ts never satisfied t with seeing, nor the ear filled§ with hearing. By way of further illustration, we refer the student to the first Psalm, where he will find four verbs in the past, 77, 1, TOY, 727; eight in the future, TANF, 2%P%, MP}, nwyy D3%, i, TaN; one active and one passive participle, Y%’, Syn all which must, for the reasons before stated, be rendered in the present. Moops. Infinitive Mood. 263. Infinitives considered as nouns (Art. 113.) may be used :— Ist. As the subjects of a proposition (Art. 163.) Thus, 1729 DIST MV Ab NP (Gen. ii. 18) lit. the being of the man alone (is) not good, 1.e. to be alone without the intended ad is a condition not fit for man; Maid rin’ 1n33 YaLID MpIy wy (Prov. xxi. 3.) 2nd. As the complement of other verbs by which they are governed, or as their objective cases :— Thus, 727 myo ax ND (Gen, xix. 22) I am not able to do any thing; 3D pn oya 82 (Num. xxii. 14) Balaam refused * 7.é. In a state of activity. + 2.e. He cannot describe it. * te. Not satiated. § z.e. It becomes not weary. 228 THE SYNTAX OF 1e) to go with us*; S32) MSY VIS ND (1 Kings iti. 7) I know not to go out and to come in, 1.e. the going out nor the coming in; WH? ON TIN (Ps. Ixxvii. 8) my soul refused to be comforted. 3rd. As the antecedent or consequent of a noun :— Thus, Ow 29 Eva) Epa) ‘3B? (Gen. xxxvi. 31) lit. before the reigning of a king to (over) the children of Israel ; 131212 TDN bya (Gen. ii.16) in the day of thy eating thereof; 1122 MI (Lev. xxv. 50) from the year of his being sold. 264. Like substantives, they admit of the pro- nominal affixes, and may be the objects of com- parison :— Thus, ‘'P} ‘HAY AY NAS (Ps. cxxxix. 1) thow knowest my sitting and my rising; “OS WANT ney omy FASha ANy, zw! (Isa. xxxvii. 28); 708 wd Anis mA gb AMIN MA IID (Gen. xxix.19) lit. better (es) my giving her unto thee than my giving her unto another man; AWD 3N) DMYIMS 73ay. 19 yw (Exod. xiv. 11). 265. They likewise admit the prefixes 4, vi me and other prepositions to mark several relations :— 5 to complete the sense of a preceding verb: as, aia DIN bna ‘3 (Gen. vi. 1) when men began to multiply ; "27? nbp (Gen. xxiv. 14) he finished to speak, i.e. he had finished, or he had done speaking ; — — — _ —___—_—_- * Tn such cases the infinitive constructive, with or without 2 is mostly used, though sometimes the infinitive absolute: as, (Isaiah xii. 24) jon YITT2 AAS NO}: A finite verb is sometimes used instead of the infinitive: as, JS) Gow M228 (Esth. vii.) for niwid Sayy. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 229 miny> nb> he had done drinking ;—or to mark the purpose of a preceding verb: as, T3929 INS") (Gen. xu. 5) and they went forth to go, i.e. with the intention of going into the land, éc.; ioyind TIN) (Exod. iii. 8) and I came down to deliver him. 266. With 3 or 3 they are used to indicate the coincidence of two actions or events in point of time; that is, that one action or event did or will occur at or about the same time when another did or will take place: thus, om by mand }78 N32 (Gen. xlviii. 7) in my coming from Padan,- Rachel died by me, §e., i.e. Rachel died at the time of my coming (or when I came) from Padan ; 378 X23 YPN (Prov. i. 26) I will mock in the coming of your fear, i. e. whenever that shall hapen; "3 DA NB YW N22 (Ibid. Xvlli.3) in the coming of the wicked, cometh also contempt, i. e. when the wicked cometh, there cometh likewise contempt ; Noon NID 487 nw AB (2 Kings vi. 32) look, at the coming of the m2ssenger, shut the door, i. e. as soon as he shall arrive. So likewise (2 Kings x. 2) OROwWY one --moDos mim PPA N2D; but, N23 nN a aa onto 78] (Ibid. 7) and wt came to pass on the coming of the letter to them, and they took,i.e. when the letter came, then they took, §c.; WON. MIN OMX o|xyind 1 (Gen. xix. 17); “op -ooy nova om (Ibid. 29). 267. With 1, they are used like nouns in the ablative*: as, PINT AD 120) (Num. xiii. 25) and they returned from searching of the land; 73 sbanans yaya wIwID (Job i. 7) from going to and fro on the earth, and from walking up and down in tt. 268. Somejimes, however, the is used in a negative sense thus, (Gen. xxvii. 1) and his eyes were dim M82 from seeing, * Or as a sign of the comparative, which has already been explained. Q 2 230 THE SYNTAX OF i. e. so that he could not see; NIA naa, 7D (Isa. xxiv. 10) every house is shut up from entering, i. e. so that none can enter ; yy yy a apyr_ oy aT 72 WT (Gen. xxxi. 29)*. 969. The infinitive absolute (Art. 111.)is used be- fore or after finite verbs, to indicate energy, intensity, or emphasis, and must frequently be rendered in English by the adverbs, surely, certainly, continually, greatly, indeed, &c. 270. Thus, MA Mid (Gen. ii. 17) dying, thow shalt die, i. e. thou shalt surely die; MAW 1377 (Ibid. ii. 16) L will greatly encrease; TW 1 (Ibid. xviii. 18) he will assuredly be; Wn 12), spon (Ibid. xxxvii. 8) shalt thow indeed reign over us? DW NS? NY" (Ibid. viii. 8) and he went out going and returning, 1. e, repeatedly going to and fro, ge.; HB3 DD} °2 n27 shen MAY), (Ibid. xxxi, 30). 271. The infinitive absolute is sometimes used for finite verbs, especially for the imperative: as, TD) OM2¥ 3 (Zech. vii. 5) when ye fasted and mourned ; DN) WN (Jer. xxxii. 44) and they shall write, and they shall seal; TAWO DY NY Wt (Exod. xx. 8) remember the Sabbath day ; O2N8 pa yiow (Deut. 1. 16) "32? 1319 NS (Ibid. xiv. 21). 272. The infinitive absolute is sometimes used as a noun: as, WI A AM wad iy (Hos. iv. 2) lit. to swear, and to * In all the above cases, the infinitve constructive is mostly used. + It is highly probable that in most of these cases there is an ellipsis of the finite verb: thus, BRIAD WADI; Wan Wat; "DIM “ADD, &e. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 251 lie, and to murder, and to steal, §c., break out in abundance: i. e. Imprecation, and murder, and theft, and adultery, overspread the land. 273. Infinitives are sometimes used as adverbs: as, (Hxod. xxx. 36) and thou shalt beat (pound) some of wt PW very small: (Deut. xii. 14) Thou shalt enquire, and make search, and ask 3%) well, diligently. 274. This is likewise the case with finite verbs, followed by an infinitive, or by a finite verb: as, (Gen, xxvii. 20) how is it that NY MM) thou hast found so quickly, lit. thou hast hastened to find; (Exod. ii. 18) how is it that DVI MA JAIN ye are come so soon to day, lit. ye have hastened to come: Sbannd mina (1 Sam.i.12) she encreased to pray, 1. e. she prayed much, con- tinued to pray: AIA AN by (1 Sam. ii. 3) do not encrease, do not speak, 1. e. do not speak continually. 275. This is especially the case with the verbs mp to add, to encrease, WW to return: as, mp2 ADM) (Gen. iv. 2) and she brought forth again, lit. and she encreased to bring forth: WW TBD. NO} (Gen. viii. 12) and she did not again return: “BD Poy? aw) (ibid. xxvi. 18) and Isaac dug again, lit. and he returned and he dug : yon noviy aw) (2 Kings i. 2): MUN Mp DAIS AD’ (Gen. Boxy): Imperative Mood. 276. The Imperative is used in Hebrew, as in other languages, for commanding, entreating, &c. 232 THE SYNTAX OF It admits only of the second person singular and plural, m. and /.* and is used only affirmatively. Prohibitions and admonitions are expressed by the future, accompanied by the negative particles S?, Oy: as, Sonn sib (Gen, i. 17) thow shalt not eat; yan by qpe movin bs lay not thine hand upon the lad ; MiNi b ivy by (Gen. xxii. 12). 277. Obs. 1.—?% is mostly used when a wish is expressed, in which case it is generally followed by J+: as, TAYA SI ON, (Gen. xviii. 3) do not pass, I pray :—or in expression of encouragement, admonition, and advice; as, [38 SV" PN (Gen. xv. 1) fear not Abrahams ‘2h Ox (Prov.i.15); 72 ON (Ibid), 278. Obs. 2.—A future preceded by an imperative is often used as an imperative: as, MHDS) 12 (Exod. iii. 16). 279. Obs. 3.—The imperative is sometimes used for the future : -_ as, Gen. xx. 7. and he shall pray for thee, “W) and live, i.e. * When an imperative sense for the first and third persons is required, the future is used: as, 708 or TSS (with paragogic 7) let me run (2 sam. xvill. 22,23); "1? there shall be, or let there be ; 199) let them go, or they shall go. But these and similar expressions are often merely declarative, intimating neither a com- mand nor even a wish: as, Dbiye Wow 97 (Ps. Ixxii. 17) his name will be for ever; TAMTITS vipa? 12 (Hos. v. 6) they will go to seek the Lord. In this sense ought the several verbs in the thirty-fifth Psalm, verses 4, 5, 6, and in several other places, to be understood. + This particle is likewise used for the same purpose in affirmative phrases: as, 0% DY) NI MP (Gen. xviii. 4) let a little water be taken ; S32 VND (Ibid. xix. 2). THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. eas and thou shalt live; %) WY Nt (Ibid. xii. 18); ANT... (Deut. xxxii. 50). Subjunctive and Potential Moods. 280. The several Moods denominated by Gram- marians, Subjunctive, Potential, Optative, &c., are indicated in Hebrew by the particles }2, CON, *3, bane abes, » a) or roy, or by the phrase {i *)*. expressive of contingency, conditionality, possibility, wish, &c., the verb retaining the same form which it has in the indicative :— Thus, 12 lest; (Gen. iii, 22) D2y...npdr ty mov 1B lest he put forth his hand and take...and eat, §c.; PINDF jB (bid. 3). DN if, provided; (Gen. xviii. 26) ‘NY... , DINDR NYO ON af I jind in Sodom ....then will I spare &e. (Gen. xxxii. 9); meet irlain): * ON wy N)2) ON if Esau come to....and smite it, then, gc. (See Exod. xxi.) 2 if, that; (Exod. xxi. 7) JAB MS WS 39.931 and if a man sell his daughter, &c.; (Gen. xxxviii. 16) what wilt thou give me rN NIN ‘3D that thow mayest come, &c.; (Exod. iii. 11) who am J, W283 that I should go... 888 °D) and that I should bring forth, $e. (Judg, ix.28) 197192 1D... WeNaN D- DIN peradventure, perhaps; (Gen. xviii, 24) Ewen wr, sas WH PND ES|*P¥ peradventure there be fifty righteous within the city; (Lam. iii. 29) MPA Wy 21K * Likewise by W8 that (Gen. xi. 7) ; we in order that (Gen. XXVil. 25); WAVA that (Gen. xxvii. 4)° The Optative is frequently indicated by the particle SJ: as, Dw ya NT UDs (Psiviie lO) e@ that the wickedness of the wicked might come to an end! These moods must, however, often be inferred from the context. 934 THE SYNTAX OF 158 though, if; (Ecc. vi. 6) YDB DIY Hox TIN NY and though he live twice a thousand years, &c.; (Esth. vii. 4) INY PITA 337D|Y Nyy?) DTI. 9 Q that, would; (Gen. xvii. 18) PB? TM Oxyevr sd O that Ishmael might live before thee! (Gen. xxx. 34) F212 7M > would it might be according to thy words. rbb or nebib were it not, except; (Gen xxxi. 42) ON 595 “ANDY Copy) mAY DD MIT... DN except that the God of my Jather .... had been with me, thou hadst sent me away now empty ; (Judg. xiv. 18) NY ONNy NO nwa OMAN N2I- iY °%) who would give, grant, would, O that: as,°*33TND {A WD E713) PISA Cixod. xvi. 3) would (te God) we had died... . in the land of Egypt; T'sv2] min! py-bp im D> (Num. xi. 29) would (to God) that all the Lord’s people were prophets; WONA P22 "Pa JAY 1D WSR IWaAI IW YA (Deut. xxviii. 67). PARTICIPLES. 281. Participles are used in Hebrew as nouns (Art. 122, 207), as Adjectives (Art. 83), and as verbs (Art. 245); and follow, according to the sense in which they are employed, the rules of these respective parts of speech. 282. They are often used in a very unlimited sense; in which case, the pronouns, whoso, whoever, he that, &c., though not expressed, must be supplied: as— nyt ams “DD am (Prov. xii. 1.) : YE MND Ne Whoso loveth instruction, loveth knowledge; but he that hateth reproof (ts) a brute; lit. a lover of wisdom (is) a lover of know- ledge; and &e. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. Zoo ond Yav? IND IW TY (Prov. xii. 11.) He that tilleth his land shall be satisfied with bread. (Ibid. viii. 34—36.) WS) ppn Blessed (is the) man who hearkeneth unto me, §c..... For whoso Jindeth me, findeth life, §c..... But he that misseth me, wrongeth his soul. saiy? DIN Nw San DID Jonah ii. 9.) They that observe lying vanities, forsake their own mercy. 283. This is likewise often the case even when the particle has the prefix 1, especially when it is preceded by 5) or by the same finite, verb™: as, yon b9 (Gen. xxi. 7) whoever shall hear it ; (2 Sam. xvii. 9) YR YOu, lit. and he shall hear the hearer, . ¥¢.,1.e. whosoever shall hear; ‘pin bb > (Deut. “OSs BE 284. Participles are sometimes used as the ob- jects of preceding verbs: as, aa las nyo (Gen. xxxvii. 17) [ have heard them say, Let us go, &e. ; (Gen. xxvii. 6) and Rebekah spake unto Jacob her son “OX? saying, WAI VANS NS snyew Aan * Or when followed by the same finite verb: as, (Ezek. iii, 27) yoy” Yow: + The word “iN? (inf. cons. of 18) so often used in Scripture, is generally introduced before a quotation. In the instance before us it is used twice. By the first, the sacred writer indicates that 236 THE SYNTAX OF sy 5 mya stbxd pny wy Ow dehold I heard thy father speak unto Esau thy brother, saying, Bring me venison, SC. Concord of the Verb with the Nominative. 285. The verb generally agrees with its nomi- native or subject in number, gender, and person: except— 1st.—The pluralis excellentie, which mostly, but not always, takes a verb in the singular: as, (Gen.i. 1) DTN 812; (Exod. xxi, 4) SOU PITY DN; (Thid. 29) NNN eva DI; (Gen. xx. 13) OoN NNT (See Art. 220.) 2nd.— When the verb precedes its subject, in which case the verb may or may not agree with itt: as, (Gen. i. 14) MN) ‘D’, where the words following it are the very words spoken by Rebekah, i- cluding the second “ond, by which she introduces the words of Isaac, or at least their general sense, namely, T!¥ 5 OMIT * In these instances the agreement is logical, 7 e. according to the signification; but in the last example, the agreement is merely Sormal. + Verbs, considered as mere attributes, cannot, strictly speaking, admit either of number, gender, or person; these can only belong to the pronouns, which are included in the form of the verb. Now, we can easily suppose that the mind of the speaker may, in some instances, be chiefly directed to the attribute, without immediately thinking of the particular subject or subjects to which the attribute may happen to belong (as is the case when verbs are used imper- sonally); the subject being introduced, as it were, by a sort of after- thought, and of course, as merely explanatory; and hence the reason why in such instances the concord is disregarded. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 2ae the verb is singular masculine, and the noun plural feminine ; (Num. ix. 6) OWI 7, here the verb is in the singular, and the noun is in the plural ; (Gen. ix. 23) NB} DY np", here we have two nouns connected by a copulative, yet the verb is in the singular; (Job xlii. 15) nay Dy ey1D2 NdY 3rd.—When the subject is complex (Art. 180), and one of the terms (the consequent) happens to be plural, then the verb is some- times put in the plural, although the leading word (the antecedent) is in the singular; as, (Gen. iv. 10) mys cava 7 rip; * (1 Sama. 4) DAN maa ny ; (Job XXXvVill. 21) nay 5 EDID 4th.—When a plural noun is used distributively: as, TIga+- EMD (Ex. xxxi. 14) lit. her profaners...... he shall die, i. e. every one that profanes tt (the Sabbath), shall die; (Gen. xlix. 22) MTs nina; (Prov. iii. 18) WWasst2 T3121N}: Fe eeeocrict mies when the apparent subject is a nominative absolute (Art. 204): as, SD? Dvn NAN (Job xxii. 9) and (as to the arms) of the orphans, tt is broken; (Hab. 1. 16) 183 Dow 6th—When the verb 7'7 is used as a connecting verb, it may agree either with the subject or the predicate: as, (Gen. 1. 11) amy anh AN PIT; Gen. xxxi. 8) TY MN DP The concord is, however, often entirely disregarded*: as, (Gen. xli. DO yaa es mM We AN UW yay; (Levit. xxiv. 5) MD yy Ww nna nbn. * his is likewise often the case when a pronoun is used as the copula: as, (Lev. xxv.) OMINY PNT ONT WY MD 3; (Josh. xiii. 14) indy NIN... WIM WN; Ver. x. 8) NIAID yA mpm 3 The reason of this is evident, as the copula cannot, strictly speaking, be effected by gender or number. Several apparent anomalies may be attributed to the omission of some word: as, (1 Sam. xxv. 27) JNNDY. + - NIT WN Mt 72730, where the word 732 is probably omitted. There are, however, many discordances that cannot be thus explained. 938 THE SYNTAX OF 286. When several subjects of different genders*, having the same predicate or verb, are connected, and the predicate is in the plural, then the mascu- line plural is used: as, (Gen. xviii. 11) 77) O7738) Dpt; (Jud. xin. 19) Ds AYN) MI (not As). But the verb or predicate may be in the singular, in which ease either the masculine or the feminine may be used: as, (Gen. xxiv. 55) MIN. TPIS WX; (Num. xii.) PR) OI IWIN ; (Exod. xxi. 4) mayd man m7?" WNT (Prov. xxvii. 9) ab nay ny WY (1 Kings xvii. 15) 837) 87 NAY 287. When the subject is a Noun of the common gender, the verb may be in either gender: as, (Levit. iy. 2) TY): NBN °D WDD; (Is. xxiii. 9) Fay UES 288. When the subject is a collective noun, the verb may be either in the singular or plural: as, (Exod. i. 20) VOSY" By 3 289. When the subject is indefinite, as when we say some one did so and so, the Hebrew makes use of the verb of the third person: as, ‘oY NP [2 by aa (Gen. xi. 9) therefore was the name of the city * When the several subjects consist of pronouns of different persons, the verbs must then agree with that which is, in the lan- guage of grammarians, the most noble ; that is, the Ist person has the preference over the other two, and the 2nd over the 8rd: as, (Gen. xxxi. 44) TANT 138 ™M2 M7723 m3? ; (2 Sam. xix. 30) TIONS 3p2nF NDS) NAS THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 939 called Babel, Heb. therefore he called, i. e. some one® ; api" TN (Gen. xlviii. 1) and one told Joseph; apy" 2) (Ibid. 2.) : or by the passive verb: as, oan> 2°) (Gen. xxii. 20) and it was told Abraham, 1. e. some one told him. Obs. 1—The third person of the verb is likewise used when the subject or cause is unknown, and where, in English, the neuter pronoun is used: a s, PY (Gen. xxxil. 8) and it grieved him; 2 a grieves me; OWI 1% lit, and he was the rain, i.e. tt rained; OPI mivip WY) and there was thunder and lightning, i. e. at thundered and lightened. Obs. 2.—The third person is sometimes used instead of the second or first, and nouns instead of pronouns, in addressing a superior: thus, yIly Sy ASP MYIB (Gen. xli. 10) Pharaoh was wroth with his servants, for W2¥, OY MBYP NAY; TN WINE DT TIA Nay (Gen. xliv. 18) for PIIS2 VAT SITS TS 5 TYE AS bse TN for bral Rony NAS (See likewise Gen. xix. 19; xxxiii. 13, 14)+. Government of Verbs. 290. Active transitive verbs{ govern the objective case: as, FDNY Fs ION Syst) (Genie xx Vitae) and Israel loved Joseph; DAY APB MW! (Ps. cxix. 186) L have kept thy precepts ne thy testimontes. * This corresponds with the German man, and the French on. + Thus we see that the language of politeness, or rather of abject humility, was early in vogue amongst mankind. t Many verbs are used both tntransitively and transitively: as, Bp hal Oy VN (Jude. xx.41) and the men of Israel turned! Wy ssiyd pad 20 (Ps. cv. 25) he turned their hearts to hate his people ; nib DAN) NS PM (Ibid. 29). 240 THE SYNTAX OF 291. Some verbs govern two objective cases : as, amin pymany Noy (Hae. ii. 11) ask the priests (concerning) the law; JIT DYwWE aIeY. S (Ps. li. 15) TI will teach transgressors thy way. 292. This is especially the case with verbs in Hiphil: as, pIYTNY Worny wavod (2 Sam. xix. 16) to make the king pass over the Jordan; JINJA) PINTS (Jer. xvii. 4) and I will cause thee to serve thine enemies™. 293. The student will recollect that when we speak of cases in Hebrew, nothing is meant but the signs + (prefixes or prepositions) which are added to the subordinate member of a sentence (Arf. 188), in order to distinguish them from the more essential parts. Now, what particular prefix or preposition these subordinate mem- bers or complements require, must depend, as has already been observed (Art. 190), on the signification of the verb, and on the intention of the speaker ; and this intention can often only be known from the particular prefix or preposition which accompanies the complement, and by which the signification of the verb is frequently varied. Thus the verb 73% construed with MN signifies to labour, to cultivate, to serve; but with 2 it signifies, to zmpose labour: MYY construed with signifies to attend to, to regard; but with * Generally verbs, &c., which are transitive in bp become doubly transitive in DYB: as, 109 (is. xxvi. 10) he learned ; 1199 (Ecc. xii. 9) he caused to learn, or he taught. ‘+ But these signs are sometimes omitted (Art. 215), in which case the connection is said to be immediate. The complement of a verb may be the name of the action (Art. 263), and then it is said, in the language of grammarians, to be governed in the tnfinitive mood. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 241 or 2 it signifies to turn away, disregard: “TW ONY is to ask, 2 ONY to consult, BY! or }'> ohy to request, y Ny to inquire. Miscellaneous Remarks. (294. The words D4) to rise, NW to lift up, to raise, M32 to turn, and a few others, are often used pleonas- tically before other verbs: as, J" Dp") and he rose and went; NV) VY NW and he lifted up his eyes and saw; E88) JB" and he turned and went out; JO VOI ny NUM: 295. Nouns derived from the same root with the verb are often added to it pleonastically: as, 17" TI apy" and Jacob vowed a vow; bi 24 193 they wept a great weeping™ ; ‘mpon mibn (Gen? xlit To) aoa TIN pry? TI (Gen. xxvii. 33). CIR LAUPMPIBI ES AGL. PARTICLES. Adverbs. 296. ‘The modifications of attributes, which in many languages are expressed by adverbs, are indi- cated in Hebrew in various ways :— * Some grammarians suppose that this mode of expression denotes emphasis, but it appears to mark the almost child-like simplicity of the early ages, rather than any thing else. 2492 THE SYNTAX OF Ist. By the repetition of the noun or adjective (Art. 221, 225).—2nd. By the infinitive absolute ( Art. 269, 270).—3rd. By a finite verb, in conjunction with an infinitive constructive or with another finite verb. (Art. 273, 275.—4th. By abstract nouns or other words* used adverbially : as, (Exod. xii. 11) and ye shall eat it WBN with hastiness i. e. in haste, or hastily ; (Ibid. xiv. 25) and they drove them (the chariots) MII with heaviness, i. e. heavily ; (Judg. vii. 1) and they contended with him pia with vehemence, or vehemently. 297. Obs.—Some of these words are never used in an adverbial sense without some of the prefixes 1, 5, 2,2, as in the preceding examples : others are always used without prefixes: as, (Josh. il. 1) wan secretly (from WI deaf); 030 gratuitously; (Lam.i. 9) DNB wonders, 1. e. wonderfully. Some, again, are used indiscri- minately with or without prefixes: as, 02 (Deut. xii. 10); nae (Lev. xxv. 19); im safety, securely; while others are used in different senses, according as they have or have not any of the pre- fixes: as, "29 alone, only, separately, but 3299+ besides, except ; ‘MD when, but ‘mod for when, for what period of tine; }8 cons. PS non-existence, nothing SY, mto nothing, S82 as nothing; but, IS) signifies whence, and PX without, or rather from want of existence, or because there existed not; (See Is. v. 9; 1. 2); and * See Art. 154. + As PUNT ayn sap (Gen. xxvi. 1) besides the first famine, but the is often prefixed before the noun: as, *S!D 72° (Exod. xli. 37) besides children ; which is the same as, WD 7250. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 243 P23 without, i.e. where there exists not, or in the non-ewistence (see Prov. v. 25; x1. 14), xd not, Nz without.* 298. Non 7s wt not? is mostly used in indirect assertions, when the inquirer knows that the answer must be in the affirmative. It is therefore often equivalent to a positive assertion,t and may be rendered by behold: as, MIWA My5 WON Non (Gen. xxxvii. 13) Do not thy brethren pasture in Shechem? i.e. they do pasture, &c. ; * The distinction between }?8 and }'%, and between these and x &c., has already been pointed out in Art.154, 187. Nevertheless, as it is important for the student to have a clear view of the subject, we shall repeat our former remarks, and elucidate them by examples. 8 is a noun, and signifies non-ewistence, nothing. It is opposed to Y', which signifies real being. [8 is used in the absolute state, but }*S when in construction with other words. Thus, absolute state, pS OS 3339P2 mim vara (Exod. xvii.7) Is the Lord amongst us or not ? lit. Zs the Lord in ewistence? &c., or Js he not in existence amongst us? Cons. MD OY ps WN ND pS (Exod. xii. 30) there was not a house where there was not one dead, lit. there was no house in existence where there was not a dead person in existence. Both (8 and [S indicate the non-existence of the subject, whereas N? indicates the non-existence of the predicate or attribute (see the examples in Art. WeXO es affirmative answer to the Recs ie ving ua wen ai 7s te seer here? is s there exists. T ths pee answer 1s nm nee exists not. But the affirmative answer to MAN M81 seest thou? or MSI hast thou seen? is {3 so, yes, or ps: ANIA MN ; and the negative answer is xo. b> PS signifies nothing whatever, ae the whole as well as the parts; but by xb signifies not all, excluding the whole but not all the parts. + A negative is often implied in affirmative interrogations: as, (Ezek. xviii. 23) ywr no YM YPN do-T then desire the death of the wicked 2 which is equivalent to J do not desire, &c. R 944 THE SYNTAX OF yIeA WAva 0 xda (Deut. xi. 80) Are they not on the other side Jordan ? i.e. Behold they are, &c. 299. Two negatives are not, in Hebrew, equivalent to an aflirma- ie) ie) tive, but only strengthen the negation: as, OYA OMAP PS oan (Exod. xiv.11). 300. Negatives are sometimes added to nouns, adjectives, &c., to denote privation; as, MADD PS innumerable ; 23S unprepared ; MIN P powerless, impotent ; no-N? strengthless ; DTN? unwise ; oa 5 childless ; nay Sy) 123 a cloudless morning ; Soytressd useless, profitless ; byw? not-a-God, i.e. an idol ; py-N? not a nation, 1.e. a lawless horde* ; rv without a name, i.e. infamous ; 1D ‘Apa irremovablet; NY2°28 immortalityt. 301. The negatives are sometimes omitted, and must be supplied by the reader: as, (1 Sam. i. 3) Nyon m7a3 an 337A oN 25 PHY, supply 8; (Ps. ix. 19) MUPA jay Nw My NP» syd TaNh—ongy, supply Nd. This is especially the case when two negative propositions are joined together by 1, when both the negative as well as the predicate of the second proposition are often omitted: as, (Ps. 1. 5) “ND ya-by DPS maya DNOM] DEYIDA DYYD Ip, supply 1% ND or, render the } by nor. The repetition of adverbs denotes intensity: as, (Deut. xxviii. 43) the stranger that 1s amongst thee shall get up above thee, ny ney upwards upwards, i.e. very high ; and thou shalt come down WD TBD low, low, i.e. very low. $$ nent * Thus, (Dent. xxii. 21) DITND2 BMPS YN) -- -DyND| INP OF t (Is. xiv. 6) MB Dae n3%d- t (Prov. xii. 28) nyo->y Aan) FN ON APTy MmN3- THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 245 General Remarks on the Particles. 302. Particles (originally nouns or verbs, Art. 154) are used in Hebrew, as in other languages, not only in various senses, but for various purposes. The same word being often employed as an adverb, preposition, or conjunction*: thus, ?Y upon, over, for, because, &c.; NAA below, beneath, under, instead, because ; ‘mba (probably from “iba to waste away) not, without, except, unless, &c. 503. Obs. 1.—The student must, however, not. suppose that these words have really so many different significations; for on strict examination it will be found, that however variously the Hebrew particles may be applied, they never lose their primary signification. But in translating them into modern Janguages, their fozce cannot always be given by one and the same word. This isowing to various eauses, but chiefly to this—That most of the Hebrew particles are the signs of general relations as well as of their various grades, or, if I may be allowed the expression, of their subordinate relations. Now, the Sacred Writers often use a particle expressive of a general relation, leaving the subordinate to be inferred from the context ; but in modern languages, these subordinate relations must be expressed by distinct words. ‘Thus, for instance, >, b (probably from rin to tend, extend) denotes tendency in general ; but whether this ten- dency is to produce a union of contact, or merely an approximation, or whether it imports the final result of an action, is not expressed * There are, however, many particles which are never used but as adverbs : as, 1B here, OY there: or as prepositions ; as, }'2 between: or as conjunctions only ; as, J but, 1 and. R 2 IAG THE SYNTAX OF by the particle, but must be inferred from the context. Hence the reason why it cannot always be rendered by éo, but occasionally by at, near, by, for, that, §¢. It is the same with the inseparapale particle } from 1) a hook) ; it indicates the general relation of connection, but whether this con~ nection is copulative, adversative, concessive, §c., must often be inferred from the context*. Nor is this so difficult as it may at first appear. No attentive reader can for a moment doubt that the 1 in #8 My} (Gen. i. 1) means and, showing that the verb S12 refers to {283 as well as to pov; nor that the 1 in TV PP) (Gen. iv. 2) or in PP Sy (Ibid. 5) ought to be rendered but, because the propositions to which these words belong, stand in disjunctive opposition to those which immediately precede them ; nor that the } in M7")8) and in nDINIOWN (Gen. xiii. 9) must be rendered by then, because these propositions are the respondents or consequents to their respective antecedents —Nd¥n OX if thou wilt take the left; j2°] ON) and if thou wilt take the right: nor that Yin YIN NO} (Gen, 111.3) must be rendered by nerther, because it is preceded by the negative proposition yDONN ND ye shall not eat, and is not in opposition to it. Equally evident is it that the 1 in 8) (Exod. xxi. 17) must be rendered by or, as it cannot be sup- posed that the culprit should go unpunished unless he commit the offence against both parents; in this instance the 1 shews that GDI refers to 128 as well as to !}28- These examples, I hope, will tend to remove the erroneous opinion, that the Hebrew particles have such a multiplicity of meanings, and that the single ) has. seventy-four different significations ! 304. Obs. 2.—Many particles appear to be synonymous, but there is generally some shade of difference in their meaning; nor can * That the frequent use of this particle instead of those which ex- press its subordinate relations does not arise from a want of adequate terms, is fully shown in Vindicie Hebraice, p.157—168. . THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 247 they always be indiscriminately used: thus, both by and 5 are the signs of the dative. But S is frequently used before the infini- tive mood, to show the purpose: as, boyd-auiy and he sat down to eat: and before nouns, to indicate the ultimate object: as, 177) ninsd and they shall be for signs. Yn neither of these cases could Ds be used ; ONDA signifies he spoke unto me, but bay (the verb not being accompanied by an objective case) signifies either he spoke concerning me, or, as it is often properly rendered in the Es- tablished Version, he promised me ; D9 1271 (Deut.i.11) he has promised you; ‘22 Oy now signifies he sent To my wives; but, wap new signifies, he sent FOR my wives; (see 1 Kings xx. 7) BDIOV IN We Hawg Mow 3805. Thus, likewise, b2a3 (lit. 2» rolling) from Obs to roll 2Y2 (lit in passing) from 72 to pass, refer to the principal person for whose sake any thing is done, to distinguish him from the person who receives the benefit, &c., not for his own merit, but for that of another. But Sia is used only before nouns, whilst WAYa is used before nouns as well as before verbs, and is some- times equivalent to wwidd (lit. to answer) that, so that, indicative of the final cause. Thus (Gen. xxxix.5) the Lord blessed the Egyptian’s house 52" oo12 jor Joseph’s sake; (Gen. xxx. 27) the Lord has blessed me 72223 jor thy sake; (Gen. vii.21) Nava DINA for man’s sake; (Gen. xxvii. 4) Y21 FIIAN WAYA that my soul may bless thee. (See Exod. ix. 16). 806. Obs. 8.—The remarks contained in Art. 297, may be ap- plied to particles in general :— Thus, ON is never used with a prefix, nor with a preposition pre- ceding it, though it may be used with a preposition following it: as, TINTON to behind me, "3 ON to between*. A by to the midst of, * These apparent double prepositions cannot always be translated literally. Expressions like these, to behind me, to between me, 248 THE SYNTAX OF into; whereas MS concerning, on account of, is never used with- out the particle oY preceding it: as, 22 NI’ by concerning, OX because of his son; W320 M8 by concerning, or an account of the well (Gen. XX1). by (from ney to ascend) upon, above ; byt from above, or above (the force of being lost in the translation); but Dy above (lit- what is above), though derived from the same root, never oceurs without the prefix 9; thus, Syn from above, or above; and nbyo with local 4, though likewise derived from the same root is used without the prefix 1; as, ney upwards.—Sometimes with oy nbyine and with and i nbyiner- Thus likewise Soya, Ways, ‘eR, never occur without 3, though this letter is, in the two first words, servile. Further, bo33 admits neither a prefix nor a preceding nor following particle. “WaA¥a is sometimes used with 9 to mark the final end or purpose; whereas mp3 admits both prefixes as well as particles: thus, "iow ‘mp? (for) not to keep, no ‘APBD from defect of power, from tmability, moxonea unless, except, Te ‘Apa WY until the defect of the heavens, or until the heavens be no more. A knowledge of these distinctions can only be acquired by practice. sound very awkwardly to our ears, and so they would to an Oriental ear, if these terms were considered exclusively as prepositions— but this usage is perfectly correct in the Hebrew ; because most of the prepositions being, in their origin, nouns, are often used as such: thus, 8 the hinder part, the space behind ; 1" the middle of; (from JA the middle), }*2 the intermediate space, plu. NID the intermediate spaces. Hence the propriety of such expressions, TITS ON, SOND, PED, PEN, TBD Ox, WR, nowD>, nbyn’n abn: But we could not say 1pdd, nor “0d bs because the 5 in “pb already expresses the relation denoted by the dative, and means literally, towards the place where the face is. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. PAI 307. Several particles, when in construction, re- quire the sign of the dative after them: as, * N'ap mod within the vail, lit. from within to the vail. 1.e. with reference to it; sr {17 without the city; oxy Syats upon the wood, lit. from above, with re- ference to the wood; mai) rwind 23D round about the tabernacle and the altar ; ond “NS woe unto them ! % bbs. woe unto me! lit. lamentation to me! 4 sbtbn far be it from me! God forbid ! lit. a profanation be it to me, unbecoming. 308. Obs.—When the particle [2 between, relates to several objects included in a noun plural, itis placed in immediate con- struction with that noun: as, ONAN ja between the pieces, 12 V2IY between thine eyest. But when it relates to two distinct nouns, whether the same or different, then the particle must either be repeated before each of the nouns: as, Ww pay WNT 72 (Gen. i. 4) between the light and between the darkness; ++ O20 p32 Od pai (Ibid. 7): or (ais placed before the first noun, and the second receives the prefix Gas, and nD 2 (Ibid. 6); WPs2 vino (see Levit. xi. 47; Deut. xvii. 8). Arrangement of Words. 309. As the most essential parts of speech have in Hebrew their peculiar forms, and most of the * Derived from N'2 a house, itself probably derived from S13 to come in, to enter. + When /’3 refers to several objects included in the same noun, it is often rendered by among; as, |°08 Pa (Prov. vi. 19) among brethren. 950 THE SYNTAX OF modifications are indicated by zn/lections, there can be little difficulty in distinguishing the sulject from the predicate, and the principal members from the subor- dinate parts, whatever situation they may happen to occupy in a sentence. ‘he words may therefore be disposed in almost any order, without occasioning the least confusion or ambiguity. Thus, even the mere tyro may know by barely looking at the form of the two following words pn? DON that the first is a finite verb including the pronoun he, and that the second is a noun. Further, as, DON includes the subject as well as the predicate, one must be the objective, whether it is placed after the verb—thus ond box > or before it—thus 528 on: Thus likewise the words of the following simple sentence, bin ADIN ANN (Israel loved Joseph) may receive any arrangement of which they are susceptible without altering the sense:— 1 pins amy Sti ov. aoe apie Syn n. Syste ams apm ov. Synb apieny ony nm Im Syn apiemys ov. Aim Syn oo or vir. ADS Sy? IN with 1 conversive. The reason of this is obvious. The verb being known by its form, and the objective by the particle “Mi, there remains only the word oy which must be the nominative; and as the words are thus distinctly marked, it matters not what place they occupy. 310. But though, owing to the reason just stated, great latitude is allowed in the arrangement of words, it must not be supposed that they are placed THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 251 at random ; on the contrary, their proper disposition appears to depend on one principle, viz., that the speaker will naturally express that jirst which strikes his mind most forcibly, and to which he wishes most to draw the attention of his hearers.—The more im- portant words will therefore take precedence of those that are less important*. 311. Hence it is that in Hebrew the qualifying word must follow the words qualified, and the definin g words must be placed after those which are defined; thus, pon 3 (not | j2 O38) a wise son ; Ie op (not O1 932) second day ; abi na (not Na 122) a king's daughter; 723 Ls (not Ws nti) this man. See Art. 04, 84, 91, 98, 184. 312. Hence it is, likewise, that in common discourse the words follow mostly the natural train of thoughts, that is to say, the subject * The order of words in the first verse of the Book of Genesis may perhaps appear an exception to the general rule, as it begins with a word apparently the least impressive: thus, 872 MwsN732 ISI My} ova NN nN, But it is highly probable that the Inspired Penman, by adopting this arrangement in preference to the many which he might have chosen, intended to impress on our minds first —that this world had a beginning, in contradiction to those who maintained its eternity: secondly—that it was not the production of chance, but a creation, a calling into existence by the Divine Will; and having thus taught us these important truths, he introduces the Divine Agent, DON the Almighty Being, the Author of all the powers —and last of all, the objective cases— PANTTNN) DOWIATNAN. 252 THE SYNTAX OF or nominative is placed first, then the verb or predicate, then the objective, or any other subordinate member*: as in the arrangement marked I, 313. But in historic narratives where actions and events are of greater importance than the agents, the verb is mostly placed firstt, then the nominative, then the subordinate members, and last of all, the minor circumstances: as in the arrangement marked VI. VII. The intermediate arrangements marked II. III. IV. V. are used ad libitum. according as the speaker attaches more or less importance to either of the words; the most emphatic being generally placed first in order. 314. By way of illustration, let us compare the two following sentences :— * All words and phrases which are introduced to define or to explain the nominative or any of the subordinate numbers, are placed immediately after the word which they are to explain : as, yyy [2 | Tan. | S47 — oy An WwN—mwNA (Gen. iii. 12); oH IND AN man spb We mvpvin aby mim —mONtd PINION TAN syd sind oS-pav'y agi So24 “WN spy | soyde | nov | san * (Gen. xxiv. 7);"1'2 WRENS | ma] san :yvoy nim (2 Kings xv.35). When the nominative is thus separated from the verb by ex- planatory circumstances, the personal pronoun corresponding with the nominative is introduced to recall, as it were, the subject; as in the preceding examples. See likewise Deut. i. 30, 36, 38, 39. + Except when the clauses stand in opposition. THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. DANS 1.— IPN | NNEY | MMI | 238. (Gen. xvi. 5.) I have given my maid into thy bosom. IL—nwix? | mtn vay | omny | ‘M2 MS: Deut. xxii. 16.) Lit. My daughter T gave unto this man for a wife. In the first example, the nominative ‘258 is placed emphatically (as it is already included in the finite verb 93) first; then comes the verb, then the objective, &c. In the second example, the order is reversed. The objective case is placed first, then the verb includ- ing the nominative, then the subordinate members. And why ? Because in the first, we have the venerable mistress aware of her importance, which she finds abated by circumstances arising from her own condescension, to which she particularly wishes to draw her husband’s attention. She, therefore, begins with the Eyo 238; ‘It was J, the mistress of the house, who have condescendingly placed this ungrateful bondwoman in thy bosom.’ But in the second example, we have the tender father, indignant at the offered insult, pleading the cause of his child. Ue therefore omits the 1238, as if he scarcely thought of himself, and begins his address to the judges with 2a 08 my daughter, as the object nearest his heart. 315. Inthe following verse, T2YN In’) NTA DAES MANS yawn iw) (Deut. vi. 13.), we have all the complimentary words placed before their respective verbs and nominatives, because the emphasis rests upon them. Reverse the order, and arrange the words as they are in the translation—729N INN} NOX MN) MN NN ANN, &e., or—in& Tyr nbs min) ms NS, &c., and the energy is entirely lost. 316. It is the same with adverbs and other words expressive of mere circumstances, such as, 3n, DINND, WAY, py, &e. In ordinary discourse they mostly follow the verb : as, 039 ON") (ex. xxi.l1); =p" anew xd (Deut. xv.13); MINN Min, Wssh (Num. xii. 4). But when any particular stress is to be laid upon them, they precede the verb: as, ‘AMY OP) HAY D (Gen. xxxi. 254 THE SYNTAX OF 42); ITN 8d DINND 1p-by (Prov. vi. 15). Nay, they are often placed with great propriety at the very beginning of a sentence: as 533 mr! DINND (Jer. li.8). Because the prophet wished to draw attention to the suddenness of the destruction of Babylon, so unex- pected at the time when she was still flourishing and great. So likewise, DYPID py wy fas Yq y shay OND (Mal. iii. 1); DADD) 3 (Is. li. 3); TI NY IV NP D3nT (Jobi. 9), In all these instances, the adverbs stand first, because they are the most emphatic. Place them in any other part of the sentence, and the effect is lost, as it is indeed in every translation which cannot adopt the same arrangement. 317. But though numerous additional examples might be pro- duced from every part of scripture, to show that the Sacred Writers paid great attention to the disposition of their words, yet we must not carry this principle too far, by requiring, in every instance, a reason for the particular arrangement which they thought proper to use. This would be as absurd, as to demand why an author does not always use the same indentical words to express the same sen- timent. On this subject, I cannot do better than recommend to the student's attention the judicious observations of the greatest Hebrew scholar that ever lived, Aben Hzra. His words are.— pun) nibwID OD DMR) nes on mde ty ya nwo-boa manda wavin ya by +3 ia mpi soy amy ride we pewin ony oven mei DEY ONY ‘ Know that words are like bodies, and the senses* (meanings) are like souls ; and that the body is a mere instrument (organ) to the soul. * It is very remarkable that a man so learned as John Buatorf should have misinterpreted both these passages. Nor is it less re- markable, that of the numerous authors who have profited by his THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 255 Hence the practice of all wise men, in every language, to take care of the sense, but they are not solicitous about the change of words, as long as they express the same meaning. He then cites numerous exam- ples, to show that the Sacred Writer often uses various expressions to convey the same thought ; and adds, that no sensible man will require a reason why an author uses sometimes a pleonastic expres- sion, and at other times an elliptical phrase, or why he writes at one time a word xd full (4. e. expressing the quiescent letters 118), and at other times 12M deficient ; as for instance, why the word nbdiy is sometimes written with the 5, and at other times ny without it, when, in point of fact, there is no impropriety in either. Further, in his comment on the word “IN? (Deut. v.5) which appears out of its proper position, and speaking of the variations in some of the expressions of the Decalogue, as recited in Haodus and in Deuteronomy, he says— Oy ory nip on +2 mien Sy 36 pn by niyys nya nt ibp ot oa awa man: mins : SI InN ‘ Do not be too anxious about the words, for they are like bodies, and the senses (meanings) are like spirits: and he that cuts with either of two instruments, each of which is calculated to produce the same effect, labours, none should have noticed the mistake. Speaking of the importance of the Hebrew accents (in his Thes. Gram. Ling. Sancta, p- 599), he cites the preceding quotations from Aben Ezra’s work, and renders the first thus—‘ Scito dictiones esse quasi corpora, ¢ ACCENTUS (!) quas? animas,’ gc. The second he renders thus—‘ Ne apponas animum ad dictiones: ile enim sunt instar corporum. &§ ACCENTUs (!) stcut spiritus sive anime, gc. What probably misled the learned author is, that the word D°DYD is frequently used by Rab- binical writers for accents. But that Aben Ezra does not use the word in this sense, js clear enough. 956 THE SYNTAX OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. doeth, in fact, the same work.’ In short, he strongly recommends to those who study the sacred volume, to look to the spirit, rather than to the mere letter. 318. The negative particles, being considered as mere exponents or indices, are placed immediately* before their respective verbs: as, bow xb, on by, 319. For the same reason most of the conjunctions, especially those which indicate the modes of thought, are placed at the beginning of their respective phrases or sentences: as, AY TAY 132M °3 (Ex. xxi.2); TWN Vy YIN ON (Ibid.); NP tioyy DDI Is DIY DN aN NIT IBD °3 DP’ (Ibid.) See the examples in Art. 280. 3820. For a similar reason, are all words which have the sign of interrogation (1), as well as interrogative pronouns and adverbs, placed at the beginning of interrogative phrases and sentences: as, ‘oN MS TWA (Gen. iv. 9); 32 [VR dS’ ox andy >_n Fon (Gen. xxxviil. 8); N NAN AVN m9 (Gen. xii 19); ‘SA rt (Gen. xv. 2); JAYS Tv YN (Gen. xviii. 9); MPD wD (Gen. xxiv. 65). 321. In a few instances we find the nouns placed by way of emphasis, before the interrogative: as, E8237) On TN mpniay hay npwen (Zech. 1. 5); your fathers where are they? and the prophets will they live for ever ? * Sometimes, however, the particle is separated from the verb by an intervening word: as, 27 "29 nd (2 Kings v. 26) ; 7883 Dé ‘JIE YNIIND ON} INN (Ps. vi. 5). APPENDIX. LOCATE GhCOd Es FROM SCARCE HEBREW BOOKS. Foutty or IpoLatrRy. From the 18th Chapter of Wisdom of Solomon, v. 1—10. Da PX WS DIN 3a 7 Sand AN NIN yD DIN omy tid ja) ny oy oy oa, ods nyt sty 3 yoyo Sy sovan ont. ay my yan ND is DYIDST AM is yD IN mM iN BE MS oD, BI? povinn omdyn on oigin nitine ix obi DD 99 peyT> msm sy DIT TONER BN) + 792 nnd Syne swig of mp avon NS ay on ody mampan and by psy: my wy nONEAN my | Pee cons) m2 nnd bysiga xO oy oman om oa ns Oy sows NO ocpNm per: 132 MAT poty op os sbyin yen innon cy edd wis 2 5 960 APPENDIX. ym ow op cry my maby ynidypos onn pnb spo NO) win 19 ND ca wy DIO bs PINT misbip ava" ny py Os 2 AN In niyen Ss pony amb win obo NO np Oy bab meds nwa wp Twas OD BNA) MN) ¢ NPS miyyp nexy baa sey AbD) an DIN nbwp wo) oD Sa wwe oe yr bp nan Dn DNATA DPD 1H. OrIGIN OF IDOLATRY. | Chap. xiv. ¢. 15—31. Nop inna mp cw pa by oyynn os mp ow wxS py) imam ms mby inp py arma os ttaybh 15 mia ns wid yy pin? open InN Ew! AI yA oe pina IND 2 WY DWINT 2 DDE my Tal Ay Sop sbyn aden ers tasb yboy by mpm nINs SEIN? By Wy mn Aye myn} aapny mys wan mya on same. pimp mov coe Nin otiaya my ciayd pda APPENDIX. 261 Pivyh peso yen crys in sivab nnn enn ws oyn not asd : ema coy monn om 32 WN omy tin om? moxden opi nna 2 DWN ya ‘2m? wpa MNT My: oo oNEb mipya wp oa movie mina Sy spin berm sy! 59 oma mp NS pvaydy yy wn 7ws2 Say onbyrrns i oan +d DIY 9 abu ova nisinan nib wp nbn mabb main) oooy ix ome ms monsir ovay noe siya NO) orn ToT pe NO: oes eddina SN MWA TY MI! AL NS Baya my? on? vt van 5a: wa awn? impy ney my AND ming Te nv mos Oy my oF onda pi 32> ayo moa: oi pwd syd) nbs moa my Sp mar oa Na o2 pina wan nnpd —bs mom nv oben misy v2: Dea JIT OIA Mp OKaIne oO sAwD Mypna 39 “es DO SyA ayy Naya 12: pw mya sspy> pa yawn yp my ND DY om DT ps oysein Sys Oy yy pain Oy paya mays pnw On avy moy mda Nb: wap-da mind spy npnpa pevip pNa nppmMe py nap) my oa ways PANT AEA Dye gs. 2 262 APPENDIX. I. WISDOM. The 24th Chapter of Ecclesiasticus*. SAYA Moy by aypR Aviad Sonn npann ‘ap 99: STN jy Jing a mam ON mya Why, minga vais ss nna Spa) mays py ‘paVviod yeti iy Dawa : ayn Ways ND) Iv Son minpiea) ov “a3 minyen 28 oY mipinn mimi mby Son: tribe coy py Soar mado 3) OY TPP IY snp Dipp mby my Hypa Ose qsem spy sos ty Oy Os 85 sy ondyds omega San pp woe: Them as sa pw) ‘iaglaty. 132? wap jnWpa ; DT 1D? : moving Ty Dyin ‘AND “MAY NIMY AMP ¢ Mp bay :indpa San Loesiny » bw ops ons nya TAD : oI) ww hr vy aba mys yon cnyoy mn mma: ins pays mivivis a sb) ‘eva wT DMe fopa + nin DvD “ubp Sy pow> x] omy) maapM myiaya 2 AND 7 Sp may ‘bay aw) wre vem mde: ny sien NO sm Tin MB I Ney pba ID * Translated by Ben-Zeeb. ; . APPENDIX. 263 mp2 ASD pind ‘2: agyNA seo MDL “NPD S py yan nigh pay ciy Sone: py made soy 5a: Sui x6 an myn Si db pri avin myn a> my mim : Daina» mma spa va oan say) pemsa moan nN + aby nbnp SUNT MD PIS) Me we Soy maw. + aan so) ND NDT ND pa) TNta p> nya mI a may ND DY) AI DoD “pga TD SY AY 2 AID BIAAD mpwy) Or Iw SYN) OR MPU by 2 pp pL oy, ov moana ba mbyam mbynb np am) sy ming soy cin sp sy ty sod one mb Sra » myiaa Ty spas S32 by npb yp sey one/s spams in pps py nb Aras Ve Copy OF THE FIRST LETTER WHICH THE ROMAN SENATE SENT TO THE JEWS. Maccab*. Chap. viii. v. 22—87. ming ind Sy cons wy Then vn Nn : AMAT TBI? BID ni? npn inks indy * Translated into Hebrew by Dr. 8. I. Frankel. The whole of the Apocrypha has been translated by this learned man into pure Hebrew, and may be had at Messrs. Taylor, Walton, and Maberly’s, Upper Gower Street and Ivy Lane. 964 APPENDIX. sy ooyd) spin nyo ody ingame ow : Oday Ty oxtaa Toym-nd son) ovina’. oy) oo3 3 prbwiag yoscbaa iN Npina nen Mp RPS Mpya oD one sy sty cons yaa ix spin vamaemy 323. ND) ITT py BP DYN PSTD MNTND) APPIND pwAIND) TT YIND soa nop a mid me mbybs : oping + DV2 NEN WIN IND) DMT INE TEA TPN 13) sneNS thay sa pay cAD owns nye ony> tut mano pyre) baienS compan cand bya niyh my nbyenyy ose Ano “aa pa maT oop mbps oa ceby : npn pind om soy mdy oo) som op xpi DY Twada) owy oysma on yd ww mby-by DY WN IN SAND OITA py WN oi mistiendyy wox oom ona Sbimpna ao-np aby 5 Na poy ppd sydy sowi> mim) can wast smu os yanigdy contd a3 ee” eee eee ee eee! ee ee ee ee APPENDIX. 965 V. Copy oF A LETTER WHICH JONATHAN THE HIGH- PRIEST WROTE TO THE SPARTANS. 1 Maccab. chap. xu. v. 6—24. ae ine my ow Ten mw NN : ISETBYN sD NEB wis ODN ppp mby oppsbm WN) MN DY AD ng mo omy ows *a bxd Sram md pyin-dy may jm): mmm wx “ben mw sng swig 8 MMHIM) 727 IND DINO MAY : HM “py 0m movin btn xO sb omind ops mynsm) maT AME my pindy wand nby aedp Ww DT INN °D OPI OM WO oy sw ayy mayb vp sry yg) orp oanby smdy-by omscpa om omdxd pp pa aps ciby aya why nyn> mint wisp anand sy AN) aad nym Sy opagn opidvia v2 : mT “b> oy sendy vp owarSy soy nip nina nity 266 APPENDIX. mby NO ssammyind aydy app ww app oden vipad na Syomy iN Dany yest abby ways an ainby 95 s nba rinndia ove mY my> ribwig nba s sypab Dy) IY ADD bry) SEEINTNN) DISPHINTTD DPI“ whs-hy Saasn many wand xtra nnd pers byw oN risk Dns pan: DAY maw “ng wand) pgya min perny nnd) canbe ST27 nk wh DIA a" OY) + DIY wn yin vis nby “WN BET Taw NN :piby Stesa ob deind amnawe qbp eam NOUN IY) OD DM ITE IND NYE sonwh as OTN) nen DMN Dw on mbyn 3% dnd) NT sous aN oyT 3 Ay abob ny ny Sy: eb aha omy en ob nb yt pNP) BRE gb wT wp) MPH SMa ams DAY? NaI ADEM 1238) APPENDIX. 267 AWS TALES FROM THE TALMUD. Wy YON my mga mya one aden rnp vin» Sd ina babyy SDS YN WN) NT yy sian fs my) DSYIO yoy a wD | ADV PY FREE IAN) opm nye Sy yyy pias AEON IN) ANOS yn wN soiay . Fen Onis DIS IY DipPa why cnisy .oMy3 my> nioyix Mia DY PNM dipea mE wi. nibp SB TBAT CPN IND Ib my pay sayy onioy DIE HW) WIT NN IT ADD we oniae nbiyd HN DAN swinnb ‘MEDN O28) pei ‘EDN N20 chip ‘PASS NI (See Hebrew Tales, No. xviii. p. 53). ono 9099 pry aD yo wpa yo? “2a Sym castes in men coms ow Suip a> Siwins ying YB WA OB TY, NUN) NS) IT) ANY Gow: yEnn may, op nD one by sine oy jon wa iva aw moqan yp DD AWN MED NOm ping MS ON FADIA 2 yy yy. Tes tad 268 APPENDIX. maa oy nsqaa oy) 9 in me Sya ox) yo sn yor we Dyyr bay JN TI IN yz? NM MND ON PADIS Ma MAN AN) | PI]. WN. We sey she) man wwaya ps1 nosen? 7? 871 AI NYP OMT) YR OD IN DB Pow ma NI ON : 2 PIT. (See Hebrew Tales, No. xxxii p. 93). VI. FABLES”. may ww Syn :aveny oay avinn avin pan whom ONY pba oymdns . ovay Sy apy oy Ww TaN MIN AP A AP PS OPE yey px. BOA nig> om awh sb. aby wy may at ypyy) v2 ba. oie ye poy. onyy wba 34 ‘pip BD BIND tp. By “Ia yey ps DA bes “iD mb I oD p>. PAT wT WN SUTIN OD’ aya 35 qwes oyyT Soy omy py * These Fables are extracted from a work entitled Doyay Svin It contains 107 Fables, all written in the same style. Name of the author— &, Berachia Hannakdan. (See Wolf. Bib. Heb. No. 435). APPENDIX. 269 my DIN) Nas 73) mys pas 32 O54 my Sep my, yt ax Sys Sy sivin smye a7 pa Sys maa DIT ty? oN nvvaa) my Svin : Osta) aving one» Syie® xSS into ayy Mby TwASMY ND RE nap aa by aes ony TIED THY TNA) I Oy) ayn my wD Jo a2 yee os myn yay bes se yw Syn 1b yxvin Nd) ty ina Syp gbip. aban 2a by awh BO YIN DTD mys NO iy DN Hy pt SPOS 12 WY MB MND TWN TY. IN SAMI Was NOL AY MS ND aba TYNE ny main VUL. ANECDOTES, &c. 29> Tey OT mab tna mst ony Ards cing mp os ong nb aby omdy Non. ann soxb-in oD): Bye BIN man yoy yd 1p IoD -DwWa-IpwIT TD Mew ping me byw rw DUET OY DYN 970) APPENDIX. O37 TT NON NIH py phye ning sin) Spa yy sen np spies mt Dep 3 tk 9S Te Ty mand wet agp) pr WD TN Hown mois tb Song inv may, bap P2y2 DIN 932. PPR DIM mya Sy nbayns) maiz nny nox me nna ‘npn xb tne ine mpyy mvp) weg nyinn SND NWN TINA 27 TPN NAN Yay nyen * WN Vpn MAN WS CNT TN NID YAY BNA SPN] My DM O97 20g IMS’ IND iw) Poywyn IN oan Ow OF 1» DIY Rw ‘amps DIN mi moos i> my: pono POE ONaR eu ABD ony mone ovum Say. yn nbyp oy openn TaN MBINN N2yp YT Dy niyyn oxy yt iawn) tee op sind SAY WN A IN Ay! Nei np yon nN “EN : ON nnn mpDE Ty : TN nbn : np ain) ANY DYD28 : DYDD DY Diney ae a0 APPENDIX. Exe Moraut Maxims*. : yps Ssbn spr MUN 193 “TD TYQY yaTay TIAN 3 pravinb mp vn ONT 2B pnias mya Noy WE ay “EN oy on Sy OS 7D DTD FAD TB 923 “2 8p OB 8) mptp m39 3 JN “2 of O33 poe b ninind Toh AN “Wi“2 TN) Mp Way D3 yy} “2 yn) O72 p27 WW 8) Des 22 Ee OS IPI 97] * From bava WN, a didatic poem, by the celebrated R. Haz, who flourished about the beginning of the eleventh century. 279 APPENDIX. Day AY Dy np n2p3 : oI “TN DNB ON) J73p3 rota nyp 3 : TINY “» wird son Ss) byiv> Sew an “1 md) Sy qn bon bn yp Sxw x. Tue 8th Psatm ParsAPHRASED™. 43) JO’ WIS AD WITS %—1. soy piss stare Sy poy ymbe Sy yer peta m2 yr PAN A PIN *D mayay mys be pwn Sy Ady y nop ow addy sp—o. map pa-bs Soiy-be sap sy pds sath Sap wy joys opin aie may :ATaN YI Ow ony joa * From ODN Nii} a poetical paraphrase of the whole of the Psalms, by R. Abraham Ben Shabthi Hacohen. This work, written in almost every kind of metre, evinces uncommon skill and a won- derful command of language, and is therefore deservedly esteemed. APPENIDX. atte YD) PMYAYS AWYD PO’ AXIN 133, man DMI Pew Sy op Oy Nin Iw yayy byb Day Al DAN ANAYAD ‘3 FIND asia my nih Dlsladslile 6 Nilo opr jiypa i BI *> wANY MD pny aavign vos jit pm pnt pay Baas DINE AB swancbe SiS-bs nibs inks sped yo) obs py onni—5. say inva> byes ib monn Pay vin ANoD ywer, Oy? pan ys oy i mney hae Pay AM YS TID Ane AD pr wyor indwon—e. TR Syed by snbwian sang said yon non nny mx yw was? Sn a yeeia eqparde i> jam 274 APPENDIX. 9) odd oad) IY —7. yp tag nba ayy py moa ayy aw inn-5p oa MIMD DIDNT! AD pA poy YI WD ya) One 4D) DT I) OMY Nay —s. saan > py py yorw vox oy mimes Tay yaya op 45 py yw" soap wa oy 15 winy nixon AD) OW PIN TD IN 99. sa mn by t-bp Sy pm mag “ITD TRY WM As mipy OX NI NT DY DN s ayascbe Sy Sy ne soto nis pale TRUTH*. IP Ni? DWNT 4D SPT AY Dw DN * From 45 Sip, by R. Stimson Cohen Modun. The work con- tains 50 Odes and Sonnets, all composed in the same elegant style. APPENDIX. bo ~] Or MEIN WS). WOW ATW AN sya spes by 3D) ayaa 73 °2 DAT IB PPT Moy DID Hp ~ =3I- “yon Sip) mom ness oy :3y293 3p] NPY 9D: 42 O06 ee SOOM TT WMD : spon Nb) ay sayin DWI] NID ATW NN HS som BAN II) opY yD SDA IMD DNS We sot pid 1p Sy mes war AIT. Horr AND FEAR*. eas 29> TIR Mp) AST syns NOY pips NOY Diy oP “pom many mis pA nat sania pip) oning 1 i aN * See the preceding Note. mm 276 APPENDIX. TAN NOY TY WY NTN yeh PTD WN) My JN ND AND BN? WN panda) ton opin ya mony AMS DDYIa eT HP OTT NY VY JBN MMB) AIT) ny MVNA ADIN ND PIS ND Ty sang? NO Nib mst AyD) mpA sada» Siew whys na soy XIE THe CONTENTED SHEPHERD. * sya yy AYN FIND mnie ipon nase ps sngy mysevin ia niagin be snob mbna wis ennrba Joven ty. Sy tay iy os *3 ‘mnp mast web) "WY Dp DTN NN¥D ba! = —— * From apaR bla) by Moses Chaim Luzzato. APPENDIX. ION] WS [YI SOI? ND), YD ‘may aba se oro by spans waa, pon SIND PTY OMY. Ry may ymin aso ayy :TIYAN IH ON ‘PRD’ 92 ABW Al WIS ‘yyy maa nt pros 15 son San qian swix-b> 12 mniape wy aya xo pany xo) ay : wy ton NOo> ya ni tay) ja ND tag) myIp S019 Samp insbdp i an ‘yp ab sap 3b opt ban ab avis miaby nian xn bien 2S mab ia. iab nour na sayy ND DN? II PN ny ina mandy 23D ara wey NDE DT syrroa nyrba npbn nbn oy sam Ady minim paingd joy 2070 278 THE SYNTAX OF Au Vie Ruxues or Lire*. Tap wy pw In’ wg AT sWypD Neb: ma naw’? ay. by on Oy yon aa mb yen pas abs Son nr os aay by nnn xb pi nym jin by ya ws Nan ND py Dann TAN urbe mead minn pyia Syn finn aan eon pba pawn ND ON MANN 83 bs dyna apn x py payin 92 Sy Sh vs ny apn 82 Oy QA OS TAN a ANDY wv ON Joya om Ss ps3 you op py mo Sys Iw ma en ane * From O93 33D APR, by Lphraim Luzzato. This work is very scarce, and is deservedly esteemed for its elegant diction and poetic beauties. APPENIDX, XY. Toe Mertamorruosep Prrstcran™. MIT’ Tee) nme mBt aa: NP? WD SAIN AND AND maxis mwa oye app abe sing magi pm minds ay mas) yy nin Sayin say JID wr Dx pnt im nw nanby pins samba nym : mma sin Sy sino: 3553 nN a TA ASAe AS DIT oye AoA Mw npino wy Pray’? NEI PNT FANT 1D won x2 ON MYT At NIT IN DYS DIOS YYE-MS AN won s soag nbina aes sing Nb * See the preceding note. 280 APPENDIX. DAT AE: PHILANTHROPY*. ond i nnd 73 snk © ona iia 1p ondniy b nnb pingbe pia my pha WANs Job 12 sayy Wa oN Da q07 Dam sin ody xt) os Sam ipees AD any INE! We AND TyNI my) ow weir ap 351) pray xia Sy Saw Sy py Oye paw pads }2 PIT OMYETA OPI OMY ssdyp sip ox 5a5 sip DO¥D DINT 87a) wD DN POOYT MJD ON! ID Pamty at tas Sm on * From MSBn YY, by Hartwig Wessley . APPENDIX. > Sys pon ia wt oq mn Sy oy x — wie moan a SMD PIs > ty tnpon MIP FBP AIT ETD I Ie wD mip xyt oy Ss Ty yan ston a Sy on py ny ‘DIN Nowa of aio Man mI Dp Pry mia D2 ypl ABD 2 DY) J2DD Ban wy pr mp “APD DID pS CAPM MY DN TTD PS Aw ANID onbys qo wh ssie oy-d2 ps STS DT AT PW TENS JMDID PS SPH! Mes IN psa Sy amie ma toy xb HNy? Toy a9 ob> Dy oyow xb omios sor dy ox symax xd oniay MoONDPcny wnbyD Do OAMavID ION BP BAX NIM VNAS MDT sar ory Sy Oy ae ayn 989 APPENDIX. XVII. SEVERINIT BOETII DE CONSOLATIONE PHILOSOPHLAE. CARMEN QUINTUM LIBRI QUINTI. Quam variis terras animalia permeant figuris ! Namque alia extento sunt corpore, pulveremque verrunt, Continuumque trahunt vi pectoris incitata suleum, Sunt quibus alarum levitas vaga, verberetque ventos, Et liquido longi spacia etheris enatet volatu. Tec pressisse solo vestigia gressibus gaudent, el virides campos transmittere, vel subire silvas. Vel virides campos transmittere, vel sub lvas Que variis videas licet omnia discrepare formis, Prona tamen facies hebetes valet ingravare sensus. Unica gens hominum celsum levat altius cacumen, Atque levis recto stat corpore, despicitque terras, Heec nisi terrenus male desipis admonet figura. Qui recto celum vultu petis, exerisque frontem, In sublime feras animum quoque; ne gravata pessum, Inferior sidat mens corpore: seltius levato. APPENDIX, 983 top md nim mime wy sshby spy Soin tins-by we aso oma nwae AyD eh :MIY) mn aay mS) m5 omby Hy migwsa ayy? oh sDo7 minw, peysa ww Sypbm nim nin jp syd NO DNS nsiy ioe my sna mypr DTW 73" : Dy tra? BY NOT DN" s wins yada sp nat “oyy xivm ppm) *D mS wEITMY DF DBI nIpT oO : nsbvip MNT ans pps De 7s syossrd tot Sys 984. APPENDIX. ENGL GOD SAVE THE KING. Gop save our noble King William! Long live the King, God save the King! Send him victorious, Happy and glorious, Long to reign over us, God save the [ting ! O Lord our God arise, Scatter his enemies, And make them fall! Confound their politics, Frustrate their knavish tricks, On him our hearts are fix’d, O save us all! Thy choicest gifts in store On him be pleased to pour, Long may he reign ! APPENDIX AVI. pont jw ON ‘saab my sie Sy sagabig om abiyd s qo aby by coma aioe mow mey Tw ssmbwyian yb : Fin Tey Oy "Tap DVN NBN “AIT MBA NINN ippan "onan 7a pnyy xyben CHONBID YP Ep? : Toye Ds TMB WIN SOSH YOY PIT? Be! We ho wy | I86 APPENDIX. May he defend our laws, And ever give us cause To sing with heart and voice, God save the King! O, grant him long to see Friendship and unity Always increase ! May he his sceptre sway, All loyal souls obey, Join heart and voice, huzza! God save the King ! XIX. LA TOURTERELLE ETD LE PASSANT: LE PASSANT. Que fais tu dans ce bois, plaintive tourterclle ? LA TOURTERELLE. Je gémis: j’ai perdu ma compagne fidéle. LE PASSANT. Ne crains tu point que Poiseleur Ne te fasse mourir comme elle? LA TOURTERELLE. Si ce n’est lui, ce fera ma douleur, APPENDIX. SER YS ‘aad mbit ts arm 523 We : pram ise Sas mI YY Hy Pa MAY) my Jaa) Py Sa me BR ww Ty Dun WIA) sony Apa pina ston iw Sy EN EXe sma) AD uit P movin Sax ny ayia ‘2 sind nn Wan msn PM? ONT) TT UI Jenn TPY TaN. Mp? wis TET Ny POTTS Da Taw 2 tN NON Wit Some nin Xonar x5 san ox H 28 I8g APPENDIX. XX. Morgengedanten, Der Mond verbirgt fein Licht, ver Mebel grauer Sebleier Decft Luft und Croe nicht mehr ju; Der Sterne Glanz erbleicht, per Gonne reges Seuer Stirt alle Wejen aus der Iiub. Der Himneel firbet fich mit ‘Burpur und Gapbhiren, Die frithe Morgenrdthe [acht, Und vor ver Rofer Glang, die ive Stirne gieren, Gutflieht das Hlaffe Deer dev Macht. Durch’8 rothe Mlorgenthor der Heitern Sternenbiihne Naht das verflarte Licht der Welt ; Die falben Wolfen glihn von blikendem Mubine, Und brennend Gold bedecft das Feld. Die Mofen Hfnen fic) und fpiegel an der Gonne Des Firhlerr Morgens Berlenthau ; Der Liljen Ambradamypf belebt zu unfrer Wonne Der garter Bhitter AWtlasqran. Der wade Landmann eilt mit Gingen in die Felder Und treibt vergniigt den fehweren Bflug ; Der Bagel rege Schaar erfirllet Luft. und Wilder Wit ihrer Stim’ und frithem Flug. APPENDIX. 289 DEON: sw say svanpnd inipy Sy sie’ non > jon Pan nese Spy) Da) IBDN DI!A NYY +995 spas yids soy ving! avin» POPS) PED WA? wD oaros peeing piyiy, one sappy D'p) DPM nas pa 1235) SMe nat an by map soos ova Say pera sms pb by inanp wipyin bys prae py ae B/pMY vay MET ME MY MD Ir InN? oy) owen ns spas ody wwix apa Sy as nya oon oon) ONT : mois io suis bb mien ty) iniayd sng mbm ees pp tras Ta map Vy ipa joey Sip myn ja yycbor ow sown yD AYR AY? 290) APPENDIX. OD Seydpfer! was ich feb’, find deiner Wllmacdht Werte, Du hift die Geele der Matur ; Der Gterne Lauf und Licht, der Gonne Glang und Stirfe, Gind deiner Hand Gefchopf’ und Spur. Du jtectit die Fackel an, die in dem Mond’ uns leuchtet, Du giebft den Winder Flitgel gu, Du leihjt per Macht den Whau, womit fie uns hefeuchtet, Du theilft der Sterne Lauf und tub. Du Haft der Berge Stoff aus Thon und Staub gedrehet, Der Schachten Crz aus Gand gefchmelst ; Du Haft das Firmament an feinem Ort erbhobet, Der Wolfen Mein darum gewalst. Dem if, der Strome Hlaf’t und mit dem SGehwangze ftirmet Haft du die Adern ansqehohlt 5 Du Haft dew Elephant auf Crden aufgethirmet, lind feinen NKnochenberg befeelt. Des weiter HDinumelsraums faphirene Gewolber Wegriindet auf den feeren Ort, Das ungemefne All, Legrengt nur durch fic) felber, Hoh aus dem Nichts dein einzig Wort. APPENDIX. mp Mwy IIe Forby nny tombiy ‘no amy ony Ay my yy wing sain omsbpp: pasta wis rods Sy spat ga Deyn mS Sinn mivon mas mb DDD Ini NA MAN 790 Oy Sen mage wip mms + smd) Maw WA, ODIS> TNA AY TT Mayen pays) weNp saat niney Sin panda spam /DIP ve) Doiy niyga mys “aap amps wands Diomy ‘ay OAT pA Ay RAIN NAN : Wy ts IMIR YESD ON yaw abn) maa eye may En :men wp) why 222 pan DONT DW Te) ABD rap ‘Sa Sy pone aisha odin wnbaip ayraga ys nin ya ‘Pb Yn) TE ANN TN U 291 999 - APPENDIX, Doc dreimal grofer Gott! e8 find erfchaffne Seelen Slr deine Whaten oiel gu Flein 5 Sie find unendlich grop, und wer fte will ergablen, Mup, gleich mite du, unendlich feyn. © Unbegreiflicher ich bleib’ in meinen Schranfen, Du Gonne blendft metw fehwaches Licht ; Und wen der Himmel felbft fei Wefen Hat zu danfen, Braucht eines Wurmes Lobfpruch nicht. Haller. XXI. LA PARTENZA. (CANZONETTA DI METASTASTO. ) Ecco quel fiero istante ; Nice, mia Nice, addio : Come vivrd, ben mio Cosi lontan da te ? Io vivrd sempre in pene, To non avrd pit bene ; E tu, chi sa se mai Ti sovverrai di me ? Soffri che in traccia almeno Di mia perduta pace Venga il pensier seguace Su Porme del tuo pie APPENDIX. wy ondp) mM NWS) on mt|— SDT NADY wNia? yp a wa AN SITS Ay aby “ba gyn ssnny> wisn Sayp gyn ai Inqya DIBEIN DY TWIN?) Prybin DINTTD May Hoye mp YOR aa} Alki: svono> oyib NB Min 295 pibyy 9b pide MAY MAS 82 IDS Pen pin Lyin aypy TN Ena : ay yas my) po ymin wp jaa POTIN TDP TW TON oybrin ND cy ssDNAS SYM WD NIN AN mys ms pon somisy win abs Gaz 293 294 APPENDIX. Sempre nel tuo cammino, Sempre m’avrai vicino ; E tu, chi sa se mai Ti sovverrai di me ? lo fra remote sponde Mesto volgendo i passi, Andro chiedendo ai sassi : La ninfa mia dov’ é? DalVuna all’altra aurora Te andrd chiamando ognora ; E tu, chi sa se mai Ti soyverrai di me ? To rivedrd sovente Le amene Piagge, o Nice, Dove vivea felice, Quando vivea con te. A me saran tormento Cento memorie e cento ; E tu, chi sa se mai Ti sovverral di me ? APPENDIX, pmo st pay amp NTT ym) yaa POTAN TD Tw ON snaon Sax: sis angby San mypa ny voords) | INE ON coms oy Sywig ny TROVE WINE JNTPN SME TIAN yan yaa POMS Tay awe DN "AY AY [Ty AA Aysan mate npon 92 ayy ote aby 1 “anaienyg m2 2 toon mini tar by DOBYNS IOVYy yen vp gan: Pom TS TWAS 295 296 APPENDIX. Ecco, diro, quel fonte, Dove avvampd di sdegno, Ma poi di pace in pegno La bella man mi dié. Qui si vivea di speme ; La si languiva insieme ; E tu, chi sa se mai Ti sovverrai di me ? Quanti vedrai giungendo Al nuovo tuo soggiorno, Quanti venirti intorno A offrirti amore e fa! Oh Dio! chi sa fra tanti Teneri omaggi e pianti, Oh Dio! chi sa se mai Ti sovverai di me? > Pensa qual dolce strale, Cara, mi lasci in seno, Pensa che amd Fileno Senza sperar merce: APPENDIX. pyroy mb : TDN IN 132 MPI 8 IDE MS DIT : my MDD Nom rab inp bai mb swbay pe pyin amb ymin qaabs Pome TD DwrON TIDD YT IN ADD MY yao Wa DY ‘pyin sobs: 75 syd HnyoN) ‘nan eee oe oe ‘eo AYP ODT NIN oysy ons mba yD yao Inn MIN TS Tw DX (pean BN NNwIA :peina ying taaba sn) sD MNT “9t ' a ale Dam °2 297 298 APPENDIX. Pensa, mia vita, a questo Barbaro addio funesto ; Pensa Ah! chi sa se mat Ti sovverrai di me ? XXII. SONETTO DEL MARINI. Apre Puomo infelice allor the nasce, In questa vita di miserie piena, Pria ch’al sol, gh occhi al pianto, e nato appena Va _ prigionier fra le tenaci fasce. Fanciullo poi, che non piu latte ul pasce, Sotto rigida sferza 1 giorni mena. Indi, in eth pit ferma e pili serena, Tra Fortuna ed Amor, more e rinasce. (uante poscia sostien, tristo e mendico, Fatiche e morti, infin che curvo e lasso Appoggia a debil legno il fianco antico ! Chiude alfin le sue spoglie angusto sasso, Ratto cosi, che sospirando io dico ; Dalla culla alla tomba é un breve passo. _ APPENDIX. 299 2a AB Ny PIYA PN NIP YT i) 'AI-—sN} 173 PmiN a? Tiros G2 =))32 DX: mqon ova wa way nmey. Poh my ipa YY mepigm ab) cava my ; DAwnj.2 in& BABA won :D2 wD inteyd oy) NEN] Na Nn wpa aN puen Ne wip) Say mypli va apo Say PIT. PIS mp2) m2 YI YW Maina. ni S2b2 pum My DXmy sp. ming Sp many yt SEN IN nmND poy “3pm by AND oF AIP poss cyt Siow 300) APPENDIX. ATLL Non ebur, neque aureum &e. Hor Od 162k. 2) /ON2) JY ‘By aay “29 ND HON oy ya we ps ND (yaya nm mapH misiy xd Yay sma asda nib AN} PVD NE AW NTIS snbon vida onpan Ss ‘mgs nm) pon my 3b POT DI ay oN) Dyno wey. prmpnd ay si AMS map APNE my smipom) ‘wes many abn Nsom) gem maw) wah on — Diy any. pps ry “ww WI) IT TN iam vipa iy nidiny AM IS (paSS sia mg) OW) nie mp neds oop novin vswan APPENDIX. DPN WA TAS NRT mNaz on Sin oy piv? D2 iByIN |p) oF JAB POW. yan pow “AYP PS TW O12 oY DIB spain nied nyan | Sys PANTY TY FP ALPS TAN TB FP par Ww TyE ‘aap navn MP7 NP ryabn D3 ou quip Pon mem Wyw2 9° FYB) MN TY ND HO) NO TN) 3p BD 3) IT PY ‘bp xO nye toon YAM Tay o3 Svip ma iy nym ibip ym +3 ‘ypyoa mane Ty Diny’s sdypoyy 3 301 1 ! & \ ‘ ’ — 5 eu ‘ é - : ” x e - = \ i & ' / . ’ i] ‘ \ - P “= nr P ‘ rs i , ‘ (1.) Refers to the First P ‘The figures without any mark before them, 4th edition. 50 nwN I. 46 UPS 1. 67 yw 172 FN 20 box » 228 » ODN 78 PDN 169 JON 63 TDN 172 5x 45x 37 ON 79 TON 1. 37 nbs 97 MPN 99 DIDS 172 95x 1» SOON EXPLAINED IN THIS WORK. 172 TINS » MII » ITS » SOS 65 nyanis 172 als I. 26 Ns Mt ON » TOS 1 PS 137 a's 7 a8 1. 46 FIN 70 DNS I. 46 bow 170 PS 7 TS 37 NDS 172 ABN » NBN 33 WIN 308 S 83 Soyye 172 59N » DOW 70 y)8 67 JEAN 171 DIS 66 ASIN 58 TIN TN 48 Nis 172 TN TS 131 S38 03 NTN 25 IN 48° iN » TAS a1 IDS » Oy 131 TAN » INS REGISTER OF WORDS 52 TAN 49 NN 65 mT 83 YN 26 hiss 201 ITN 65 IN 33 DIS 5 DIN 81 NTIS 131 ans ee Bia 16 TION 172 TAN 71 Oni 172 x 247 TYTN 172 4x8 1» TS art, 4th Edition, the figures refer to the Page. refer to the Etymology and Syntax, I. 31 3N 106 TAN » TEN 84 PAIN 131 man » MAN 172 §38 v6 WN 1, 36 bas 45 WAN 172 DIN 49 JIN 1.33 DIAN 9 DIN a OTN 141 Nas 1.37 TAIN 66 DIN 1. 37 Ja8 304 * 8 2018 4 WN 46 WWW _164 ms 99 WR 172, TAN » dion 48 }NS 131 ns 172 A 1 NHN 26 2 107 773 mn 107 72 57 m9 I. 33 ora 116 bya 1.45 Dw 127 AWD 073 49 WPAN 65 Na} » A923 REGISTER OF WORDS. 65 Mas 172 by 1. 67 AYN 73 ANN 91 YAN 92 DIYBIN JAS Daas 50 nis I. 33 193718 7S a3 DIN 172 WAya 107 ya » YE I. 33 pIaPA I. 55 23 *8 93 I. 66 wpa 163 93 7543 7m 1.47 N73 48 M3 aes? 37 WY 29 43MIN AN | » BY TDN » JOS DDS 57 YN 132 "DS 131 FIDS 75 ON 72 93 “HN » DBS 131 nDN 57 TEN a 78 AND 101 9}32 17 yb peed » ye3 » MPA 6 yb » Syvoa 27 3 50 ND 4 ya 83 12 A 64 3} 81 eae 0 MBN 68 JN 13 TN » WON 172 DIN » VIDS 82 NON 172 TIN YN > NBN I. 73 BIN 29 1338 IN 138 WD 163 ina 124 7n3 241 MO3 I. 78 }O3 16 p3 172 $93 78 na 72 ns 145 m3, 76 N33 » TDD 132.553 no WB 73 nbs 0+ mB 50 DN 46 ON 171 ON 58 TID Daa MDS 142 ADN 171 HON 47 1D 46 Nios 49 AND 107 WN » Wa 133 baa 70733 172 bia 181 $49 1 TDAa on 161 N32 I. 31 453 77 NI 145 FR * A palace. B24 16 73 1.36 4393 | 1.33 3 » 0 WB I, 35 ows 128 nwa 40997 164 wrt » WIT T35. Nv 1 4t q309 isa abba 3597 172 7a I. 66 90 63 ua 102 Snn REGISTER OF WORDS. 173 [3 793 21 ya » 33 67 arf) 149 7333 1.72 yy3 154 $3 41 now 66 DY 82 mys 1.27 AY aimsty 1.64 9A 161, 16 70 152 bn » Sb 231 pan 06 121 124 pyr 127 APY 63 154 Sys 7453 190 53b3 145 73 66 mba 190 y4 154 bb: “| 127 $4 49 9}5} 172 uot 74 by 1. 27 m37 i 170 930 147 mn 52 y4n 169 OYA 170 2997 172 aida TS): » 31 I. 69 mA) 151 DDT | | 83 43 48 9¥3 aby 65,16 993 137 ya 70 213 1.27 94 14 pial L3ies) 3 65 495 132 495 1.37 195} 172 $4 167 $7] 29 NAN yoy » MT » Tn 37) 168 smbar 1. 30 ps} 72 Tt 305 47 9473 noi 116 baa 8 23 72 3 121 ys 7073 47 35 13 V4 734 66 WAT 67 ale 3180 172 AND 167 nan 66 DIN 37 0 168 mn I. 32 Nt 83 MI} 97 TY » TN? 80 an DEUS. 187 29h em fe 72 mn 41 Ww 0 DIN 37 An 0 ne aa » VIN 6 avn I. 45 wn oon WN » oo WWM » an ~ 48 eal) raypn I. 27 St) 150 Dy 149 DY 18 yo 37 DY REGISTER OF WORDS. 94 wn » VOY 169 19 Dan 164 pn 49 190 67 DN 154 On 47 TON 123 1pn 65 DN 118 pon 95 YM 26 AYN I, 35 TMIS3N 75 pn 154 apn 78 npn 1.97 nby 70 NID 107 NY 57 yas 1.27 9) i = 133 bon 132 oon 70 pon 88 pon 1.31 Dn 123 Ton 51 nin 1.46 MON 10 ON 48 cemla » non 166 pion © yn 43 HN 202 419M » OH 91 won 93 pwn b 149 340 I. 31 490 I eee 2) 2d § 51 ni 1. 32 9999 as 3 148 mn M1 DY 164 NDONn 72 On 90 69 DIN 80 NDA son nan Saye » MIB » jaen 105 dH » men 163 pion 49 bn 72 von 49 nya 132 Sap 85 240 162 549 30, 51 99 T 166 pan 78 AWAN 1.31 9M 89 4 87 WAIN 142 wan ; 64 Ain 1.3] ON 2 37 pin 172 YAN 7 8 1.27 ny 63 yn 107 ptn » PIN 150 PIN 88 DIN 63 NN 107 90 » WO 134 py 68 i 9 Lo my 70 1) 24 iy 134 yh ga ie? 154 yu 84 wy =8 Oni 70 4m) 1 MBE 126 omwD 119 m2 1. 33 2375 154 DID “oon m6 an LHD se nin 70 93 any 65 mid 43 Nb 142 349 2 mp REGISTER 05 Tp" 134 Sa 1.66 AND 134 min CHEE 33 DUT} 156 mm 10 mY » A 4 3 127 33 o9 #22 49 NBD 150 nD3 66 MADD 83 OYDD 81 1193 #6 D2 128 DY I. 31 2 7332 » 1239 154 ws 173 x59 95 OF WORDS. 134 1D) 118 bb) 7B. lialadas! N22) 150 Ny? 135 a5) in| ony » ay! 161 9 evo ees » PY 74D » WY) 137 m3) 94 ny? 134 pa? = 162 3 44 75 75 55 169 }93 89 a3 100, 169 15 al mp3 62 DI 78 nbs 64 m9 54 123 108 WMD 50 nivo3 172 99 162 5953 64 YD 150 mao3 37 732 170 MDB 67 3313 173 YD 2 eb) 69 In? 69 53 u mad 173 39 » m2 65 wha »myad | baz Nae x 307 167 al) 132, 47 my 39 ADH 127 Fay 172 49 162 a0 I. 46 99 ots 166 mo! 64 IN3 12435 » T23 » AD » MIS » Tad 45 was » nad o7 W933 74 3 37 AD 172 RD) 132 aN? 172 DNP 52 ab 308 179 7" 130 npp 3 vi 7 npy 79 TWN 76 niyo 73 ivy 167 93519 73 AMD 25 N¥ID 81 T2¥D 126 AYYID 14] npysi tol DYyD 189 wap 68 Dip 15 pI 73 OpID 21 AIP 66 NIP 88 41D T3V 5 142,75 AND 163 5 mm 1 1. 36 nym REGISTER OF WORDS. 88 mayo 163 syn 169 nnd 81 MADD 7 ¥o1D » 22 » ABP 65 MID? 1 wiper 1 Eaonpen a7 132019 s2 nevi 79 19D 7 ayn 52 yard 78 ND 7 31D 73 12D1) » WDD 67 YDID 1.36 ABDI 75 tyId 66 BY 7 Soy 72 p19 7 myo 107 9395 173 Ney) a 173 ND » DINO » PID 1.36 FANN 21 MD » map 173 MRD 65 p01 27 YBN ot DMD 64 YD 77 7319 78 a>} A) 127 7319 185 IAIN 73 UND 70 xbi9 St IN20 53 NDNPD 65 BLADID 1.37 dN 13 non »mbY 31 nbn 149 955 169 125 15 5199 167 419 » TM I. 67 ya 173 549 82 nD 67 IDO 66 DID 74 YD 79 AYYiO 74 nD 66 NID 74 WDD 66 NIN rai mi 79 NWN 85 by 138 Nyy 70 nyp 73 MAND 65 DID 7 nan 95 nysm 4 n3vn 88 TIM , 8 DN? 72 5% 37 np ifa TNID 50 ANID 84 “ANID 173 T8819 51 DSN 173 PND 21 92ND » NBN 154 DNID 1.37 Syn 08 319 84 nwt 173 DYBID i 37.539 3 130 27 mA 0 1370 18 T9 » THQ 170 yyy 27 YD 100 7119 102 DMD 168 39 I 833 | 88 pinta 71 (NY) BD I. 33 97} ° 47) 156 NWI L 45 Siy 106 yaw 45 soba 50 ny) 154 mows B77 aap 132 PY 130 jy 52 In) 154 "BD 107 Opp » ORD 80.9ND 43 nny Wy { REGISTER OF WORDS. 7 wav 77 mae st RY 2 pvp I. 31 D9 | m9 9932 7 Oya 26 WY ay 24 Sing 56 1783 128 wD I. 32 v9 37 NY} 132 aN) 64.99 I. 32 DD Mn ADD 74 AD 27 AD 127 9) 43 IY ay | st nose 52 Swi 126 bin ss mete 3 46 FM) 124 ON) 27 yh) 45 1D) 133 m3 #9 993 123 125) 9 7993 105 DD) 106 pnd3 2 71219) 76 ANY 6 DIDAY | 7 3b 0 eng 7 2D 81 n BvD 132 Ya) 1, 82 43 791373 68 abap) 108 993 8 ons 603 173 MND3 si nom %8 TDN 6 ning 73 IMD 57 DID asa) 162 “AND 133 ay ee 309 142 bl beh) 63 NID W 66 Nin 19 TaD T. 33 4SN5 a0 TYN3 108 YNd 142 22 41 NY) 154 bay 79 1233 41 33) » 1223 84 43) 24 wad 151 13D 152 MAD 173 WIAD I, 32 44D 165 84 ay 310 I. 54 ay 73 ay | 62 Dy 0 TDW 6 yyy 149 nyy I. 57 aby on TY 13 Wy » WY 133 wy 83 wy 91 wy 92 ony 169 NY » TAY 126 yp 74775 173 DINND 108 nnp » MAB 72 ns 6 Dane 164 YN » mY REGISTER OF WORDS. 69 52) 88, 66 Py 13 "BY » BY 45 npy ip 79 ANY 68 pasy 52 ONY 133 NOVY 26 DAY 173 apy 70 Apy {.70 "y 1.69 35 26 PPB I, 32.95 I, 35 TB 248 mp 72 995 oD 127 YE 64 DY ans. roby 169 DDY 17] DY » Dy 123 oy 65 DY 171 ny 173 DY 5s NEY 203 pioy 171 MDy I. 27 7yDy 42 *Y 69 IY 29 may 26 DY 5 71 Syb 173 DYD WEES 65 pays 110 IPB 115 1p » WPd AY 74.48 126 PI 80 “TY 79 PY er DY 57 1) 72 51, 46 py 117 5y 1.33 ADP I, 32 wraay 7by 73 sby » Wey 1. 27 N28 76 wap 168 . 149 mB 50 D5 22 bye bye 72 pals » may 43 VAY 1.77 by 60 TW 173 TY > ae JIE. Py yes o7 ay 7 Sy » OOby uy 64 Wy 70 by » TAY 127 yy i 75 ty 79 OND 132 AB 18 TAB 1.2775 173 fis I. 32 $B I. 62 IND 53 NY 66 RIN sai 64.9 78 my 72 WN ” 8 13 3p » 27 “AIP BP 3 TMP 149 Jp 204 Yap 49 nwp 48 WY erie) 83 N49 52 nyo 107 ANS 9 9B 172 Pr I, 32 pI 4 327 10 yp) REGISTER OF WORDS. 76 ADS 190 ny 65 "DY 76 ANDY 78 TYP 75 VP 14} ASP 21 8p » YNP 70 WP 52 Psp 25, SAP 13 WAP 190 7D nD) 154 7 52 9 sy) 117 37 6 fa 77 my) 12 Ay 150 AY 143 NIDY 106 MIDS » MDS 88 YY P 88 bp 152 bb» 71 yop 78 TDP 75 3 89 TNIP 21 mp eis » TP >} 51 DN) 132 bm 50 DYDMT 101 pina 1, 69 99 173 DP") 62 wy 499 133 WADI 64 D5 a7 Sy 46 nby a Soy 69 yoy I. 32 Yip 37 Ip 130 NAP 47 Op 87 1Op 46 nibp 139 DSP 64 45) mata 163.937 26 ya) 107 aia Dae. am 137 39 » 39 52 an 73m 2M Olt 236 JY 78 DY I. 32 poy 127 YY 149 3p 83 4p 46 NIIP 23 WAP 127 DIP 71 wp 176 WIT 7 Sip 137 DIP 25 ANT 76 AN 62 WI or UNA 7TWRO » TYR » TINA 142 945 51 N}24 94 Pa 46, 14 ba 312 163 yore a1 Ee 48 nnaw 27 bby 41 yay 69 jy I. 45 nay 150 py 162 mpy 64 Ww » W omy 15 wy I. 33 paw 91 my 93 Dw 68 hoy 88 TIWY 162 nin 73 7A | pas s2 nonin REGISTER OF WORDS. 48 yw 84 NYO 16 "Ow 14 2 36 may 75 We) 15 Nay 73 Ni 15 may v0 na 73 my 94 3 1 Da » DAY ab » Dpyy 45 mpyy 70 "yw 69 “yy nay 46 MIAN 181 IA 31 nban u” 163 now 63 now 65 Ow 149 Oby » DY 80 nigek 63 whys 94 swivoys 92 pwoy 173 pivioy 6. 44 ow 173 OW no mY 51 Drow 9 73 oy 94 DY 93 oy 125 yw hn 52 MII 90 AIAN | 133 Jan | 83 DIY I. 32 ny co mW 50 Pw 85 ppiy 67 wi 50 “hy 26 In 52 Sn 67 ny 52 OY 78 nay 42 » DIY 116 23Y 107 naw 154 Day 118 pw 179 a) 65 haw 127 pidby’ 71 SA 127 737 126 San 64 TINY » WN 65 ney 84 bis 149 byw 62 yuaw 81 nya 64 Sau 83 Daw 24 ype) 8 NW 17 93 19 way 91 pay 76 nav 19 WAY » WY 137 yw » DW ee mPa 133 MOTIF 91 myer 94 yyw 93 Dyn REGISTER OF WORDS. 173 JF) 8 nay 7 yA 65 YN 75 An 149 won I, 32 bn 172 A 7m oF 71 on » ODA 1. 68 WDIIF) 65 YAMA 66 WIN 133 IDA 21 moon 81 noon 7 DON INDEX OF BIBLICAL PASSAGES CITED AND EXPLAINED IN THIS WORK. REV. F. ILIFF. D.D., HEAD MASTER OF THE ROYAL INSTITUTION SCHOOL, LIVERPOOL. 9 3) 13 al apin s7 nydin 56 ATA 67 ALAR a nan 173 ANN BY THE Note—The * marks the page in the First Part of the Grammar. GENESIS. GENESIS. JM dys, Wego 2:12. *25 —— KO 7, 13. *84 —— 2]4 == 209 — 236 14, *84 — 246 —- 100 Ph Altes 15. *84 — 216 16. 228 3. *87 ire, PANS — 218 as Vay 4, *83 ee 8H) — 249 He, pare 5. *85 23. *88 6. 249 a OG 7. *83 24, *84 — *87 — *85 — *88 25. 206 — 249 ate DA Nae! Dl, Base 3. 108 14, 236 aa YANG 15. *85 4. 106 21. *40 7. 106 26. 201 — 224 28. *88 8. 106 30. *84 13. 109 189 22S 2:4. 106 eo) 6. 225 — 233 8) 189} 4: 9) 919 10. 100 — 231 GENESIS. 4: 2, 246 214 219 246 *88 *84 *87 256 237 . *84 . 212 . 106 . 207 5 tele . 209 106 95 . 214 . 228 4. 209 - 208 . *40 . 200 LOG 219 7: 4, 225 . 106 . 106 5 WAL — SODAS oH oe ot bo GENESIS. 8: Oy ibs 12% 13: oot O4 2. 106 5. 106 208 8. 230 . 224 . 231 208 . 247 . 185 . 237 . 224 9. 106 - AOC to PAO 233 9. 238 12 95 Ih teh 192 5. 229 . 214 - *89 . 226 2. 192 100 . *85 246 GENESIS. . 204 NOE Te vfs aay . 264 | . *80 | moe 5. *80 | . 214 . 232 . 256 . 214 » PAG | . 332 - 232 - 238 5 Rgsh) . 230 - *89 - 220 . 233 26. . 120 202 211 222 222 213 | 253 219 216 224 233 | | | GENESIS. 18:29. 204 181 256 *89 232 fe) alles} 9. 204 5 DABS 225 5 Oe . 239 121 227 IOS Fs DEY: 236 PAE Ts Cea Us GR tio. 9 Bat . 210 . 209 248 PHS GES Bly 5 DAP, . 208 239 135 PBS Ai, GAN 5 PPE . *87 192 2. GENESIS. 24: 7. 252 12. *88 14, 214 — 228 33. *89 34. *89 44, 209 55. 238 67) 190: 226 256 231 197 121 214 242 18] 231 229 2 2ho 225 210 233 247 . 239 231 5, 233 . 241 . 209 29: 26: ° — no CO we rH OOD 27: bo bo ASH | | Bl we G2 co GO w d14 GENESIS.. 28 29 30: ol; 32: 333 34; BOs 37: 38: 39: 40: MPS 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: AT: 48; PDE 4. 9. 19. Dis 34. bo No _—— See PLS Sas ey [ go 20 po 9s 223 189 *58 198 228 247 234 186 . 225 . 237 5 LED 106 209 . 330 . 230 . 201 . *60 . 206 . 145 . 234 . 238 INDEX OF BIBLICAL PASSAGES. GENESIS, 48:20. *40 49: 1. 106 8. 209 22. 237 Exopvus. 40:18. 204 35. 118 41: 4. 204 LEVITICUS. 238 2e . 193 . 249 . 189 Od elu, 122 21; 122 DRY E Ou? . 228 237 192 92 NUMBERS. Lid feel 22 3:46, 204 7:13, 204 92565237; 16. 225 11:29. 234 . 206 253 238 «229 . 214 200 200 - 200 217 227 2740 193 JOSHUA. . 242 190 . 204 190 190 LLg ple Ae 14, 237 - 210 201 JUDGES. 4:20. 243 Sb 242 9:28. 233 iW US Wee oa Hs 24. 201 opemo20 2 2 D0) 13:19, 238 14:18. 234 a0 Zoos 41. 239 Rutu. lls diy Bee, 22) 959210) IPERS PL) 1 SAMUEL. Ne}, GBS) 223.231 8:28. 198 17:15. 238 1 Krnas. IOS1T. 223 Qe ie, 290 2 KINGs. Ie 25 21 2s 147 180 . 198 256 207 . 229 117 . 229 - 180 160 119 e190 252 138 189 220 9:13. 20s ez NEHEMIAH 9:28. 210 ESTHER, ie 4. 234 8: 228 9: 1, 120 JOB. : 5. 226 7. 229 9, 254 214 29 *74 197 *70 « 193 9. 237 131 . 209 237 . 237 197 37 PsALMs, Ls als 185 5. 244 PsALMs. 119 135: 7168. ee - 239 AS UGE, 121 119 121 259 170 170 139: 7. *76 —— PROVERBS. ie 15. 26. eS: 35. see J. WERTREIMER AND CO., PRINTERS, FINSBURY CIRCUS, 232 229 131 237 199 243 ISAIAH. . 200 . 18k . 238 . 228 188 121 . 188 191 JEREMIAH. 103 3. 237 20. 210 li? 437240 22:29. 202 51: 8. 254 LAMENTA- TIONS, ls wale 9, 242 as 120 3:29. 233 EZEKIEL. ae Rie o4 17 bE Beir aan 4 | 18: 23. 243 24: 3; 135 27: 131 ole 119 34:0, Zia 43: 6. 215 - DANIEL. 9: 197 HoskEa. 9°86. Zoe AMOS. 9: 4. 188 JONAH, 2:9. 235 —e Mican. 6: 6. *78 iG 131 HABAKKUK 1:16. 237 HAGGAI. 2:11. 240 ZECHARIAH 1528206 dca 10; 3. 222 MALACHI. 1S Gee oee — 199 3:21, 264 Cr : f , ae a ees rare | | ae i antes be miata 1m | aye ee hy Saber pds ae iets Te al Le. niente why ~Raienit ( aentath ct ‘en Wo ta . # ; lh nes a iia biped” ¥ “hh ai : jest iu pared Feige 5 al > ae aes ee Sri babes ae rt ¥ hy an i phe myealss REE teu i> 2e8 ae cea] nh’ lee Hy bls avy My By eae ns Ais ¥a Re East ne bash a " p at hah. ro we ae > t a view, i $ elite pat Rita Ge oa a Sabha | eo aT RMN TN sk... Ree HL PBA S hae : q jue! s 5s Oa Ne ine ips ila rey eve. Peay eee al CRE TRE . Bihtet, “ie ie pa Ov) Wy ipn® i's tye fas yee 4 Me pad Hae ip? By fe pais Stee! oct Ihe 4 saanial® cae 7: " Wa . ‘pe ty Re ee ii : jie aq: \ a WR oh " a r pee wat Ord Lam Yite,, amples apt heehee ta Ne wee 28 ay mh dk cay RS pies Wan’ Soc note 3: o *. i BNC ACS a Le ae it Par r y Tse abe P " ’ vs 4 Ti het ee AG . Pri 1 ola. are nf Rieti x is ahak rae Ne hin me ae a0 gepiaanimee u ae Lee R AT %f ORB, ro re i - WORKS PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR, WALTON, AND MABERLY. A School Dictionary of Antiquities, Selected and Abridged from the ‘‘ Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities.’ By Wii1i1am Smiru, LL.D. One small volume, Two Hundred Wood-cuts. 10s. 6d. cloth. Tus work, abridged from the large “ Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiqui- ties,” exhibits, in a form adapted to the use of junior pupils, the results of the labours of modern scholars in the various subjects included under the general term of Greek and Roman Antiquities. A New Classical Dictionary Or ANcIENT BrocrapHy, Mytuotoey, and Grocrapuy. Edited by Dr. Wm. Smitu. One vol. 8vo. 1. 1s. Tuts work comprises the same subjects as are contained in the well-known Dictionary of Lempriére, avoiding its errors, supplying its deficiencies, and exhibiting in a concise form the results of the labours of modern scholars. Niebuhr’s History of Rome, From the earliest times to the Fall of the Western Empire. Fourth Edition. Five vols. 8vo. 3/. 6s. 6d. Vols.I. and II, Translated by Bisuorp THiritwatt and ARcHpEAcoN Hares. 16s. each. Vol. III. Translated by Dr. Smiru and Dr. Scumirz. 18s. 6d. Vols. IV. and V. Lectures. Second Ed. (Vols. II. and III. of the Lectures). Edited by Dr.Scumitrz. Two vols. 16s. Tue great work of Niebuhr stands unrivalled among all ancient and modern histories of the Roman people, for the extent and profundity of the investigations on which it is founded, and for the singular vigour of mind by which the author elicits a true narrative of events from the masses of fable, contradiction, and absurdity, under which it lay buried till his time. The author does not content himself with detailing the results he has arrived at, but gives at full length the researches themselves which led to them; so that the reader, who devotes adequate study to this profound work, will not only acquire sounder views of Roman history than could be derived from any other source whatever, but will acquire a knowledge of the critical methods by which the haze of remote anti- quity has been so happily penetrated. Niebuhr’s Lectures on the History of Rome. Edited by Dr. Scumirz. Second Edition enlarged and greatly improved. Three Volumes 8vo. Portrait. 17. 4s. cloth. Or, sold separately, Vol. I. 8s. Vols. Il. and III. 16s. THESE Lectures form a history of Rome from the earliest ages to the overthrow of the Western Empire. Their subjects are concurrent (up to the first Punic war) with those of Niebuhr’s great work “The History of Rome,” and compre- hend discussions on the sources of Roman history, with the criticism and analysis of those materials. The Lectures differ from the History, in presenting a more popular and familiar exposition of the various topics of investigation, which are treated in the History in a more severe style. Among the subjects most elaborately treated, are the geographical positions of the ancient races of Italy, which are traced through all their migrations; the political, military, and legal constitution, and the domestic life of the Romans; the state of literature at different epochs; and the portraits of the nations that gradually came within the widening sphere of the Roman power. The last two volumes are an indispensable SEQUEL to Niebuhy’s History of Rome, from the point where that History terminates. Poetical Works of John Keats. In One Vol. Fcap., with a Portrait from a Drawing by Hitton. Price 5s. cloth. Also published in Royal 8vo., price 2s. Confessions of an Opium Eater. Royal 8vo. Price 1s. 6d. eK, WORKS PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR, WALTON, AND MABERLY,. Dr. R. G. Latham’s English Grammar, For the Use of Schools. Fifth Edition. 12mo. 4s. 6d. cloth. THE object of this work is to lay down the principles of English Grammar as distinguished from mere rules. The student in the middle and higher classes of schools, for whom the work is chiefly intended, is made acquainted with the con- nexion of the various branches of the great Gothic stock of languages; and, by learning the history of his own tongue, and its relations to the dialects with which it is connected, acquires the elements of the general philological classification of languages. ‘The book presents him with new and numerous facts, and habituates him to reasoning upon them; and while the work can be wholly mastered, independently of any knowledge of either of the classical languages, as much logicis given as is necessary to explain the structure of propositions. Dr. R. G. Latham’s English Language. Third Edition. 8vo. 15s cloth. In this work, the History of the English Language is traced from its remote origin, through its successive changes and periods, to its present state. The nature of its connexion with all the languages, which either form its basis or have been in any degree incorporated with it, is minutely detailed. The historical portion is everywhere illustrated by extracts from primitive books, records, and inscriptions ; by analogies drawn from the Sanskrit, and classical languages, and from the Gothic, Celtic, and Sclavonic dialects of ancient and modern Europe; and by comparative catalogues of derivations, affinities, and provincialisms. Dr. R. G. Latham’s Elements of English Grammar, For the Use of Ladies’ Schools. Fecap. 8vo. 1s. 6d. cloth. “ Instead of a mere dry classification of words and rules, often difficult to be understood, it gives a philosophical view of the whole subject, and yet with so much clearness as to assist the reason no less than the memory. The first part gives the history of our language and traces its formation from the German tribes who successively conquered and settled in our island. In the third part, which treats of declension and conjugation, the connexion of these subjects with the rules of euphony, is shown in a very lucid and interesting manner. We think this little work will prove a boon to mothers and instructors, and invest with interest a branch of education which has often proved one of the most uninviting steps in the ladder of learning.” — Quurterly Educational Magazine, No. VIII. History and Etymology of the English Language, For the Use of Classical Schools. By Dr. R. G. Laruam, F.R.S. Fcap. 8vo. 1s. 6d. cloth. Tuis is an introductory grammar, intended for those desirous of studying the English language with reference to the history, the transitions, and the analogies of its forms. Elements of English Grammar, For Commercial Schools. By Dr. R. G. Laruam, F.R.S. Feap. S8vo. ls. 6d. cloth. Tue first part of this grammar contains, besides a concise history of the origin and changes of the language, an enumeration of the places where it is at present universally or partially spoken. The section on Sounds and Letters includes a condensation of the treatise prefixed to Walker’s Dictionary, and settles the pronunciation of many doubtful words by a reference to the best modern usage. The fundamental principles of the language are elucidated in the sections on Jnflection and Derivation, and on Syntax. Latham’s First Outlines of Logic, Applied to Grammar and Etymology. 12mo. Is. 6d. cloth. WERTHEIMER AND CO., TYPP. egy Us 14 © « 4 > hh me Se e's te te eRe Oe ON eS st ea a) SD priticashepeaene ys « Sas PD SNS eS ae Pe} bs , . s . wa lee is oa) ate “et * AM seth ; ‘ . : . ete’ Meee ass gnats ete wy ‘ ‘ . \ + ete eS SHS eveatette STUY a PA On he Os are ‘ Nee ete * t x Gt ete g eee ok Pie) eet ek + diate et 4 Woetd we Y Rt tetos Seta e se etass « « Chet « ‘ ‘* TAN NGO FO t : +) ‘ ae iw Ooxias J + . Sele ») wate adie Tote eure tetet te a) AA Neteree etd T9498 vere +, a4 \? ee 'f we Pm §=— P4701 .H96 ; PP rasrnn The etymology and syntax (in th ceton Theological Seminary—Speer Library : > », we 444 : h . yf *. ] es ON * etetet ae eleste Prince ; RGU aN *) wteis a we St ae SoS x he * +4 UL ~ * ‘“ x >») ‘ averate m TN it mtetethy “ce ‘ OK 4 A »; << eet wee ~ _ ‘ le tetute tela tes ee emt | rs ea ata te ta ae ta tatet » S84 tet ey | ‘ yh) ‘ > 2h Nerney OR RRO ee Us ¥ ny 101 yy: <% . > ; b 1 101 2 00 ¥ ¢ +t ‘ ‘ . SHAS a . stata ety 4 erat Se ne ee) PoP Ay) ie tee < AU eee ee . tt Ns ‘sy va ene AS, < - ‘ ~ * + Ces) eet t : VIO NLY RATE OA PA eee bate 2 Paras Ao, *. ‘ 25 2 a if « SPLAT h Pas Poe AAT ba atat ee Ce 18 y SPL PS Ph bP >> ‘id rs as AP a or pares SE 4 > BP ee ae) < ~ be rag hoes rs wert ate ie jack st ?>) ‘ Pagth ta) 0 attic ao oe as a tee oe , 4, Ny . a 5 eS % it oesees é = he ee ete es < 40 as 4 “ Rey ey “a As Oe At O18 &